2019 Nissan Altima Sedan | Owner's Manual and Maintenance

2019 ALTIMA SEDAN

OWNER’S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. Owner’s Manual Supplement

The information contained within this supplement updates the following information in the 2019 NISSAN Altima Owner’s Manual:

∙ “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” in the “Instruments and controls” section of the Owner’s Manual

∙ “LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of the Owner’s Manual

∙ “INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION” in the “Starting and driving” section of the Owner’s manual

Read carefully and keep in vehicle.

Printing: October 2018 Publication No. SU19EA 0L34G0 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

Driver Assistance (if so equipped) The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the settings for driving, parking, and braking aids. Menu item Result Emergency Brake Displays available emergency braking options. Front Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Emergency Braking” , “Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection” and “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Lane (if so equipped) Displays available lane options. Lane Departure Warning Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Blind Spot (if so equipped) Displays available blind spot options. Blind Spot Warning Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Side Indicator Brightness Allows user to change the brightness of the side indicator. Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays available parking aids. Auto Show Sonar Allows user to auto display the sonar. For additional information, refer to “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Rear Allows user to turn the rear sonar on or off. Distance Allows user to set the distance sensor range to Long/Medium/Short. Volume Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Medium/Low. Rear Cross Traffic Alert Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Driver Attention Alert (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Driver Alertness” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Timer Alert (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the set the timer alert. Low Temperature Alert (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off. Chassis Control (if so equipped) Displays available chassis control options. LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) (if so equipped)

The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 70 km/h (45 mph) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road. The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit ᭺A located above the inside mirror. The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. For additional information, refer to “LDW system operation” in this section. LSD3213 WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. LDW SYSTEM OPERATION The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 70 km/h (45 mph) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LSD3291 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Lane” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Lane Departure Warning” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 70 km/h (45 mph) or if it cannot detect lane markers. LSD3215 ∙ Do not use the LDW system under the ∙ The system may not function prop- – When traveling close to the vehicle following conditions as it may not erly under the following conditions: in front of you, which obstructs the function properly: lane camera unit detection range. – On roads where there are multiple – During bad weather (rain, fog, parallel lane markers; lane mark- – When rain, snow, dirt or an object snow, etc.). ers that are faded or not painted adheres to the windshield in front clearly; yellow painted lane mark- of the lane camera unit. – When driving on slippery roads, ers; non-standard lane markers; or such as on ice or snow. – When the headlights are not bright lane markers covered with water, due to dirt on the lens or if the aim- – When driving on winding or un- dirt, snow, etc. ing is not adjusted properly. even roads. – On roads where the discontinued – When strong light enters the lane – When there is a lane closure due to lane markers are still detectable. camera unit. (For example, the light road repairs. – On roads where there are sharp directly shines on the front of the – When driving in a makeshift or curves. vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) temporary lane. – On roads where there are sharply – When a sudden change in bright- – When driving on roads where the contrasting objects, such as shad- ness occurs. (For example, when lane width is too narrow. ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel – When driving without normal tire seams or lines remaining after or under a bridge.) conditions (for example, tire wear, road repairs. (The LDW system low tire pressure, installation of could detect these items as lane spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard markers.) wheels). – On roads where the traveling lane – When the vehicle is equipped with merges or separates. non-original brake parts or sus- – When the vehicle’s traveling direc- pension parts. tion does not align with the lane – When you are towing a trailer or marker. other vehicle. SYSTEM TEMPORARILY SYSTEM MALFUNCTION UNAVAILABLE If the LDW system malfunctions, it will can- If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight cel automatically and “Not Available Sys- under high temperature conditions (over tem Malfunction” will appear in the vehicle approximately 40°C [104°F]) and then information display. If “Not Available Sys- started, the LDW system may be deacti- tem Malfunction” appears in the vehicle in- vated automatically and the following formation display, pull off the road to a safe message will appear in the vehicle infor- location and stop the vehicle. Place the mation display: “Unavailable: High Cabin shift lever in the P (Park) position and the Temperature.” ignition switch in the OFF position and re- When the interior temperature is reduced, start the engine/motor. If “Not Available the LDW system will resume operating au- System Malfunction” continues to appear tomatically. in the vehicle information display, have the system checked. It is recommended that LSD3216 The LDW system is not designed to warn you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. under the following conditions: SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ∙ When you operate the lane change sig- The lane camera unit ᭺1 for the LDW sys- nal and change traveling lanes in the tem is located above the inside mirror. To direction of the signal. (The LDW system keep the proper operation of the LDW sys- will become operable again approxi- tem and prevent a system malfunction, be mately 2 seconds after the lane change sure to observe the following: signal is turned off.) ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. ∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 70 km/h (45 mph). ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans- After the above conditions have finished parent material) or install an accessory and the necessary operating conditions near the camera unit. are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume. INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION (if so equipped)

∙ Do not place reflective materials, such ∙ The Intelligent Lane Intervention sys- as white paper or a mirror, on the instru- tem is primarily intended for use on ment panel. The reflection of sunlight well-developed freeways or high- may adversely affect the camera unit’s ways. It may not detect the lane mark- capability of detecting the lane markers in certain road, weather, or driving ers. conditions. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas The Intelligent Lane Intervention system around the camera unit. Do not touch must be turned on with the dynamic driver the camera lens or remove the screw assistance switch, every time the ignition is located on the camera unit. If the cam- placed in the ON position. era unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a The Intelligent Lane Intervention system NISSAN dealer. will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 70 km/h (45 mph) LSD3213 and above, and only when the lane mark- WARNING ings are clearly visible on the road. Failure to follow the warnings and in- The Intelligent Lane Intervention system structions for proper use of the Intelli- warns the driver when the vehicle has left gent Lane Intervention system could the center of the traveling lane with an in- result in serious injury or death. dicator and a steering wheel vibration. The system helps assist the driver to return the ∙ The Intelligent Lane Intervention sys- vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by tem will not steer the vehicle or pre- applying the brakes to the left or right vent loss of control. It is the driver’s wheels individually (for a short period of responsibility to stay alert, drive time). safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the ve- The Intelligent Lane Intervention system hicle at all times. monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit ᭺A located above the inside mirror. ᭺1 Dynamic driver assistance switch ᭺2 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator ᭺3 Intelligent Lane Intervention indicator (if so equipped) INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION SYSTEM OPERATION The Intelligent Lane Intervention system operates above approximately 70 km/h (45 mph). When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator (orange) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. Then, the Intelligent Lane Intervention system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane. To turn on the Intelligent Lane Intervention system, push the dynamic driver assistance switch after starting the engine/motor. The Intelligent Lane Inter- vention indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch again to turn off the Intelli- gent Lane Intervention system. The Intelli- gent Lane Intervention indicator will turn LSD3312 off. HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION SYSTEM To turn on the Intelligent Lane Intervention system, push the dynamic driver assistance switch on the instrument panel after starting the engine. The Intelligent Lane Intervention indicator in the vehicle information display will appear. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch again to turn off the Intelligent Lane Inter- vention system. The Intelligent Lane Intervention indicator in the vehicle information display will turn off. The Intelligent Lane Intervention system will be automatically turned off when the engine is off.

LSD3401 INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION ∙ When the Intelligent Lane Interven- – When driving without normal tire SYSTEM LIMITATIONS tion system is operating, avoid exces- conditions (for example, tire wear, sive or sudden steering maneuvers. low tire pressure, installation of WARNING Otherwise, you could lose control of spare tire, tire chains, non- the vehicle. standard wheels). Listed below are the system limitations for the Intelligent Lane Intervention ∙ The Intelligent Lane Intervention sys- – When the vehicle is equipped with system. Failure to follow the warnings tem will not operate at speeds below non-original brake parts or sus- and instructions for proper use of the approximately 70 km/h (45 mph) or if pension parts. it cannot detect lane markers. Intelligent Lane Intervention system – When you are towing a trailer or could result in serious injury or death. ∙ Do not use the Intelligent Lane Inter- other vehicle. vention system under the following ∙ The Intelligent Lane Intervention sys- – On roads where there are multiple conditions as it may not function tem may activate if you change lanes parallel lane markers; lane mark- properly: without first activating your turn sig- ers that are faded or not painted nal or, for example, if a construction – During bad weather (rain, fog, clearly; yellow painted lane mark- zone directs traffic to cross an exist- snow, etc.). ers; non-standard lane markers; or ing lane marker. If this occurs you may lane markers covered with water, – When driving on slippery roads, need to apply corrective steering to dirt, snow, etc. complete your lane change. such as on ice or snow. – On roads where discontinued lane – When driving on winding or un- ∙ Because the Intelligent Lane Interven- markers are still detectable. tion may not activate under the road, even roads. – On roads where there are sharp weather, and lane marker conditions – When there is a lane closure due to curves. described in this section, it may not road repairs. activate every time your vehicle begins to leave its lane and you will need – When driving in a makeshift or to apply corrective steering. temporary lane. – When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow. – On roads where there are sharply – When a sudden change in bright- After the above conditions have finished contrasting objects, such as shad- ness occurs. (For example, when and the necessary operating conditions ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel are satisfied, the warning and assist func- seams or lines remaining after or under a bridge.) tions will resume. road repairs. (The Intelligent Lane Condition B: Intervention system could detect While the Intelligent Lane Intervention sys- these items as lane markers.) tem is operating, you may hear a sound of The assist function of the Intelligent Lane brake operation. This is normal and indi- Intervention system is not designed to – On roads where the traveling lane cates that the Intelligent Lane Intervention work under the following conditions (warn- merges or separates. system is operating properly. ing is still functional): – When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane SYSTEM TEMPORARILY ∙ When the brake pedal is depressed. marker. UNAVAILABLE ∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far – When traveling close to the vehicle Condition A: as necessary for the vehicle to change in front of you, which obstructs the lanes. lane camera unit detection range. The warning and assist functions of the Intelligent Lane Intervention system are ∙ When the vehicle is accelerated during – When rain, snow or dirt adheres to not designed to work under the following Intelligent Lane Intervention system the windshield in front of the lane conditions: operation. camera unit. ∙ When you operate the lane change sig- ∙ When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) – When the headlights are not bright nal and change the traveling lanes in approach warning occurs. due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly. the direction of the signal. (The Intelli- ∙ When the hazard warning flashers are gent Lane Intervention system will be operated. – When strong light enters the lane deactivated for approximately 2 sec- ∙ When driving on a curve at high speed. camera unit. (For example, the light onds after the lane change signal is directly shines on the front of the turned off.) After the above conditions have finished vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) and the necessary operating conditions ∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less are satisfied, the Intelligent Lane Interven- than approximately 70 km/h (45 mph). tion system application of the brakes will resume. Condition C: Temporary disabled status at high temperature: If the following messages appear in the vehicle information display, the Intelligent If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight Lane Intervention system will be turned off under high temperature conditions (over automatically. approximately 40°C [104°F]) and then the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is ∙ “Not Available Poor Road Conditions”: turned on, the Intelligent Lane Intervention When the VDC system (except Traction system may be deactivated automatically Control System [TCS] function) or ABS and the following message will appear on operates. the vehicle information display: “Unavail- ∙ “Currently unavailable”: able: High Cabin Temperature.” When the When the VDC system (except Traction interior temperature is reduced, the sys- Control System [TCS] function) or ABS tem will resume operating automatically. operates. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION LSD3216 ∙ “Currently not available”: When the VDC system is turned off. If the Intelligent Lane Intervention system SYSTEM MAINTENANCE malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The lane camera unit ᭺1 for the Intelligent Action to take: The LDW indicator (orange) will illuminate in the display. Lane Intervention system is located above When the above conditions no longer exist, the inside mirror. To keep the proper opera- turn off the Intelligent Lane Intervention If the LDW indicator (orange) illuminates in tion of the Intelligent Lane Intervention sys- system. Push the dynamic driver assis- the display, pull off the road to a safe loca- tem and prevent a system malfunction, be tance switch again to turn the Intelligent tion and stop the vehicle. Turn the sure to observe the following: Lane Intervention system back on. engine/motor off and restart the engine/motor. If the LDW indicator (orange) ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. continues to illuminate, have the Intelligent ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans- Lane Intervention system checked. It is rec- parent material) or install an accessory ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer near the camera unit. for this service. ∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability of detecting the lane markers. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual was prepared to help you un- warnings, cautions and instructions con- Before driving your vehicle, please read this derstand the operation and maintenance cerning proper use of such accessories Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac- familiarity with controls and maintenance miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. cessory. It is recommended that you visit a requirements assisting you in the safe op- Please read through this manual before NISSAN dealer for details concerning the eration of your vehicle. operating your vehicle. particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. WARNING A separate Warranty Information Book- let explains details about the warranties IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance REMINDERS! and schedules” section of this manual Follow these important driving rules to explains details about maintaining and help ensure a safe and comfortable trip servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a for you and your passengers! separate Customer Care/Lemon Law ∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al- Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re- cohol or drugs. solve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, and clarify your rights un- ∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits der your state’s lemon law. and never drive too fast for conditions. When you require any service or have any questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to ∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to assist you with the extensive resources driving and avoid using vehicle fea- available to them. tures or taking other actions that could distract you. In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with ∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap- additional accessories installed prior to de- propriate child restraint systems. Pre- livery. It is recommended that you visit a teen children should be seated in the NISSAN dealer for details concerning the rear seat. particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, WHEN READING THE MANUAL

∙ ALWAYS provide information about WARNING This manual includes information for all the proper use of vehicle safety fea- features and equipment available on this Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di- tures to all occupants of the vehicle. model. Features and equipment in your ve- agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses hicle may vary depending on model, trim ∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual the port during normal driving, for ex- level, options selected, order, date of pro- for important safety information. ample remote insurance company duction, region or availability. Therefore, monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, you may find information about features or MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE telematics or engine reprogramming, equipment that are not included or in- This vehicle should not be modified. may cause interference or damage to stalled on your vehicle. Modification could affect its vehicle systems. We do not recommend All information, specifications and illustra- performance, safety, emissions or du- or endorse the use of any aftermarket tions in this manual are those in effect at the OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically rability and may even violate govern- time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war- change specifications, performance, design mental regulations. In addition, dam- ranty may not cover damage caused by age or performance problems or component suppliers without notice and any aftermarket plug-in device. without obligation. From time to time, resulting from modifications may not NISSAN may update or revise this manual to be covered under NISSAN warranties. provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all re- vision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up- to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con- sumer Affairs. For contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s Manual. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL Arrows in an illustration that are similar to You will see various symbols in this manual. these call attention to an item in the illus- They are used in the following ways: tration. WARNING CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE This is used to indicate the presence of ADVISORY a hazard that could cause death or seri- Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat- ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be fol- teries, may contain perchlorate material. lowed precisely. The following advisory is provided: “Per- chlorate Material – special handling may CAUTION apply. For additional information, refer APD1005 to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ This is used to indicate the presence of If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do perchlorate/”. a hazard that could cause minor or this” or “Do not let this happen.” moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully. If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action. SiriusXM® services require a subscription after trial period and are sold separately or as a package. The satellite service is available only in the 48 contiguous USA and DC. SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca.

© 2018 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permis- sion of Nissan North America, Inc. NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES . . . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to NISSAN with the informa- NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or for the following information: tion at: you would like to provide NISSAN directly – Your name, address, and telephone For U.S. customers with comments or questions, please con- number Nissan North America, Inc. tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- Consumer Affairs Department ment using our toll-free number: – Vehicle identification number (attached P.O. Box 685003 to the top of the instrument panel on the For U.S. customers Franklin, TN 37068-5003 driver’s side) 1-800-NISSAN-1 or via e-mail at: (1-800-647-7261) – Date of purchase [email protected] For Canadian customers For Canadian customers – Current odometer reading Nissan Canada Inc. 1-800-387-0122 – Your NISSAN dealer’s name 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 – Your comments or questions or via e-mail at: OR [email protected] If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of Illustrated table of contents 0 Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Do-it-yourself 8

Maintenance and schedules 9

Technical and consumer information 10

Index 11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ...... 0-2 Instrument panel...... 0-6 Exterior front ...... 0-3 Engine compartment check locations...... 0-8 Exterior rear ...... 0-4 Warning and indicator lights ...... 0-10 Passenger compartment...... 0-5 AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-23) 2. Rear seat belts with pretensioner(s) for outboard seating (P. 1-12) 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) 4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) 5. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-7) 6. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-12, 1-46) 7. Side-impact pressure sensor (driver’s side shown; passenger’s side similar) (P. 1-46) 8. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-46) 9. Front seats (P. 1-2) 10. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) (P. 1-46) 11. Rear seats (P. 1-2) 12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system (P. 1-23) 13. Rear outboard seat-mounted side impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LII2583 0-2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Power windows (P. 2-60) 2. Windshield (P. 8-20) 3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-42) 4. Engine hood (P. 3-24) 5. Front view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11) 6. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-43) Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (Type A) (if so equipped) (P. 2-43) Turn signal switch (P. 2-43) 7. Headlight switch (P. 2-43) LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (Type B) (if so equipped) (P. 2-43) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26) 8. Tire pressure (P. 8-30) Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-30) 9. Mirrors (P. 3-31) Side view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11) 10. Door locks (P. 3-4) NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-7) Keys (P. 3-2) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LII2559 Illustrated table of contents 0-3 EXTERIOR REAR

1. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch (P. 2-43) 2. Trunk lid (P. 3-25) 3. Sonar sensors (if so equipped) (P. 5-173) 4. Rearview camera (P. 4-3) 5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26) 6. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-27) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2) Fuel-filler door (P. 3-27) 7. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LIC4027 0-4 Illustrated table of contents PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. Power moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-63) 2. Sun visors (P. 3-30) 3. Interior lights (P. 2-64) 4. HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) (P. 2-66) Rearview mirror (P. 3-31) 5. Glove box (P. 2-56) 6. Cup holders (P. 2-56) Console box (P. 2-56) 7. Rear armrest (P. 1-2) Cup holders (P. 2-56) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2563 Illustrated table of contents 0-5 INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Vents (P. 4-28) 2. Steering wheel switches for audio control* Vehicle information display controls (P. 2-19) 3. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-43) Paddle shifters (if so equipped) (P. 5-18) 4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) Horn (P. 2-50) 5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-9) Vehicle information display (P. 2-19) 6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-42) 7. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-29, 4-36) Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-51) Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-52) 8. Navigation system* (if so equipped) Audio system*

LII2584 0-6 Illustrated table of contents 9. Front passenger supplemental air 18. Cruise control switches bag (P. 1-46) (if so equipped) (P. 5-63) 10. Passenger supplemental knee Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) airbag (P. 1-46) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-66) 11.. Glove box (P. 2-56) Bluetooth® Hands-free Phone 12. Front passenger air bag status System* light (P. 1-46) ProPILOT Assist Switch Hazard warning flasher switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-90) (P. 6-2) 19. Driver supplemental knee airbag 13. Power outlet (P. 2-55) (P. 1-46) USB connection port 20. Hood release (P. 3-24) (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-41) Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-27) Aux jack* Tilt/telescopic steering wheel 14. Cup holders (P. 2-56) controls (P. 3-29) 15 Shift lever (P. 5-18) 21. Trip computer reset switch (P. 2-4) 16. Electronic parking brake switch Instrument brightness control (if so equipped) (P. 5-25) (P. 2-43) Automatic brake hold switch Steering assist switch (for vehicles (if so equipped) (P. 5-25) with ProPILOT Assist) (if so 17. Push-button ignition switch equipped) (P. 2-52) (P. 5-13) Trunk opener (P. 3-25) *: For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

KR20DDET engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6) 2. Drive belt location (P. 8-17) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8) 4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) 5. Battery (P. 8-15) 6. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22) 7. Air filter (P. 8-19) 8. Radiator cap (P. 8-6) 9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8) 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI3260 0-8 Illustrated table of contents PR25DD engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6) 2. Drive belt location (P. 8-17) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8) 4. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8) 5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) 6. Battery (P. 8-15) 7. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22) 8. Air filter (P. 8-19) 9. Radiator cap (P. 8-6) 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI3261 Illustrated table of contents 0-9 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Warning Name Page light light light

Anti-lock Braking 2-10 Charge warning 2-11 Seat belt warning 2-14 System (ABS) light light and chime or warning light Electronic parking 2-12 Supplemental air 2-15 brake warning bag warning light light (yellow) (if so Automatic Emer- 2-10 equipped) Indicator Name Page gency Braking light Engine oil pres- 2-12 (AEB) system sure warning light Automatic brake 2-15 warning light (if so hold indicator equipped) Low tire pressure 2-12 light (green) (if so Automatic Emer- 2-10 warning light equipped) gency Braking Automatic brake 2-15 (AEB) with Pedes- Master warning 2-14 hold indicator trian Detection light light (white) (if so system warning equipped) light (if so Power steering 2-14 warning light equipped) Electronic parking 2-15 brake indicator Brake warning 2-11 Rear Automatic 2-14 or light (red) (if so light Braking (RAB) equipped) or warning light (if so equipped)

0-10 Illustrated table of contents Indicator Name Page Indicator Name Page light light

Front fog light in- 2-16 Slip indicator light 2-17 dicator light (if so equipped) Turn signal/ 2-18 Front passenger 2-16 hazard indicator air bag status lights light Vehicle Dynamic 2-18 High beam assist 2-16 Control (VDC) OFF indicator light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

High beam indi- 2-16 cator light (blue)

Malfunction Indi- 2-16 cator Light (MIL)

Security indicator 2-17 light

Side light and 2-17 headlight indicator light (green)

Illustrated table of contents 0-11 MEMO

0-12 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats...... 1-2 Seat belt extenders...... 1-20 Front manual seat adjustment Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-20 (if so equipped for passenger’s seat)...... 1-3 Child safety...... 1-21 Front power seat adjustment Infants ...... 1-22 (for driver’s seat and if so equipped for Small children ...... 1-22 passenger’s seat)...... 1-4 Larger children ...... 1-22 Folding rear seat ...... 1-5 Child restraints ...... 1-23 Center armrest...... 1-7 Precautions on child restraints ...... 1-23 Head restraints/headrests ...... 1-7 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Adjustable head restraint/headrest CHildren) system ...... 1-26 components ...... 1-8 Rear-facing child restraint installation Non-adjustable head restraint/ using LATCH...... 1-28 headrest components...... 1-9 Rear-facing child restraint installation Remove...... 1-9 using the seat belts ...... 1-31 Install...... 1-10 Forward-facing child restraint Adjust ...... 1-10 installation using LATCH ...... 1-34 Seatbelts...... 1-12 Forward-facing child restraint Precautions on seat belt usage...... 1-12 installation using the seat belts...... 1-38 Seat belt warning light and chime ...... 1-14 Booster seats ...... 1-42 Pregnant women...... 1-15 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...... 1-46 Injured persons...... 1-15 Precautions on SRS...... 1-46 Three-point type seat belt with Supplemental air bag warning labels ...... 1-67 retractor...... 1-15 Supplemental air bag warning light...... 1-67 SEATS

∙ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknow- ingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- ARS1152 hicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a signifi- WARNING ∙ For the most effective protection cant risk of injury or death to people when the vehicle is in motion, the seat and pets. ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when should be upright. Always sit well the seatback is reclined. This can be ∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while back and upright in the seat with both dangerous. The shoulder belt will not driving so full attention may be given feet on the floor and adjust the seat be against your body. In an accident, to vehicle operation. The seat may properly. For additional information, you could be thrown into it and remove suddenly and could cause loss refer to “Precautions on seat belt us- ceive neck or other serious injuries. of control of the vehicle. age” in this section. You could also slide under the lap belt ∙ The seatback should not be reclined and receive serious internal injuries. ∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the any more than needed for comfort. seat to make sure it is securely locked. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage. FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for passenger’s seat) Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.

LRS2571 LRS2572 Forward and backward Reclining Pull the center of the bar up and hold it To recline the seatback, pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or back- and lean back. To bring the seatback forward to the desired position. Release the ward, pull the lever up and lean your body bar to lock the seat in position. forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 ∙ The power seat motor has an auto- reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch. ∙ Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. Forward and backward Moving the switch as shown will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. LRS2662 Reclining FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT Operating tips Move the recline switch as shown until the (for driver’s seat and if so desired angle is obtained. WARNING equipped for passenger’s seat) The reclining feature allows adjustment of Before driving the vehicle, return the the seatback for occupants of different seatback to an upright seating position sizes for added comfort and to help obtain after manually releasing it. Also, make proper seat belt fit. For additional informa- sure the seat is locked in place. Failure tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us- to do so may cause the seat to move in a age” in this section. Also, the seatback can collision or sudden stop. This may result be reclined to allow occupants to rest in damage to the seat or personal when the vehicle is stopped and the shift injury. lever is in the P (Park) position.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2636 LRS2270 Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Lumbar support (if so equipped Move the switch as shown to adjust the for driver’s seat) angle and height of the seat cushion. The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver. Push the switch as shown to adjust the seat lumbar area.

LRS3156 FOLDING REAR SEAT Interior trunk access

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 2. Open the access cover on the rear par- ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or cel shelf. straps to help prevent it from sliding 3. Insert a key or another suitable tool or shifting. Do not place cargo higher (such as a pen or a screw driver) into than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop the slot, then slide the recessed lever in or collision, unsecured cargo could the direction of the arrow ᭺1 . cause personal injury. 4. Fold down the passenger’s side seat- ∙ When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are back ᭺2 . completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely se- NOTE: cured, passengers may be injured in To access the trunk in case of a dead an accident or sudden stop. battery, use a key or another suitable ∙ Closely supervise children when they tool (such as a pen or screw driver), to are around cars to prevent them from slide recessed lever in the direction of playing and becoming locked in the the arrow. trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the WARNING rear seatback and trunk lid securely ∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the latched when not in use, and prevent cargo area or on the rear seat when it children’s access to car keys. is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without LRS3157 proper restraints could result in seri- The trunk can be accessed from the driver ous injury or death in an accident or side and passenger side of the rear seat for sudden stop. loading and unloading, as shown. 1. Move the front passenger seat to the most forward position.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

WARNING Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat LRS3163 WRS0167 if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest To fold down either side of the rear seat, CENTER ARMREST was removed, reinstall and properly ad- open the trunk and pull on the knob on that just the head restraint/headrest before ᭺A . Pull the armrest down as shown. side an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 ∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position. ∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/ headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame. ∙ Proper Adjustment: – For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest. LRS2695 LRS2300 The illustration shows the seating posi- – If your ear position is still higher than ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ the recommended alignment, place tions equipped with head the head restraint/headrest at the HEADREST COMPONENTS restraints/headrests. highest position. 1. Removable head restraint/headrest ᭡ Indicates the seating position is ∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been 2. Multiple notches equipped with a head restraint. removed, ensure that it is reinstalled Ⅲ Indicates the seating position is equipped and locked in place before riding in that 3. Lock knob with a headrest. designated seating position. 4. Stalks + Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable). ∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable. 1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302 NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD REMOVE RESTRAINT/HEADREST Use the following procedure to remove the COMPONENTS head restraint/headrest: 1. Removable head restraint/headrest 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to 2. Single notch the highest position. 3. Lock knob 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 4. Stalks 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351 INSTALL ADJUST For non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest 1. Align the head restraint/headrest For adjustable head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make Make sure the head restraint/headrest is Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the sure that the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in center is level with the center of your ears. If facing the correct direction. The stalk the notch before riding in that designated your ear position is still higher than the with the notch (notches) ᭺1 must be seating position. recommended alignment, place the head installed in the hole with the lock knob restraint/headrest at the highest position. ᭺2 . 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2305 LRS2306 Raise Lower To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it To lower, push and hold the lock knob and up. push the head restraint/headrest down. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated the notch before riding in that designated seating position. seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 SEAT BELTS

SSS0136 SSS0016 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces WARNING USAGE or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being ∙ Every person who drives or rides in If you are wearing your seat belt properly driven. this vehicle should use a seat belt at adjusted and you are sitting upright and all times. Children should be in the well back in your seat with both feet on the rear seats and in an appropriate floor, your chances of being injured or killed restraint. in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0134 SSS0014 WARNING WARNING ∙ The seat belt should be properly ad- ∙ Always route the shoulder belt over justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so your shoulder and across your chest. may reduce the effectiveness of the Never put the belt behind your back, entire restraint system and increase under your arm or across your neck. the chance or severity of injury in an The belt should be away from your accident. Serious injury or death can face and neck, but not falling off your occur if the seat belt is not worn shoulder. properly. ∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 ∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- ∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have curely fastened to the proper buckle. activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the ∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or retractor. It is recommended that you twisted. Doing so may reduce its visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. effectiveness. ∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re- ∙ Do not allow more than one person to tractors and attaching hardware, use the same seat belt. should be inspected after any colli- ∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle sion. It is recommended that you visit than there are seat belts. a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ If the seat belt warning light glows NISSAN recommends that all seat belt continuously while the ignition is assemblies in use during a collision be turned ON with all doors closed and all replaced unless the collision was mi- seat belts fastened, it may indicate a nor and the belts show no damage LRS0786 and continue to operate properly. malfunction in the system. Have the SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND system checked. It is recommended Seat belt assemblies not in use during that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this a collision should also be inspected CHIME service. and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. The driver and front passenger seat is ∙ No changes should be made to the equipped with an enhanced seat belt re- seat belt system. For example, do not ∙ All child restraints and attaching minder function. If your vehicle is equipped modify the seat belt, add material, or hardware should be inspected after with an enhanced seat belt reminder func- install devices that may change the any collision. Always follow the re- tion, a visual and audible alert will operate if seat belt routing or tension. Doing so straint manufacturer’s inspection in- a driver or front passenger seat belt is un- structions and replacement recom- may affect the operation of the seat buckled at speeds of approximately 9 mph mendations. The child restraints belt system. Modifying or tampering (15 km/h) or more under the following con- should be replaced if they are with the seat belt system may result ditions: in serious personal injury. damaged. ∙ If the driver seat belt is not fastened.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ The front passenger’s seat belt is not The below situations could result in the INJURED PERSONS fastened and the seat is occupied by a seat belt reminder light being illuminated passenger for 7 seconds after the igni- and the chime sounding, even with no oc- NISSAN recommends that injured persons tion switch is placed in the ON position. cupant present in the passenger seat: use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations. ∙ The front passenger’s seat belt is not ∙ Heavy objects placed on the seat. fastened and objects or external force THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT on the passenger seat change the seat ∙ Someone pushing or pulling on the WITH RETRACTOR belt reminder classification to Occu- front passenger seat. pied. ∙ An object placed under the front pas- WARNING senger seat. The seat belt warning light will flash under ∙ Every person who drives or rides in the conditions shown above until the nec- ∙ An object placed between the seat this vehicle should use a seat belt at essary seat belt is securely fastened. cushion and center console or between all times. Children should be in the A warning chime will sound for approxi- the seat cushion and the door. rear seats and in an appropriate mately 90 seconds or until one of the fol- restraint. lowing conditions is met: ∙ An object hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket. ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when ∙ The unbuckled front occupant’s seat the seatback is reclined. This can be belt is securely fastened. ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing dangerous. The shoulder belt will not against the rear of the seatback. be against your body. In an accident, ∙ The seat belt reminder function in the you could be thrown into it and re- front passenger seat no longer detects PREGNANT WOMEN ceive neck or other serious injuries. that the front passenger seat is occu- You could also slide under the lap belt pied. NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should and receive serious internal injuries. ∙ The ignition is turned off. be worn snug and always position the lap ∙ For the most effective protection belt as low as possible around the hips, not when the vehicle is in motion, the seat the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your should be upright. Always sit well shoulder and across your chest. Never run back and upright in the seat with both the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal feet on the floor and adjust the seat area. Contact your doctor for specific rec- belt properly. ommendations. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 ∙ Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re- tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to LRS2571 release the seat belt. Manual front seat shown (if so equipped for passenger’s seat) Fastening the seat belts 1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2662 LRS2674 Power front seat shown (for driver’s seat and if so equipped for passenger’s seat) 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle ᭺A until you hear and feel the latch engage. ∙ The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. ∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex- WARNING tend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement When fastening the seat belts, be cer- in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt tain that the seatbacks are completely when the vehicle slows down rapidly or secured in the latched position. If they during certain impacts. are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks stop. the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt LRS2675 fully retracts. For additional information, re- 3. Position the lap belt portion low and fer to “Child restraints” in this section. snug on the hips ᭺B as shown. The ALR mode should be used only for 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward child restraint installation. During nor- the retractor to take up extra slack ᭺C . mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over mode should not be activated. If it is ac- your shoulder and across your chest. tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat The front passenger seat and the rear belt tension. It can also change the op- seating positions’ three-point seat belts eration of the front passenger air bag. have two modes of operation: For additional information, refer to ∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. ∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows: ∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service or to learn more about seat belt operation.

WRS0139 LRS0242 Unfastening the seat belts Shoulder belt height adjustment To unfasten the seat belt, press the button (front seats) on the buckle ᭺1 . The seat belt automati- The shoulder belt anchor height should be cally retracts. adjusted to the position best for you. For Checking seat belt operation additional information, refer to “Precau- tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To Seat belt retractors are designed to lock adjust, pull out the adjustment button ᭺1 seat belt movement by two separate and move the shoulder belt anchor to the methods: desired position ᭺2 , so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should ∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from be away from your face and neck, but not the retractor falling off your shoulder. Release the ad- ∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly justment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 WARNING WARNING ∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the ∙ After adjustment, release the adjust- ∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the ment button and try to move the made by the same company which shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry shoulder belt anchor up and down to made the original equipment seat cloth. make sure it is securely fixed in belts, should be used with NISSAN position. seat belts. ∙ Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such ∙ The shoulder belt anchor height ∙ Adults and children who can use the as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible should be adjusted to the position standard seat belt should not use an wires and anchors, work properly. If best for you. Failure to do so may re- extender. Such unnecessary use loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other duce the effectiveness of the entire could result in serious personal injury damage on the webbing is found, the restraint system and increase the in the event of an accident. entire seat belt assembly should be re- chance or severity of injury in an ∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in- placed. accident. stall child restraints. If the child re- SEAT BELT EXTENDERS straint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or If, because of body size or driving position, it killed in a collision or a sudden stop. is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE that is compatible with the installed seat ∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply belts is available for purchase. The ex- a mild soap solution or any solution rec- tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) ommended for cleaning upholstery or of length and may be used for either the carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow driver or front passenger seating position. the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN allow the seat belts to retract until they dealer for assistance with purchasing an are completely dry. extender if an extender is required.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CHILD SAFETY

WARNING There are three basic types of child re- All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or straint systems: territories require the use of approved child Do not allow children to play with the restraints for infants and small children. For ∙ Rear-facing child restraints seat belts. Most seating positions are additional information, refer to “Child re- equipped with Automatic Locking Re- ∙ Forward-facing child restraints straints” in this section. tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s ∙ Booster seats A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An- neck with the ALR mode activated, the The proper restraint depends on the child’s child can be seriously injured or killed if chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year with the vehicle seat belt. For additional the seat belt retracts and becomes and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed tight. This can occur even if the vehicle information, refer to “Child restraints” in this in rear-facing child restraints. Forward- section. is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re- facing child restraints are available for chil- lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be dren who outgrow rear-facing child re- NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens unbuckled or is already unbuckled, restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster and children be restrained in the rear lease the child by cutting the seat belt seats are used to help position a vehicle seat. Studies show that children are with a suitable tool (such as a knife or lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no safer when properly restrained in the scissors) to release the seat belt. longer use a forward-facing child restraint. rear seat than in the front seat. Children need adults to help protect This is especially important because them. They need to be properly re- WARNING your vehicle has a supplemental restrained. Infants and children need special pro- straint system (air bag system) for the In addition to the general information in tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not front passenger. For additional informa- this manual, child safety information is fit them properly.The shoulder belt may tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint available from many other sources, includ- come too close to the face or neck. The System (SRS)” in this section. ing doctors, teachers, government traffic lap belt may not fit over their small hip safety offices, and community organiza- bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- tions. Every child is different, so be sure to ting seat belt could cause serious or fa- learn the best way to transport your child. tal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 INFANTS ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc- A booster seat should be used until the tions for installation and use. child can pass the seat belt fit test below: Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. LARGER CHILDREN ∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the NISSAN recommends that infants be vehicle seatback? Children should remain in a forward-facing placed in child restraints that comply with child restraint with a harness until they ∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or ing? reach the maximum height or weight limit Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. allowed by the child restraint manufac- ∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over You should choose a child restraint that fits turer. the front edge of the seat with feet flat your vehicle and always follow the manu- on the floor? facturer’s instructions for installation and Once a child outgrows the height or weight use. limit of the harness-equipped forward- ∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips SMALL CHILDREN facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially and shoulder belt across mid-chest Children that are over 1 year old and weigh available booster seat to obtain proper and shoulder)? at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the ∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad- rear-facing child restraint as long as pos- booster seat should raise the child so that justed head restraint/headrest? sible up to the height or weight limit of the the shoulder belt is properly positioned ∙ Will the child be able to stay in position child restraint. Children who outgrow the across the chest and the top, middle por- for the entire ride? height or weight limit of the rear-facing tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt child restraint and are at least 1 year old should not cross the neck or face and should be secured in a forward-facing child should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu- should lie snugly across the lower hips or facturer’s instructions for minimum and upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster maximum weight and height recommen- seat can only be used in seating positions dations. NISSAN recommends that small that have a three-point type seat belt. The children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle have a label certifying that it complies with Safety Standards. You should choose a Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or child restraint that fits your vehicle and al- Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. 1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CHILD RESTRAINTS

NOTE: Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.

WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. LRS2690 ARS1098 If you answered no to any of these ques- PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD tions, the child should remain in a booster RESTRAINTS seat using a three-point type seat belt. WARNING ∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision: – The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 – NISSAN recommends that all child – Child restraint anchorages are de- restraints be installed in the rear signed to withstand only those seat. Studies show that children loads imposed by correctly fitted are safer when properly restrained child restraints. Under no circum- in the rear seat than in the front stances are they to be used to at- seat. If you must install a forward- tach adult seat belts, or other items facing child restraint in the front or equipment to the vehicle. Doing seat, refer to “Forward-facing child so could damage the child re- restraint installation using the seat straint anchorages. The child re- belts” in this section. straint will not be properly installed using the damaged – Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air anchorage, and a child could be se- Bag System, never install a rear- riously injured or killed in a facing child restraint in the front collision. WRS0256 seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear- – Never use the anchor points for – Infants and children should never facing child restraint must only be adult seat belts, or other items. be held on anyone’s lap. Even the used in the rear seat. – A child restraint with a top tether strongest adult cannot resist the – Be sure to purchase a child re- strap should not be used in the forces of a collision. straint that will fit the child and ve- front passenger seat. – Do not put a seat belt around both hicle. Some child restraints may – Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- a child and another passenger. not fit properly in your vehicle. sible after fitting the child restraint. – Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ When the child restraint is not in use, Several manufacturers offer child re- ∙ If the combined weight of the child and keep it secured with the LATCH system straints for infants and children of various child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col- sizes. When selecting any child restraint, (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not lision, loose objects can injure occu- keep the following points in mind: the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. pants or damage the vehicle. ∙ Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Mo- ∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint CAUTION tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana- manufacturer’s instructions for installation. A child restraint in a closed vehicle can dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. become very hot. Check the seating ∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or surface and buckles before placing a territories require that infants and small to be sure it is compatible with the vehi- child in the child restraint. children be restrained in an approved cle’s seat and seat belt system. child restraint at all times while the ve- This vehicle is equipped with a universal hicle is being operated. Canadian law re- child restraint anchor system, referred to ∙ If the child restraint is compatible with quires the top tether strap on forward- as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers your vehicle, place your child in the child facing child restraints be secured to the for CHildren) system. Some child restraints restraint and check the various adjust- designated anchor point on the vehicle. include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments to be sure the child restraint is ments that can be connected to these an- compatible with your child. Choose a chors. For additional information, refer to child restraint that is designed for your “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for child’s height and weight. Always follow CHildren) system” in this section. all recommended procedures. If you do not have a LATCH compatible ∙ If the combined weight of the child and child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be child restraint is less than 65 lbs. used. (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH anchors or the seat belt to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 install the child restraint. Be sure to follow – Inspect the lower anchors by in- the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- serting your fingers into the lower tions for installation. anchor area. Feel to make sure The LATCH anchor points are provided to there are no obstructions over the install child restraints in the rear outboard anchors such as seat belt webbing seating positions only. Do not attempt to or seat cushion material. The child install a child restraint in the center position restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are using the LATCH anchors. obstructed. LATCH lower anchor Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads WARNING imposed by correctly fitted child re- Failure to follow the warnings and in- straints. Under no circumstances are LRS2165 structions for proper use and installa- they to be used to attach adult seat LATCH system anchor locations tion of child restraints could result in belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the LATCH (Lower Anchors and serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or child restraint anchorages. The child re- Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM collision: straint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a Your vehicle is equipped with special an- – Attach LATCH system compatible child could be seriously injured or killed chor points that are used with LATCH sys- child restraints only at the loca- in a collision. tem compatible child restraints. This sys- tions shown in the illustration. tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys- – Do not secure a child restraint in tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat the center rear seating position us- belt to secure the child restraint unless the ing the LATCH lower anchors. The combined weight of the child and child re- child restraint will not be secured straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- properly. bined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to 1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS3036 LRS0661 LRS0662 LATCH lower anchor location LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment LATCH lower anchor location Installing child restraint LATCH When installing a child restraint, carefully lower anchor attachments read and follow the instructions in this The LATCH anchors are located as shown. manual and those supplied with the child A label is attached to the seatback to help LATCH compatible child restraints include restraint. you locate the LATCH lower anchors. two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 WARNING REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads For additional information, refer to all Warn- imposed by correctly fitted child re- ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and straints. Under no circumstances are “Child restraints” sections of this manual they to be used to attach adult seat before installing a child restraint. belts, or other items or equipment to Do not use the lower anchors if the com- the vehicle. Doing so could damage the bined weight of the child and the child re- child restraint anchorages. The child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- straint will not be properly installed us- bined weight of the child and the child ing the damaged anchorage, and a restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use child could be seriously injured or killed the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- in a collision. chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure WRS0797 If you have any questions when install- to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s Top tether anchor point locations ing a top tether strap, it is recommended instructions for installation. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this Follow these steps to install a rear-facing The child restraint top tether strap must be service. used when installing the child restraint with child restraint using the LATCH system: ᭺1 the LATCH lower anchor attachments or Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf. seat belts. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS3118 LRS3140 LRS2997 Type A (if so equipped) — step 1 Type B (if so equipped) — step 1 Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 3 1. Type A (if so equipped): 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. 3. Secure the child restraint anchor at- Always follow the child restraint manu- tachments to the LATCH lower an- Remove the plastic covers from the facturer’s instructions. chors. Check to make sure the LATCH LATCH anchors by pulling the covers attachment is properly attached to the straight back. Store the covers in a se- lower anchors. cure area. Type B (if so equipped): Lift the flap of the material to expose the LATCH anchors.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 LRS2996 LRS0673 LRS0674 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 Rear-facing – step 6 4. For child restraints that are equipped 6. After attaching the child restraint, test with webbing-mounted attachments, it before you place the child in it. Push it remove any additional slack from the from side to side while holding the child anchor attachments. Press downward restraint near the LATCH attachment and rearward firmly in the center of the path. The child restraint should not child restraint with your hand to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from press the vehicle seat cushion and side to side. Try to tug it forward and seatback while tightening the webbing check to see if the LATCH attachment of the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the re- 5. Tighten the tether strap according to straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH the manufacturer’s instructions to re- attachment as necessary, or put the move any slack. restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using 1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT Follow these steps to install a rear-facing all child restraints fit in all types of ve- INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats: hicles. BELTS 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If WARNING the child restraint is loose, repeat The three-point seat belt with Auto- steps 2 through 6. matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be 8. Type A (if so equipped): used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in If you remove the child restraint, rein- the child restraint not being properly stall the plastic LATCH anchor covers secured. The restraint could tip over or after use by pushing the covers be loose and cause injury to a child in a straight onto the LATCH anchors. sudden stop or collision. Type B (if so equipped): For additional information, refer to all Warn- If you remove the child restraint, se- ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and curely replace the flap by pressing the “Child restraints” sections of this manual material firmly against the seat. before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 WRS0256 WRS0761 LRS2395 Rear-facing – step 1 Rear-facing – step 2 Rear-facing – step 3 1. Child restraints for infants must be 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is used in the rear-facing direction and child restraint and insert it into the fully extended. At this time, the seat belt therefore must not be used in the buckle until you hear and feel the latch retractor is in the ALR mode (child re- front seat. Position the child restraint engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for mode when the seat belt is fully restraint manufacturer’s instructions. belt routing. tracted.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2396 WRS0762 LRS2397 Rear-facing – step 4 Rear-facing – step 5 Rear-facing – step 6 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 5. Remove any additional slack from the 6. After attaching the child restraint, test the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear- it before you place the child in it. Push it in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child from side to side while holding the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat restraint near the seat belt path. The cushion and seatback while pulling up child restraint should not move more on the seat belt. than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections of this manual LRS3118 LRS3140 before installing a child restraint. Type A (if so equipped) – step 1 Type B (if so equipped) – step 1 Do not use the lower anchors if the com- 1. Type A (if so equipped): 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manu- bined weight of the child and the child re- Remove the plastic covers from the facturer’s instructions. straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- LATCH anchors by pulling the covers bined weight of the child and the child straight back. Store the covers in a se- restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use cure area. the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure Type B (if so equipped): to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s Lift the flap of the material to expose instructions for installation. the LATCH anchors. Follow these steps to install a forward- facing child restraint using the LATCH system:

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ditional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

LRS2995 LRS2994 Forward-facing webbing-mounted – Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 3 step 3 Do not install child restraints that re- 3. Secure the child restraint anchor at- quire the use of a top tether strap in tachments to the LATCH lower an- seating positions that do not have a chors. Check to make sure the LATCH top tether anchor. attachment is properly attached to the 4. The back of the child restraint should lower anchors. be secured against the vehicle seat- If the child restraint is equipped with a back. top tether strap, route the top tether If necessary, adjust or remove the head strap and secure the tether strap to restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- the tether anchor point. For additional rect child restraint fit. If the head information, refer to “Installing top restraint/headrest is removed, store it tether strap” in this section. in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For ad- Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 8. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 7. 9. Type A (if so equipped): If you remove the child restraint, reinstall the plastic LATCH anchor covers after use by pushing the covers straight onto the LATCH anchors. Type B(if so equipped): LRS0671 WRS0697 If you remove the child restraint, se- Forward-facing – step 5 Forward-facing – step 7 curely replace the flap by pressing the 5. For child restraints that are equipped 7. After attaching the child restraint, test it material firmly against the seat. with webbing-mounted attachments, before you place the child in it. Push it remove any additional slack from the from side to side while holding the child anchor attachments. Press downward restraint near the LATCH attachment and rearward firmly in the center of the path. The child restraint should not child restraint with your knee to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from press the vehicle seat cushion and side to side. Try to tug it forward and seatback while tightening the webbing check to see if the LATCH attachment of the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the re- 6. Tighten the tether strap according to straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH the manufacturer’s instructions to re- attachment as necessary, or put the remove any slack. straint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the 1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Rear bench seat WARNING OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS Child restraint anchorages are de- 1. Remove the head restraint/headrest signed to withstand only those loads and store it in a secure place. Be sure to imposed by correctly fitted child re- reinstall the head restraint/headrest straints. Under no circumstances are when the child restraint is removed. For they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to additional information about head the vehicle. Doing so could damage the restraint/headrest adjustment, re- child restraint anchorages. The child removal and installation, refer to "Head straint will not be properly installed us- restraints/headrests" in this section. ing the damaged anchorage, and a 2. Position the top tether strap ᭺1 over child could be seriously injured or killed the seatback. in a collision. LRS3177 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether Rear bench seat anchor point ᭺2 as shown. ᭺1 Top tether strap 4. Tighten the tether strap according to ᭺2 Anchor point the manufacturer’s instructions to re- Installing top tether strap move any slack. The child restraint top tether strap must be If you have any questions when install- used when installing the child restraint with ing a top tether strap, it is recommended the LATCH lower anchor attachments. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard positions only).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 FORWARD-FACING CHILD Follow these steps to install a forward- RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING facing child restraint using the vehicle seat THE SEAT BELTS belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat: WARNING 1. If you must install a child restraint in The three-point seat belt with Auto- the front seat, it should be placed in a matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be forward-facing direction only. Move used when installing a child restraint. the seat to the rearmost position. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in Child restraints for infants must be the child restraint not being properly used in the rear-facing direction and, secured. The restraint could tip over or therefore, must not be used in the be loose and cause injury to a child in a front seat. sudden stop or collision. Also, it can 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. change the operation of the front pas- WRS0699 Always follow the child restraint manu- senger air bag. For additional informa- Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – facturer’s instructions. tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag step 1 The back of the child restraint should and status light” in this section. For additional information, refer to all Warn- be secured against the vehicle seat- ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and back. “Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- Do not use the lower anchors if the com- rect child restraint fit. If the head bined weight of the child and the child re- restraint/headrest is removed, store it straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall bined weight of the child and the child the head restraint/headrest when restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the child restraint is removed. For ad- the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- ditional information about head chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure restraint/headrest adjustment, re- to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s moval and installation, refer to “Head instructions for installation. restraints/headrests” in this section. 1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If the seating position does not have Do not install child restraints that re- an adjustable head restraint/headrest quire the use of a top tether strap in and it is interfering with the proper seating positions that do not have a child restraint fit, try another seating top tether anchor. position or a different child restraint.

WRS0680 Forward-facing – step 3 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 LRS0667 LRS0668 WRS0681 Forward-facing – step 4 Forward-facing – step 5 Forward-facing – step 6 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 6. Remove any additional slack from the fully extended. At this time, the seat belt the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear- retractor is in the ALR mode (child rein the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode restraint with your knee to compress when the seat belt is fully retracted. the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. 7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 4 through 8.

WRS0698 LRS3091 Forward-facing – step 8 Forward-facing – step 10 8. After attaching the child restraint, test 10. If the child restraint is installed in the it before you place the child in it. Push it front passenger seat, place the ignition from side to side while holding the child switch in the ON position. The front restraint near the seat belt path. The passenger air bag status light child restraint should not move more should illuminate. If this light is not illu- than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. minated, refer to “Front passenger air Try to tug it forward and check to see if bag and status light” in this section. the belt holds the restraint in place. If Move the child restraint to another the restraint is not secure, tighten the seating position. Have the system seat belt as necessary, or put the re- checked. It is recommended that you straint in another seat and test it again. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You may need to try a different child After the child restraint is removed and the restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode types of vehicles. (child restraint mode) is canceled. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 Rear bench seat If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this 1. Remove the head restraint/headrest service. and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest WARNING when the child restraint is removed. For Child restraint anchorages are de- additional information about head signed to withstand only those loads restraint/headrest adjustment, re- imposed by correctly fitted child removal and installation, refer to "Head straints. Under no circumstances are restraints/headrests" in this section. they to be used to attach adult seat 2. Position the top tether strap ᭺1 over belts, or other items or equipment to the seatback. the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child re- LRS3176 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether straint will not be properly installed us- Rear bench seat anchor point ᭺2 as shown. ing the damaged anchorage, and a ᭺1 Top tether strap child could be seriously injured or killed 4. Tighten the tether strap according to ᭺2 in a collision. Anchor point the manufacturer’s instructions to re- Installing top tether strap move any slack. BOOSTER SEATS The child restraint top tether strap must be CENTER SEATING POSITION For additional information on installing a used when installing the child restraint with 1. Position the top tether strap ᭺1 over the booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in- seat belts. seatback. structions outlined in this section. First, secure the child restraint with the seat 2. Secure the tether strap to the tether belt. anchor point ᭺2 as shown. 3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. 1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Precautions on booster seats

WARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases: – Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach. – Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the LRS2479 LRS0453 child’s arm. A. Low back booster seat Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting – A booster seat must only be in- B. High back booster seat any booster seat, keep the following points stalled in a seating position that in mind: has a lap/shoulder belt. ∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dard 213. ∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 ∙ If the booster seat is compatible with For additional information, refer to all Warn- your vehicle, place the child in the ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”, booster seat and check the various ad- “Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec- justments to be sure the booster seat is tions of this manual before installing a child compatible with the child. Always follow restraint. all recommended procedures. Follow these steps to install a booster seat All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or in the rear seat or in the front passenger territories require that infants and small seat: children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats LRS0464 or the front passenger seat. ∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop- Booster seat installation erly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at WARNING or above the center of the child’s ears. For example, if a low back booster seat To avoid injury to child, do not use the is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us- at or above the center of the child’s ears. ing a booster seat with the seat belts. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child’s ears, a high back booster seat should be used.

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder WRS0699 LRS0454 belt is positioned across the top, 1. If you must install a booster seat in Front passenger position middle portion of the child’s shoulder. the front seat, move the seat to the 3. The booster seat should be positioned Be sure to follow the booster seat rearmost position. on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. If necessary, adjust or remove the head 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in- Only place it in a front-facing direction. restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- structions for properly fastening a seat Always follow the booster seat manu- rect high back booster seat fit. If the facturer’s instructions. belt shown in “Three-point type seat head restraint/headrest is removed, belt with retractor” in this section. store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS Front seat-mounted side-impact This SRS section contains important infor- supplemental air bag system mation concerning the following systems: This system can help cushion the impact ∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen- force to the chest area of the driver and tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad- front passenger in certain side-impact col- vanced Air Bag System) lisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im- ∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact pacted. supplemental air bag Rear outboard seat-mounted side- ∙ Rear outboard seat-mounted side- impact supplemental air bag system impact supplemental air bag This system can help cushion the impact ∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and force to the chest area of the rear outboard rollover supplemental air bag seat passengers in certain side-impact LRS3091 ∙ Driver and passenger supplemental collisions. The side air bags are designed to 7. If the booster seat is installed in the knee air bag inflate on the side where the vehicle is im- front passenger seat, place the ignition pacted. switch in the ON position. The front pas- ∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front and Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and senger air bag status light may or rear outboard seats) rollover supplemental air bag system may not illuminate, depending on the Supplemental front-impact air bag sys- size of the child and the type of booster tem This system can help cushion the impact seat being used. For additional infor- force to the head of occupants in front and mation, refer to “Front passenger air The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can rear outboard seating positions in certain bag and status light” in this section. help cushion the impact force to the head side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags and chest of the driver and front passenger are designed to inflate on the side where in certain frontal collisions. the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bags This system can help cushion the impact force to the driver’s and front passenger’s knees in certain collisions. The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger and rear seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in this section. WRS0031 The supplemental air bags operate only WARNING when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. ∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, After placing the ignition switch in the rear impact, rollover, or lower severity ON position, the supplemental air bag frontal collision. Always wear your warning light illuminates. The supple- seat belts to help reduce the risk or mental air bag warning light will turn off severity of injury in various kinds of after about 7 seconds if the system is accidents operational. ∙ The front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47 ∙ The seat belts and the front air bags ∙ The front passenger seat is equipped are most effective when you are sit- with an occupant classification sen- ting well back and upright in the seat. sor (weight sensor) that turns the The front air bags inflate with great front passenger air bag and passen- force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced ger knee air bag OFF under some con- Air Bag System, if you are unre- ditions. This sensor is only used in this strained, leaning forward, sitting side- seat. Failure to be properly seated and ways or out of position in any way, you wearing the seat belt can increase the are at greater risk of injury or death in risk or severity of injury in an accident. a crash. You may also receive serious For additional information, refer to or fatal injuries from the front air bag “Front passenger air bag and status if you are up against it when it inflates. light” in this section. Always sit back against the seatback ∙ Keep hands on the outside of the and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Placing them inside steering wheel or instrument panel. the steering wheel rim could increase Always properly use the seat belts. the risk that they are injured when the ∙ The driver and front passenger seat front air bag inflates. belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1133 ARS1041 WARNING ∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49 ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044 WARNING ∙ Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1045 ARS1046 WRS0431 WARNING WARNING ∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Front and rear outboard seat-mounted Bag System, never install a rear- side-impact supplemental air bags and facing child restraint in the front seat. roof-mounted curtain side-impact and An inflating front air bag could seri- rollover supplemental air bags: ously injure or kill your child. For addi- ∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags tional information, refer to “Child re- ordinarily will not inflate in the event straints” in this section. of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51 WARNING ∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front and rear seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend LRS3119 their hand out of the window or lean WRS0032 against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown WARNING in the previous illustrations. ∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. ∙ Do not use seat covers on the front or rear seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0162 SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System 1. Top tether strap anchor 2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators 3. Rear seat belts 4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag 5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag 6. Head restraints/headrests 7. Front seat belts 8. Side-impact pressure sensor (driver’s side shown; front passenger’s side similar) 9. Supplemental front-impact air bags 10. Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bags 11. Seats 12. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) 13. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats shown; rear outboard seats simi- LRS3090 lar) 1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 14. Satellite sensors ∙ Make sure that there is no object ∙ Until you have confirmed with a 15. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for placed between the seat cushion and dealer that your passenger seat occu- CHildren) system center console or between the seat pant classification system is working cushion and the door. properly, position the occupants in 16. Satellite sensors the rear seating positions. ∙ If a forward facing child restraint is 17. Rear outboard seat-mounted side- installed in the front passenger seat, ∙ Do not position the front passenger impact supplemental air bags do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the seat so the child restraint contacts the front seat does contact the rear seat, WARNING instrument panel. If the child restraint the air bag system may determine a To ensure proper operation of the pas- does contact the instrument panel, sensor malfunction has occurred and senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- the system may determine the seat is the front passenger air bag status tem, please observe the following occupied and the passenger air bag light may illuminate and the supple- items. and passenger knee air bag may de- mental air bag warning light may ploy in a collision. Also the front pas- flash. ∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear senger air bag status light may not seat to push or pull on the seatback illuminate. For additional information This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN pocket. about installing and using child re- Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and ∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than straints, refer to "Child restraints" in front passenger seats. This system is de- 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head this section. signed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in restraint/headrest or in the seatback ∙ Confirm the operating condition with Canada. However, all of the information, pocket. the front passenger air bag status cautions and warnings in this manual light. ∙ Make sure that there is nothing press- still apply and must be followed. ing against the rear of the seatback, ∙ If you notice that the front passenger such as a child restraint installed in air bag status light is not operating as The driver supplemental front-impact air the rear seat or an object stored on described in this section, get the oc- bag is located in the center of the steering the floor. cupant classification system checked. wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the ∙ Make sure that there is no object It is recommended that you visit a dashboard above the glove box. The front placed under the front passenger NISSAN dealer for this service. air bags are designed to inflate in higher seat. severity frontal collisions, although they Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55 may inflate if the forces in another type of this section. One front air bag inflating does Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat collision are similar to those of a higher not indicate improper performance of the belts should be correctly worn and the severity frontal impact. They may not in- system. driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle If you have any questions about your air wheel or instrument panel. The front air damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi- bag system, it is recommended that you bags inflate quickly in order to help protect cation of proper front air bag system op- visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information the front occupants. Because of this, the eration. about the system. If you are considering force of the front air bag inflating can in- modification of your vehicle due to a dis- The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System crease the risk of injury if the occupant is ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con- monitors information from the crash zone too close to, or is against, the front air bag tact information is contained in the front of sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat module during inflation. this Owner’s Manual. belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi- The front air bags deflate quickly after a When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op- collision. eration is based on the severity of a colli- noise may be heard, followed by the re- sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful The front air bags operate only when the the front passenger, the occupant classifi- and does not indicate a fire. Care should be ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- cation sensor is also monitored. Based on taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation. tion and choking. Those with a history of a information from the sensor, only one front After placing the ignition switch in the breathing condition should get fresh air air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on ON position, the supplemental air bag promptly. the crash severity and whether the front warning light illuminates. The supple- occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi- Front air bags, along with the use of seat mental air bag warning light will turn off tionally, the front passenger air bag and belts, help to cushion the impact force on after about 7 seconds if the system is passenger knee air bag may be automati- the face and chest of the front occupants. operational. cally turned off under some conditions, de- They can help save lives and reduce seri- pending on the weight detected on the ous injuries. However, an inflating front air front passenger seat and how the seat belt bag may cause facial abrasions or other is used. If the front passenger air bag and injuries. Front air bags do not provide re- passenger knee air bag are OFF, the front straint to the lower body. passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in 1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Front passenger air bag and status light Status light The front passenger seat is equipped with WARNING an occupant classification sensor (weight The front passenger air bag and pas- sensor) that turns the front passenger air senger knee air bag are designed to au- bag and passenger knee air bag on or off tomatically turn OFF under some condi- depending on the weight applied to the tions. Read this section carefully to front passenger seat. The status of the learn how it operates. Proper use of the front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indi- seat, seat belt, and child restraints is cated by the front passenger air bag status necessary for most effective protec- light which is located on the instru- tion. Failure to follow all instructions in ment panel. this manual concerning the use of After the ignition switch is placed in the seats, seat belts, and child restraints "ON" position, the front passenger air bag can increase the risk or severity of in- LRS3091 status light on the instrument panel illumi- jury in an accident. nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows: PASSENGER AIR BAG CONDITION DESCRIPTION FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG AND PASSENGER KNEE AIR BAG STATUS STATUS LIGHT ( ) Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Nobody/Somebody Small Adult in front passenger ON (illuminated) INHIBITED seat Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects For additional information, refer to “Normal placed on the front passenger seat may operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this also cause the light to operate as de- section. scribed above depending on their weight. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57 Front passenger air bag Front passenger seat adult occupants who OFF. For additional information about are properly seated and using the seat belt proper use and installation, refer to “Child The front passenger air bag is designed to as outlined in this manual should not restraints” in this section. automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is cause the front passenger air bag and pas- If the front passenger seat is not occupied, operated under some conditions as de- senger knee air bag to be automatically the front passenger air bag and passenger scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu- turned OFF. For small adults it may be knee air bag are designed not to inflate in a lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, turned OFF, however if the occupant takes crash. However, heavy objects placed on it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag his/her weight off the seat cushion (for ex- the seat could result in air bag inflation, and other air bags in your vehicle are not ample, by not sitting upright, by sitting on because of the object’s weight detected by part of this system. an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being the occupant classification sensor. Other out of position), this could cause the sensor The purpose of the regulation is to help conditions could also result in air bag infla- to turn the air bag OFF.Always be sure to be tion, such as if a child is standing on the reduce the risk of injury or death from an seated and wearing the seat belt properly seat, or if two children are on the seat, con- inflating air bag to certain front passenger for the most effective protection by the trary to the instructions in this manual. Al- seat occupants, such as children, by requir- seat belt and supplemental air bag. ing the air bag to be automatically turned ways be sure that you and all vehicle occu- OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and pants are seated and restrained properly. children be properly restrained in a rear requirements. Using the front passenger air bag status seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap- light, you can monitor when the front pas- The occupant classification sensor in this propriate child restraints and booster senger air bag and passenger knee air bag vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If are automatically turned OFF. detect an occupant and objects on the this is not possible, the occupant classifica- seat by weight. For example, if a child is in tion sensor is designed to operate as de- If an adult occupant is in the seat but the the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad- scribed above to turn the front passenger front passenger air bag status light is illu- vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn air bag and passenger knee air bag OFF for minated (indicating that the front passen- the front passenger air bag OFF in accor- specified child restraints as required by the ger air bag and passenger knee air bag are dance with the regulations. Also, if a child regulations. Failing to properly secure child OFF), it could be that the person is a small restraint of the type specified in the regula- restraints and to use the ALR mode may adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly tions is on the seat, its weight and the allow the restraint to tip or move in a colli- or not using the seat belt properly. child’s weight can be detected and cause sion or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag and passenger knee the air bag to turn OFF. air bag inflating in a crash instead of being 1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If a child restraint must be used in the front the front passenger seat status. This is nor- ∙ Make sure that the front passenger seat, the front passenger air bag status mal system operation and does not indi- seat or seatback is not forced back light may or may not be illuminated, de- cate a malfunction. against an object on the seat or floor pending on the size of the child and the behind it. If a malfunction occurs in the front passen- type of child restraint being used. If the air ger air bag system, the supplemental air ∙ Make sure that there is no object placed bag status light is not illuminated (indicat- under the front passenger seat. ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash), bag warning light , located in the me- it could be that the child restraint or seat ter and gauges area of the instrument Steps belt is not being used properly. Make sure panel, will be illuminated (blinking or 1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats” that the child restraint is installed properly, steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is section of this manual. Sit upright, lean- the seat belt is used properly and the occu- recommended that you visit a NISSAN ing against the seatback, and centered pant is positioned properly. If the air bag dealer for this service. on the seat cushion with your feet com- status light is still not illuminated, reposi- Normal operation fortably extended to the floor. tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear In order for the occupant classification seat. sensor system to classify the front passen- 2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap. If the front passenger air bag status light ger based on weight, please follow the pre- will not illuminate even though you believe cautions and steps outlined below: 3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the that the child restraint, the seat belts and Precautions “Seat belts” section of this manual. the occupant are properly positioned, it is Front passenger seat belt buckle sta- recommended that you take your vehicle ∙ Make sure that there are no objects tus is monitored by the occupant clas- to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on sification system, and is used as an in- check system status by using a special the seat or placed in the seatback put to determine occupancy status. So, tool. However, until you have confirmed pocket. it is highly recommended that the front with a dealer that your air bag is working ∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other passenger fasten their seat belt. properly, reposition the occupant or child object is not pressing against the rear 4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds restraint in a rear seat. of the seatback. allowing the system to classify the The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and ∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not front passenger before the vehicle is front passenger air bag status light will pushing or pulling on the back of the put into motion. take a few seconds to register a change in front passenger seat. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59 5. Ensure proper classification by check- However, if the occupant is not a small NOTE: ing the front passenger air bag status adult, then this may be due to the following A system check will be performed during light. conditions that may be interfering with the which the front passenger air bag status weight sensors: NOTE: light will remain lit for about 7 seconds ∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning initially. This vehicle’s occupant classification against the seatback, and centered on If the light is still ON after this, the person sensor system generally keeps the clas- the seat cushion with his/her feet com- should be advised not to ride in the front sification locked during driving, so it is fortably extended to the floor. important that you confirm that the passenger seat and the vehicle should be front passenger is properly classified ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing checked as soon as possible. It is recom- prior to driving. However, the occupant against the rear of the seatback. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. classification sensor may recalculate the ∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on weight of the occupant under some con- the back of the front passenger seat. 2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, ditions (both while driving and when child or child restraint occupying the ∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback stopped), so front passenger seat occu- front passenger seat. pants should continue to remain seated against an object on the seat or floor as outlined above. behind it. This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the ∙ An object placed under the front pas- Troubleshooting weight sensors: senger seat. If you think the front passenger air bag ∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright, status light is incorrect: ∙ An object placed between the seat leaning against the seatback, and cen- cushion and center console or between tered on the seat cushion with his/her 1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the seat cushion and the door. feet comfortably extended to the floor. the front passenger seat: If the vehicle is moving, please come to a ∙ The child restraint is not properly in- ∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag stop when it is safe to do so. Check and stalled, as outlined in the “Child re- light is functioning as intended. The correct any of the above conditions. Re- straints” section of this manual. front passenger air bag and passenger start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. knee air bag are suppressed. ∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket. 1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing 3. If the light is OFF with no front passen- ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes against the rear of the seatback. ger and no objects on the front pas- to your vehicle’s electrical system, senger seat, the vehicle should be ∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on suspension system or front end struc- checked. It is recommended that you the back of the front passenger seat. ture. This could affect proper opera- visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos- tion of the front air bag system. ∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback sible. against an object on the seat or floor ∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys- Other supplemental front-impact air behind it. tem may result in serious personal in- bag precautions jury. Tampering includes changes to ∙ An object placed under the front pas- the steering wheel and the instru- senger seat. WARNING ment panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and ∙ Do not place any objects on the steer- ∙ An object placed between the seat above the instrument panel or by in- ing wheel pad or on the instrument cushion and center console. stalling additional trim material panel. Also, do not place any objects around the air bag system. If the vehicle is moving, please come to a between any occupant and the steer- stop when it is safe to do so. Check and ing wheel or instrument panel. Such ∙ Removing or modifying the front pas- correct any of the above conditions. Re- objects may become dangerous pro- senger seat may affect the function of start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. jectiles and cause injury if the front air the air bag system and result in seri- bags inflate. ous personal injury. NOTE: ∙ Immediately after inflation, several A system check will be performed during front air bag system components will which the front passenger air bag status be hot. Do not touch them; you may light will remain lit for about 7 seconds severely burn yourself. initially. ∙ No unauthorized changes should be If the light is still OFF after this, the small made to any components or wiring of adult, child or child restraint should be re- the supplemental air bag system. This positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle is to prevent accidental inflation of should be checked as soon as possible. It is the supplemental air bag or damage recommended that you visit a NISSAN to the supplemental air bag system. dealer for this service. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61 ∙ Modifying or tampering with the front ∙ It is recommended that you visit a passenger seat may result in serious NISSAN dealer for work on and around personal injury. For example, do not the front air bag system. It is also rec- change the front seats by placing ma- ommended that you visit a NISSAN terial on the seat cushion or by install- dealer for installation of electrical ing additional trim material, such as equipment. The Supplemental Re- seat covers, on the seat that are not straint System (SRS) wiring har- specifically designed to assure proper nesses* should not be modified or dis- air bag operation. Additionally, do not connected. Unauthorized electrical stow any objects under the front pas- test equipment and probing devices senger seat or the seat cushion and should not be used on the air bag seatback. Such objects may interfere system. with the proper operation of the occu- ∙ A cracked windshield should be re- pant classification sensor (weight placed immediately by a qualified re- sensor). LRS3142 pair facility. A cracked windshield ∙ No unauthorized changes should be could affect the function of the Front and rear outboard made to any components or wiring of supplemental air bag system. seat-mounted side-impact the seat belt system. This may affect supplemental air bag and the front air bag system. Tampering *The SRS wiring harness connectors are with the seat belt system may result yellow and orange for easy identifica- roof-mounted curtain side- in serious personal injury. tion. impact and rollover supplemental When selling your vehicle, we request that air bag systems you inform the buyer about the front air The side air bags are located in the outside bag system and guide the buyer to the of the seatback of the front and rear out- appropriate sections in this Owner’s board seats. The curtain air bags are lo- Manual. cated in the side roof rails. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, al- 1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system though they may inflate if the forces in an- outboard seating positions. They can help mental air bag warning light will turn off other type of collision are similar to those of save lives and reduce serious injuries. How- after about 7 seconds if the system is a higher severity impact. They are de- ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain air operational. signed to inflate on the side where the ve- bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. hicle is impacted. They may not inflate in Side air bags and curtain air bags do not WARNING certain side collisions. provide restraint to the lower body. ∙ Do not place any objects near the Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate The seat belts should be correctly worn seatback of the front and rear seats. in certain types of rollover collisions or near and the driver, front passenger and rear Also, do not place any objects (an um- rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move- outboard occupants seated upright as far brella, bag, etc.) between the front ments (for example, during severe off- as practical away from the side air bag. and rear door finisher and the front roading) may cause the curtain air bags to Rear seat passengers should be seated as and rear seat. Such objects may be- inflate. far away as practical from the door finish- come dangerous projectiles and ers and side roof rails. The side air bags and cause injury if a side air bag inflate. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to an indication of proper side air bag and ∙ Right after inflation, several side air help protect the occupants. Because of curtain air bag operation. bag and curtain air bag system com- this, the force of the side air bag and curtain ponents will be hot. Do not touch When the side air bags and curtain air bags air bag inflating can increase the risk of them; you may severely burn yourself. inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, injury if the occupant is too close to, or is followed by the release of smoke. This against, these air bag modules during in- ∙ No unauthorized changes should be smoke is not harmful and does not indi- flation. The side air bag will deflate quickly made to any components or wiring of cate a fire. Care should be taken not to after the collision is over. the side air bag and curtain air bag inhale it, as it may cause irritation and systems. This is to prevent damage to The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a choking. Those with a history of a breath- or accidental inflation of the side air short time. ing condition should get fresh air promptly. bag and curtain air bag or damage to The side air bags and curtain air bags the side air bag and curtain air bag Side air bags, along with the use of seat operate only when the ignition switch is systems. belts, help to cushion the impact force on placed in the ON position. the chest and pelvic area of the front and rear outboard occupants. Curtain air bags After placing the ignition switch in the help to cushion the impact force to the ON position, the supplemental air bag head of occupants in the front and rear warning light illuminates. The supple- Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63 ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes When selling your vehicle, we request that to your vehicle’s electrical system, you inform the buyer about the side air bag suspension system or side panel. This and curtain air bag systems and guide the could affect proper operation of the buyer to the appropriate sections in this side air bag and curtain air bag Owner’s Manual. systems. ∙ Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front and rear seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag. ∙ It is recommended that you visit a LRS3037 NISSAN dealer for work on and around Driver’s side the side air bag and curtain air bag. It Driver and passenger is also recommended that you visit a supplemental knee air bag NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring har- The knee air bag is located in the knee nesses* should not be modified or dis- bolster, on the driver’s and passenger’s connected. Unauthorized electrical side. All of the information, cautions and test equipment and probing devices warnings in this manual apply and must should not be used on the side air bag be followed. The knee air bag is designed or curtain air bag system. to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, * The SRS wiring harness connectors are although it may inflate if the forces in an- yellow and orange for easy identifica- other type of collision are similar to those of tion. a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain collisions.

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system The knee air bag helps to cushion the im- WARNING pact force on the knees of the driver and passenger. It can help reduce serious inju- ∙ Do not place any objects between the ries. However, an inflating knee air bag may knee bolster and the driver’s or pas- cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee senger’s seat. Such objects may be- air bag provides restraint to the lower body. come dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a knee air bag inflates. The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to ∙ Right after inflation, the knee air bag help protect the occupants. Because of system components will be hot. Do this, the force of the knee air bag inflating not touch them; you may severely can increase the risk of injury if the occu- burn yourself. pant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag ∙ No unauthorized changes should be will deflate quickly after the collision is over made to any components or wiring of LRS3038 OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for the knee air bag system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation Passenger’s side a short time. of the knee air bag system. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always The knee air bag operates only when the ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes an indication of proper knee air bag opera- ignition switch is placed in the ON position. to your vehicle’s electrical system or tion. suspension system. This could affect When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud After placing the ignition switch in the proper operation of the knee air bag noise may be heard, followed by release of system. smoke. This smoke is not harmful and ON position, the supplemental air bag does not indicate a fire. Care should be warning light illuminates. The supple- ∙ Tampering with the knee air bag sys- taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita- mental air bag warning light will turn off tem may result in serious personal in- tion and choking. Those with a history of a after about 7 seconds if the system is jury. For example, do not change the breathing condition should get fresh air operational. driver or passenger knee bolster or promptly. install additional trim material around the knee air bag.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65 ∙ It is recommended that you visit a Seat belt with pretensioner(s) ∙ It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around (front and rear outboard seats) NISSAN dealer for work on and around the knee air bag. It is also recom- the pretensioner system. It is also rec- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer WARNING ommended that you visit a NISSAN for installation of electrical equip- dealer for installation of electrical ment. The SRS wiring harnesses* ∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused equipment. Unauthorized electrical should not be modified or discon- after activation. They must be re- test equipment and probing devices nected. Unauthorized electrical test placed together with the retractor should not be used on the preten- equipment and probing devices and buckle as a unit. sioner system. should not be used on the knee air ∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a ∙ If you need to dispose of the preten- bag system. collision but pretensioner(s) are not sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec- activated, be sure to have the preten- *The SRS wiring harness or connectors ommended that you visit a NISSAN sioner system checked and, if neces- are yellow or orange for easy identifica- dealer for this service. Incorrect dis- sary, replaced. It is recommended that tion. posal procedures could cause per- you visit a NISSAN dealer for this sonal injury. When selling your vehicle, we request that service. you inform the buyer about the knee air ∙ No unauthorized changes should be The pretensioner system may activate bag system and guide the buyer to the made to any components or wiring of with the supplemental air bag system in appropriate sections in this manual. the pretensioner system. This is to certain types of collisions. Working with the prevent damage to or accidental acti- seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper- tighten the seat belt when the vehicle being with the pretensioner system may comes involved in certain types of colli- result in serious personal injury. sions, helping to restrain front and rear outboard seat occupants. The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest. The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. For additional LRS2163 LRS0100 information, refer to "Supplemental air bag warning light" in this section. If the opera- 1. SRS air bag warning labels (located SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING tion of the supplemental air bag warning on the sun visors) LIGHT light indicates there is a malfunction, have SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING the system checked. It is recommended LABELS The supplemental air bag warning light, that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- displaying in the instrument panel, vice. Warning labels about the supplemental monitors the circuits for the air bag sys- When selling your vehicle, we request that front-impact air bag system are placed in tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring. you inform the buyer about the preten- the vehicle as shown in the illustration. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON sioner system and guide the buyer to the position, the supplemental air bag warning appropriate sections in this Owner’s WARNING light illuminates for about 7 seconds and Manual. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint then turns off. This means the system is on a seat protected by an air bag in operational. front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67 If any of the following conditions occur, the Repair and replacement WARNING front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, procedure knee air bag and pretensioner systems ∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, cur- need servicing: The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air tain air bag or knee air bag has in- bags, knee air bags and pretensioner(s) are flated, the air bag module will not ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light designed to inflate on a one-time-only ba- function again and must be replaced. remains on after approximately 7 sec- sis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the Additionally, the activated preten- onds. supplemental air bag warning light re- sioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light mains illuminated after inflation has oc- should be replaced. It is recom- flashes intermittently. curred. These systems should be repaired mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light for this service. However, the air bag recommended that you visit a NISSAN does not come on at all. module and pretensioner(s) cannot dealer for this service. be repaired. Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag or When maintenance work is required on the ∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain pretensioner systems may not operate vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, air bag, knee air bag systems and the properly. They must be checked and re- curtain air bags, knee air bags, pretension- pretensioner system should be in- paired. It is recommended that you visit a er(s) and related parts should be pointed spected if there is any damage to the NISSAN dealer for this service. out to the person performing the mainte- front end or side portion of the ve- nance. The ignition switch should always hicle. It is recommended that you visit WARNING be placed in the LOCK position when work- a NISSAN dealer for this service. ing under the hood or inside the vehicle. If the supplemental air bag warning ∙ If you need to dispose of the supple- light is on, it could mean that the front mental air bag or pretensioner sys- air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom- knee air bag and/or pretensioner sys- mended that you contact a NISSAN tems will not operate in an accident. To dealer for this service. Incorrect dis- help avoid injury to yourself or others, posal procedures could cause per- have your vehicle checked as soon as sonal injury. possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The OCS should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69 2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...... 2-2 Security systems ...... 2-39 Meters and gauges...... 2-4 Vehicle security system ...... 2-39 Speedometer and odometer ...... 2-4 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 2-40 Tachometer ...... 2-6 Wiper and washer switch ...... 2-42 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-6 Switch operation ...... 2-42 Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 Rear window and outside mirror Distance To Empty (DTE)...... 2-7 (if so equipped) defroster switch...... 2-43 Variable Compression Turbo Headlight and turn signal switch ...... 2-43 (if so equipped) ...... 2-8 Headlight control switch...... 2-43 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system reminders ...... 2-9 (Type A) (if so equipped) ...... 2-48 Checking lights...... 2-10 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Warning lights ...... 2-10 system (Type B) (if so equipped) ...... 2-48 Indicator lights ...... 2-15 Instrument brightness control...... 2-49 Audible reminders ...... 2-18 Turn signal switch ...... 2-49 Vehicle information display ...... 2-19 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-50 How to use the vehicle information Horn ...... 2-50 display ...... 2-19 Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ...... 2-51 Startup display ...... 2-20 Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-52 Resetting the drive computer...... 2-20 Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with Oil control system (if so equipped) ...... 2-21 ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) ...... 2-52 Settings ...... 2-21 E-call (SOS) button (if so equipped) ...... 2-53 Vehicle information display indicators ...... 2-29 Rear Door Alert ...... 2-53 Vehicle information display warnings ...... 2-32 Power outlet...... 2-55 Extended storage switch ...... 2-55 Personal lights ...... 2-65 Storage...... 2-56 Trunk light...... 2-66 Front-door pockets...... 2-56 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver Seatback pockets ...... 2-57 (if so equipped) ...... 2-66 Glovebox...... 2-57 Programming HomeLink® ...... 2-67 Console box ...... 2-58 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian Overhead sunglasses storage ...... 2-58 customers and gate openers...... 2-68 Cup holders ...... 2-59 Operating the HomeLink® Universal Windows ...... 2-60 Transceiver ...... 2-69 Power windows ...... 2-60 Programming trouble-diagnosis ...... 2-69 Moonroof (if so equipped) ...... 2-63 Clearing the programmed information ...... 2-69 Power moonroof ...... 2-63 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® Interior lights ...... 2-64 button...... 2-70 Map lights ...... 2-65 If your vehicle is stolen...... 2-70 INSTRUMENT PANEL

LII2584 2-2 Instruments and controls 9. Front passenger supplemental air 18. Cruise control switches bag (P. 1-46) (if so equipped) (P. 5-63) 10. Passenger supplemental knee Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) airbag (P. 1-46) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-66) 11.. Glove box (P. 2-56) Bluetooth® Hands-free Phone 12. Front passenger air bag status System* light (P. 1-46) ProPILOT Assist Switch Hazard warning flasher switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-90) (P. 6-2) 19. Driver supplemental knee airbag 13. Power outlet (P. 2-55) (P. 1-46) USB connection port 20. Hood release (P. 3-24) (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-41) Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-27) Aux jack* Tilt/telescopic steering wheel 14. Cup holders (P. 2-56) controls (P. 3-29) 15 Shift lever (P. 5-18) 21. Trip computer reset switch (P. 2-4) 16. Electronic parking brake switch Instrument brightness control (if so equipped) (P. 5-25) (P. 2-43) Automatic brake hold switch Steering assist switch (for vehicles (if so equipped) (P. 5-25) with ProPILOT Assist) (if so 17. Push-button ignition switch equipped) (P. 2-52) (P. 5-13) Trunk opener (P. 3-25) *: For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-3 METERS AND GAUGES

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side of the meter clus- ter. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display.

LIC4029 1. Tachometer 5. Fuel gauge 2. Warning and indicator lights 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge 3. Vehicle information display Odometer Twin trip odometer 4. Speedometer

2-4 Instruments and controls Changing the display Push the TRIP RESET switch ᭺2 on the left side of the instrument panel to change the display as follows: Odometer Mileage → Trip → Trip → Odometer Mileage Resetting the trip odometer Push the TRIP RESET switch ᭺2 until the desired trip odometer (Trip or Trip ) is displayed. Pushing the TRIP RESET switch ᭺2 for more LIC2218 LIC2921 than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero. Speedometer Odometer/Twin trip odometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. The odometer and the twin trip odometer ᭺1 are displayed in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

Instruments and controls 2-5 CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual for immediate action required. LIC4085 LIC3538 TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE The tachometer indicates engine speed in GAUGE revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev The gauge indicates the engine coolant ᭺1 the engine into the red zone . temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range ᭺1 when CAUTION the gauge needle points within the zone When engine speed approaches the red shown in the illustration. zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause The engine coolant temperature varies serious engine damage. with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

2-6 Instruments and controls Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg- Changes in driving patterns or conditions isters 0 (Empty). can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, The indicates that the fuel-filler the value displayed may differ from the ac- door is located on the driver’s side of the tual distance that can be driven. vehicle. DTE display will change to “---” when the fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to CAUTION the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty). ∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the NOTE: Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. ∙ The DTE value after refill is estimated After a few driving trips, the light based on recent fuel economy and should turn off. If the light remains on amount of fuel added. after a few driving trips, have the ve- ∙ If a small amount of fuel is added, or LIC2222 hicle inspected. It is recommended the ignition is on during refueling, the that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this display may not be updated. FUEL GAUGE service. ∙ Conditions that affect the fuel The gauge indicates the approximate fuel ∙ For additional information, refer to economy will also affect the esti- level in the tank. “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in mated DTE value (city/highway driv- this section. The gauge may move slightly during braking, idle time, remote start time, tering, turning, acceleration, or going up or DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE) rain, seasonal weather, added vehicle down hills. Displays the estimated distance the ve- weight, added deflectors, roof racks, etc.). The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af- hicle can be driven before refueling. The ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFF value is calculated based on recent fuel position. economy, the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consump- The low fuel warning message shows in tion. the vehicle information display when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Instruments and controls 2-7 This is not a physical gauge. It is a display CAUTION option in the vehicle information display that can be selected. For additional infor- If the Variable Compression Turbo be- mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis- comes faulty, the Malfunction Indicator play” in this section. Light (MIL) may come on. For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indi- 1 ᭺ Compression ratio status display cator Light (MIL)” in this section. Displays the status of compression ratio controlled by Variable Compression Turbo. The lowest compression ratio (8:1) and the highest (14:1) are displayed as “Power” and ”Eco” respectively. ᭺2 Turbo charger boost pressure gauge Displays the turbo charger boost pres- LIC3924 sure.

VARIABLE COMPRESSION TURBO NOTE: (if so equipped) Under some conditions, the compres- Your engine is equipped with a variable sion ratio may not change. This is not a compression ratio system called “Variable malfunction of the system. Compression Turbo”. This system can vary the engine compression ratio continuously. According to driving conditions, the system applies optimum compression ratio automatically to achieve both high output and high fuel economy efficiency.

2-8 Instruments and controls WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock Braking System Power steering warning light High beam assist indicator light (green) (ABS) warning light (if so equipped)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning High beam indicator light (blue) system warning light (if so equipped) light (if so equipped)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Charge warning light Automatic brake hold indicator light Side light and headlight indicator light (green) (if so equipped) (green)

Electronic parking brake warning light Automatic brake hold indicator light Slip indicator light (yellow) (if so equipped) (white) (if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light or Electronic parking brake indi- Turn signal/hazard indicator lights cator light (red) (if so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light Front fog light indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF (if so equipped) indicator light

Master warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Instruments and controls 2-9 CHECKING LIGHTS WARNING LIGHTS Automatic Emergency With all doors closed, apply the parking For additional information on warnings Braking (AEB) system brake, fasten the seat belts and place the and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information ignition switch in the ON position without warning light (if so starting the engine. The following lights (if display” in this section. equipped) so equipped) will come on: or Anti-lock Braking This light comes on when the ignition System (ABS) switch is placed in the ON position. It turns , , , , , PARK off after the vehicle is started. or warning light This light illuminates when the AEB system The following lights (if so equipped) come When the ignition switch is placed in the ON on briefly and then go off: is set to OFF on the meter display. position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is If the light illuminates when the AEB sys- or , , , , , operational. tem is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, re- or , If the ABS warning light illuminates while fer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” If any light fails to come on or operate in a the engine is running or while driving, it and “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning way other than described, it may indicate a may indicate the ABS is not functioning (I-FCW)” in the “Starting and driving” section burned-out bulb and/or a system mal- properly. Have the system checked. It is of this manual. function. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Automatic Emergency dealer for this service. If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock Braking (AEB) with Some indicators and warnings are also dis- function is turned off. The brake system Pedestrian Detection played in the vehicle information display then operates normally but without anti- between the speedometer and tachom- system warning light (if so lock assistance. For additional information, eter. For additional information, refer to “Ve- equipped) hicle information display” in this section. refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.

2-10 Instruments and controls This light illuminates when the AEB with 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake Charge warning light Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF fluid as necessary. For additional infor- in the vehicle information display. mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do- If this light comes on while the engine is it-yourself” section of this manual. If the light illuminates when the AEB with running, it may indicate the charging sys- Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have tem is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If indicate that the system is unavailable. For the warning system checked. It is rec- the belt is loose, broken, or missing, or if the additional information, refer to “Automatic ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. light remains on, have the system checked. Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN Detection” and “Intelligent Forward Colli- dealer for this service. sion Warning (I-FCW)” in the “Starting and WARNING driving” section of this manual. ∙ Your brake system may not be work- CAUTION ing properly if the warning light is on. or Brake warning Driving could be dangerous. If you ∙ Do not ground electrical accessories light judge it to be safe, drive carefully to directly to the battery terminal. Doing the nearest service station for repairs. so will bypass the variable voltage This light functions for both the parking Otherwise, have your vehicle towed control system and the vehicle bat- brake and the foot brake systems. because driving it could be tery may not charge completely. For dangerous. additional information, refer to “Vari- Parking brake indicator (if so equipped) able voltage control system” in the ∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON “Do-it-yourself” section of this gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid manual. position, the light comes on when the park- level may increase your stopping dis- ing brake is applied. tance and braking will require greater ∙ Do not continue driving if the genera- Low brake fluid warning light pedal effort as well as pedal travel. tor belt is loose, broken or missing. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON ∙ If the brake fluid level is below the position, the light warns of a low brake fluid MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake level. If the light comes on while the engine fluid reservoir, do not drive until the is running with the parking brake not ap- brake system has been checked. It is plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol- recommended that you visit a NISSAN lowing: dealer for this service. Instruments and controls 2-11 Electronic parking brake CAUTION When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust warning light (yellow) (if so Running the engine with the engine oil the tire pressure of all four tires to the equipped) pressure warning light on could cause recommended COLD tire pressure shown The electronic parking brake system warn- serious damage to the engine almost on the Tire and Loading Information la- immediately. Such damage is not cov- ing light functions for the electronic park- bel located in the driver’s door opening. ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited The low tire pressure warning light does ing brake system. If the warning light illumi- Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as not automatically turn off when the tire nates, it may indicate the electronic it is safe to do so. pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in- parking brake system is not functioning flated to the recommended pressure, properly. Have the system checked. It is Low tire pressure warning the vehicle must be driven at speeds recommended that you visit a NISSAN light above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the dealer for this service. TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres- For additional information, refer to “Parking warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni- to check the tire pressure. brake” in the “Starting and driving” section tors the tire pressure of all tires except the of this manual. spare. The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition switch is Engine oil pressure The low tire pressure warning light warns placed in the ON position as long as the low warning light of low tire pressure or indicates that the tire pressure warning light remains illumi- TPMS is not functioning properly. This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If nated. the light flickers or comes on during normal After the ignition switch is placed in the ON For additional information, refer to “Vehicle driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop position, this light illuminates for about information display” in this section, “Tire the engine immediately and call a NISSAN 1 second and turns off. Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the dealer or other authorized repair shop. “Starting and driving” and “In case of emer- Low tire pressure warning The engine oil pressure warning light is gency” sections of this manual. not designed to indicate a low oil level. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For pressure, the warning light will illumi- additional information, refer to “Engine oil” nate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this warning also appears in the vehicle in- manual. formation display. 2-12 Instruments and controls TPMS malfunction ∙ If the light does not illuminate with the ∙ When replacing a wheel without the If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the ignition switch placed in the ON posi- TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS low tire pressure warning light will flash for tion, have the vehicle checked as soon will not function and the low tire pres- approximately 1 minute when the ignition as possible. It is recommended that you sure warning light will flash for ap- switch is placed in the ON position. The visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. proximately 1 minute. The light will re- light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the ∙ If the light illuminates while driving, main on after 1 minute. Have your system checked. It is recommended that avoid sudden steering maneuvers or tires replaced and/or TPMS system you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. for these services. does not appear if the low tire pressure Driving with under-inflated tires may warning light illuminates to indicate a permanently damage the tires and in- ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- TPMS malfunction. crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se- nally specified by NISSAN could affect rious vehicle damage could occur and the proper operation of the TPMS. For additional information, refer to “Tire may lead to an accident and could re- Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the sult in serious personal injury or CAUTION “Starting and driving” section and “Tire death. Check the tire pressure for all pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to ∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the this manual. the recommended COLD tire pressure regular tire pressure check. Be sure to show on the Tire and Loading Infor- check the tire pressure regularly. WARNING mation label located in the driver’s ∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds door opening to turn the low tire pres- of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect sure warning light off. If the light still TPMS may not operate correctly. electric medical equipment. Those illuminates while driving after adjust- who use a pacemaker should contact ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat ∙ Be sure to install the specified size of the electric medical equipment or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If tires to the four wheels correctly. manufacturer for the possible influ- you have a flat tire, replace it with a ences before use. spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-13 Master warning light ∙ When the power steering warning For additional information, refer to “Power light illuminates with the engine run- steering” in the “Starting and driving” sec- When the ignition is in the ON position, the ning, there will be no power assist for tion of this manual. master warning light illuminates if any of the steering. You will still have control Rear Automatic Braking the following are displayed on the vehicle of the vehicle, but the steering will be information display. harder to operate. Have the power (RAB) warning light (if so steering system checked. It is recom- equipped) ∙ No key warning mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. This light comes on when the ignition ∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning switch is placed in the ON position. It turns ∙ Parking brake release warning When the ignition switch is placed in the ON off after the engine is started. position, the power steering warning light This light illuminates when the RAB system ∙ Door/trunk open warning illuminates. After starting the engine, the is turned off in the vehicle information dis- power steering warning light turns off. This ∙ Loose fuel cap play. indicates the power steering is operational. ∙ Low tire pressure warning If the light illuminates when the RAB sys- If the power steering warning light illumi- tem is on, it may indicate that the system is Power steering warning nates while the engine is running, it may unavailable. For additional information, re- indicate the power steering is not function- light fer to “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” in the ing properly and may need servicing. Have “Starting and driving” section of this the power steering checked. It is recom- WARNING manual. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ∙ If the engine is not running or is this service. Seat belt warning light and turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. When the power steering warning light illu- chime Steering will be harder to operate. minates with the engine running, there will The light and chime remind you to fasten be no power assist for the steering, but you the driver and front passenger seat belts. will still have control of the vehicle. At this For additional information, refer to “Seat time, greater steering effort is required to belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and operate the steering wheel, especially in supplemental restraint system” section of sharp turns and at low speeds. this manual. 2-14 Instruments and controls Supplemental air bag WARNING Automatic brake hold warning light If the supplemental air bag warning indicator light (white) (if so When the ignition switch is placed in the ON light is on, it could mean that the front equipped) or START position, the supplemental air air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag sys- The automatic brake hold indicator (white) tems and/or pretensioner systems will bag warning light illuminates for about illuminates when the automatic brake hold not operate in an accident. To help 7 seconds and then turns off. This means system is on standby. the system is operational. avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as pos- For additional information, refer to “Auto- If any of the following conditions occur, the sible. It is recommended that you visit a matic brake hold” in the “Starting and driv- front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, NISSAN dealer for this service. ing” section of the Owner’s Manual. and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN INDICATOR LIGHTS or Electronic parking dealer: For additional information, refer to “Vehicle brake indicator ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light information display” in this section. light (red) (if so remains on after approximately 7 sec- Automatic brake hold onds. equipped) indicator light (green) (if so ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light This light illuminates when the electronic flashes intermittently. equipped) parking brake system is operating. The automatic brake hold indicator light ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON (green) illuminates while the automatic does not come on at all. position, the electronic parking brake brake hold system is operating. warning light illuminates. When the engine Unless checked and repaired, the supple- is started and the parking brake is released, mental restraint system (air bag system) For additional information, refer to “Auto- the warning light turns off. and/or the pretensioners may not function matic brake hold” in the “Starting and driv- properly. For additional details, refer to ing” section of the Owner’s Manual. If the parking brake is not released, the “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in electronic parking brake warning light re- the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supple- mains illuminated. Ensure the electronic mental restraint system” section of this parking brake warning light has turned off manual. before driving. Instruments and controls 2-15 If the electronic parking brake warning light High beam assist indicator The MIL may also come on steady if the illuminates or flashes while the electronic light (green) (if so equipped) fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the parking brake system warning light vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure This indicator light illuminates when the (yellow) illuminates, it may indicate that the the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed headlights come on while the headlight electronic parking brake system is not tightly, and that the vehicle has at least switch is in the AUTO position with the high 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. functioning properly. Have the system beams selected. This indicates that the checked. It is recommended that you visit a high beam assist is operational. After a few driving trips, the light NISSAN dealer for this service. should turn off if no other potential emis- For additional information, refer to “Parking For additional information, refer to “Head- sion control system malfunction exists. brake” in the “Starting and driving” section light and turn signal switch” in this section. If this indicator light comes on steady for of this manual. High beam indicator light 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates Front fog light indicator (blue) that the vehicle is not ready for an emission light (if so equipped) This blue light comes on when the head- control system inspection/maintenance light high beams are on and goes out when test. For additional information, refer to The front fog light indicator light illumi- the low beams are selected. “Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance nates when the front fog lights are on. For (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer The high beam indicator light also comes additional information, refer to “Fog light information” section of this manual. switch” in this section. on when the passing signal is activated. Front passenger air bag Malfunction Indicator Light status light (MIL) The front passenger air bag status light will If this indicator light comes on steady or be lit and the passenger front air bag will be blinks while the engine is running, it may off depending on how the front passenger indicate a potential emission control mal- seat is being used. function. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. 2-16 Instruments and controls Operation – if possible, reduce the amount of Side light and headlight The MIL will come on in one of two ways: cargo being hauled or towed. indicator light (green) ∙ MIL on steady — An emission control The MIL may stop blinking and come on The side light and headlight indicator light system malfunction has been de- steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec- illuminates when the side light or headlight tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer position is selected. For additional informa- Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the for this service. You do not need to have tion, refer to “Headlight and turn signal vehicle information display. If the fuel- your vehicle towed to the dealer. switch” in this section. filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the CAUTION Slip indicator light vehicle. The light should turn off Continued vehicle operation without This indicator light will blink when the Ve- after a few driving trips. If the light having the emission control system hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is op- does not turn off after a few driving checked and repaired as necessary erating, thus alerting the driver to the fact trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is could lead to poor driveability, reduced that the road surface is slippery and the recommended that you visit a NISSAN fuel economy, and possible damage to vehicle is nearing its traction limits. dealer for this service. You do not need the emission control system. to have your vehicle towed to the Security indicator light You may feel or hear the system working; dealer. this is normal. ∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has This light blinks when the ignition switch is The light will blink for a few seconds after been detected which may damage the placed in the OFF, LOCK or AUTO ACC posi- the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin. emission control system. To reduce or tion. avoid emission control system dam- The indicator light also comes on The blinking security indicator light indi- age: when you place the ignition switch in the cates that the security systems equipped ON position. The light will turn off after ap- – do not drive at speeds above on the vehicle are operational. proximately 2 seconds if the system is op- 45 mph (72 km/h). erational. If the light does not come on For additional information, refer to “Security have the system checked. It is recom- – avoid hard acceleration or decelera- systems” in this section. tion. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. – avoid steep uphill grades. Instruments and controls 2-17 Turn signal/hazard WARNING NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer indicator lights VDC should remain on unless freeing a The appropriate light flashes when the turn vehicle from mud or snow. The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if signal switch is activated. While the VDC system is operating, you the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys- when locking the doors. When the buzzer Both lights flash when the hazard switch is sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle turned on. tem working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal. and the Intelligent Key. For additional infor- Vehicle Dynamic Control mation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in AUDIBLE REMINDERS the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” (VDC) OFF indicator light section of this manual. This indicator light comes on when the Brake pad wear warning VDC is turned off in the vehicle information The disc brake pads have audible wear display. This indicates the VDC has been warnings. When a disc brake pad requires turned off. replacement, it makes a high pitched Turn the VDC on using the vehicle informa- scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion display, or by restarting the engine. For tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de- additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy- pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start- as possible if the warning sound is heard. ing and driving” section of this manual. Light reminder chime The VDC light also comes on when the ig- With the ignition switch placed in the OFF nition switch is placed in the ON position. position, a chime sounds when the driver’s The light will turn off after a period of time if door is opened if the headlights or parking the system is operational. If the light stays lights are on. on or comes on along with the indicator light while you are driving, have the Turn the headlight control switch off before VDC system checked. It is recommended leaving the vehicle. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 2-18 Instruments and controls VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

∙ Indicators and warning ∙ Tire pressure information ∙ Audio information ∙ Compass and navigation information (if so equipped) ∙ ProPILOT (if so equipped) ∙ Driving Aids ∙ Odometer/twin trip odometer ∙ Distance to empty ∙ Clock and outside temperature LIC3224 LIC3566 The vehicle information display is located HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE to the left of the speedometer. It displays INFORMATION DISPLAY such items as: The vehicle information display can be ∙ Vehicle settings changed using the ∙ Drive computer information , , and OK buttons located on the ∙ Drive system warnings and settings (if steering wheel. so equipped) ∙ Cruise control system information ᭺1 - Use these buttons to navigate the vehicle infor- ∙ Variable Compression Turbo informa- mation display. tion (if so equipped) ᭺2 OK - Change or select an item in the ∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation infor- vehicle information display. mation Instruments and controls 2-19 ᭺3 — Returns to the previous menu. ∙ Convenience RESETTING THE DRIVE COMPUTER The OK, and buttons also ∙ Digital speed and average speed The drive computer is divided across three control audio and control panel functions ∙ Instant fuel economy/ average fuel screens: in some conditions. Most screens and economy ∙ Average Speed menus offer instruction prompts of the steering switch buttons to indicate how to ∙ Traffic Sign Recognition ∙ Average Fuel Economy control the vehicle information display. ∙ Tire Pressure ∙ Trip Distance & Time Dots on the right side of the vehicle information display will appear if there is more ∙ Variable Compression Turbo 1. Press the but- than one page of menu items or warning ∙ Speed Limit Sign tons until you reach the desired drive messages. The OK button changes the au- ∙ Compass and Navigation computer mode. dio source and the buttons also control voice recognition manual ∙ Audio/telephone 2. Press and hold the OK button for ap- mode. The OK button can be used to proximately 1 second to reset the infor- ∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) change the audio source when the audio mation on the currently displayed screen. screen is displayed. The but- ∙ ProPILOT tons can be used when controlling voice ∙ Driving Aids NOTE: recognition prompts manually. For additional information, refer to the separate ∙ Settings If you wish to reset all drive computer NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. ∙ Warnings* values at once, press and hold the OK button for approximately 3 seconds until STARTUP DISPLAY *Warnings will only display if there are any a reset menu appears; and follow the in- When the vehicle in placed in the ON posi- present. For additional information, refer to structions. tion the vehicle information display may “Vehicle information display warnings and display the following screens (if so indicators” in this section. equipped): To control what items display in the vehicle ∙ Home information display, refer to “How to use the vehicle information display” in this section. ∙ Drive Computer — Speed, Fuel Economy, Trip Distance & Time 2-20 Instruments and controls OIL CONTROL SYSTEM (if so tem. A reminder will be displayed when ap- 3. Select the Engine Oil Service due in xxx equipped) proaching the end of the service interval. miles display. When the Factory Reset option is selected 4. Press the OK button. Proceed to the The oil control system can be accessed in in the vehicle information display, the oil Cancel/Yes selection display. Select the Maintenance portion of the vehicle in- control system will also be reset to initial “Yes” for resetting. formation display settings. value. Please change the engine oil when Engine oil information informs the distance Factory Reset is selected. SETTINGS to oil change. Never exceed one year or The setting mode allows you to change the 7,500 miles (12000 km) between oil change CAUTION information displayed in the vehicle infor- intervals for the KR20DDET engine or mation display. It also allows you to change If the oil replacement indicator is dis- vehicle functions: 10,000 miles (16000 km) between oil change played, change the engine oil within intervals for the PR25DD engine. two weeks or less than 500 miles ∙ VDC Setting Display when Display timing Action Re- (800 km). ∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped) ignition is ON quired Operating the vehicle with deteriorated ∙ TPMS Setting Engine Oil Ser- Remaining oil Plan to have oil can damage the engine. vice due in xxx life is less than your vehicle ∙ Clock miles 940 miles serviced. To reset oil control system: ∙ Vehicle Settings (1500 km). 1. Push ignition button to “ON” position. Service due Remaining oil Have your ve- ∙ Maintenance 2. Push the drive computer now life is 0 miles hicle serviced ∙ Customize Display (0 km). within two switches and located on weeks or less the left side of the steering wheel to ∙ Unit/Language than 500 miles change the display. (800 km). ∙ Key-Linked Settings (if so equipped) The oil change interval cannot be adjusted ∙ Factory Reset manually. The distance to oil change interval is calculated depending on the driving conditions and set automatically by the oil control sys- Instruments and controls 2-21 VDC Setting The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. Menu item Result System Allows the user turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the Starting and driving” section of this manual. Driver Assistance (if so equipped) The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the settings for driving, parking, and braking aids. Menu item Result Steering Assist (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Steering Assist of the ProPILOT Assist system on or off. For additional information, please refer to “ProPILOT Assist system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Emergency Brake Displays available emergency braking options. Front Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” , “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” and “Intelligent For- ward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Rear (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Rear Auto- matic Braking (RAB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Lane (if so equipped) Displays available lane options. Lane Departure Warning Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Lane Departure Prevention Allows user to turn Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelli- gent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Blind Spot (if so equipped) Displays available blind spot options. Blind Spot Warning Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. 2-22 Instruments and controls Menu item Result Side Indicator Brightness Allows user to change the brightness of the side indicator. Speed Limit Sign (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Speed Limit Sign recognition on or off. For additional information, refer to “Traffic Sign Rec- ognition” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays available parking aids. Auto Show Sonar Allows user to auto display the sonar. For additional information, refer to “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Rear Allows user to turn the rear sonar on or off. Distance Allows user to set the distance sensor range to Long/Medium/Short. Volume Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Medium/Low. Rear Cross Traffic Alert Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Driver Attention Alert Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Timer Alert (if so equipped) Allows user to set the timer alert. Low Temperature Alert (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off. Chassis Control Displays available chassis control options. Active Trace Control Allows user to turn the Intelligent Trace Control system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. TPMS Setting The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display. Menu item Result TPMS Setting Displays available TPMS settings. Tire Pressure Unit Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.

Instruments and controls 2-23 Clock

Menu item Result Clock Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include automatically setting the time, 12H/24H format, Daylight Saving Time, time zone, and manually setting the time. The clock can also be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. Vehicle Settings The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings. Menu item Result Lighting Displays the available lighting options. Welcome Headlight (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off. Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Accent Lighting (if so equipped) Allows user to adjust the accent lighting brightness. Auto Headlight or Light Sensitivity (if so Allows user to change when the auto headlights activate based on the exterior brightness. equipped) Light Off Delay (if so equipped) Allows user to change the length of time the exterior lights remain on. Turn indicator Displays the available turn indicator options. 3 Flashes (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off. Continuous (if so equipped) Allows user to adjust the continuous feature. Locking Displays the available locking options. Ext Door Switch Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.

2-24 Instruments and controls Menu item Result Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. Auto Door Unlock Displays the auto door unlock options. Shift to P Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). IGN OFF Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off. OFF Doors will have to be manually unlocked. Horn beeps on lock Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Wipers Displays the available wiper options. Speed Dependent Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off. Driving Position (if so equipped) Displays the available driving position options. Exit Seat Slide Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat backward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set position. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Battery Saver (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the battery saver on or off. When turned on, the battery saver automatically turns off the ignition after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ON position. Rear Door Alert Displays the available rear door alert options. For additional information, refer to “Rear Door Alert” in this section. Horn & Alert When selected, the alert is displayed and horn sounds. Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed. OFF When selected, no alert or horn will be active. Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely. For additional information, refer to “Remote Engine Start” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-25 Maintenance WARNING The maintenance menu allows the user to The tire replacement indicator is not a set reminders for various vehicle mainte- substitute for regular tire checks, in- nance items. cluding tire pressure checks. For additional information, refer to “Changing wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Menu item Result Maintenance Displays various maintenance reminder options. Oil Control System Allows user to reset the current interval. This should only be done after completing oil change maintenance. Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

2-26 Instruments and controls Customize Display The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display. Menu item Result Main Menu Selection Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. Home (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Blank (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the blank on or off in the vehicle information display. Audio (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the audio controls screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Fuel Economy (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Chassis Control (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the chassis control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Cruise (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the cruise control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Speed Limit Sign (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the speed limit sign screen on or off in the vehicle information display. TPMS (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the TPMS screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Variable Compression Turbo (if so Allows user to turn the Variable Compression Turbo screen on or off in the vehicle information display. equipped) Speed (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the speedometer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Drive Computer (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Auto Turn Notification (if so equipped) Allow user to turn the auto turn notification alerts on or off. Cruise Screen Transition (if so equipped) Allow user to turn the cruise screen transition on or off. Welcome Effect (if so equipped) Displays the available welcome effect settings. Gauges Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off. Animation Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off. Light/Wiper Guidance (if so equipped) Displays the available light and wiper guidance settings. Lights mode guidance Allows user to turn the light mode guidance on or off. Wiper mode guidance Allows user to turn the wiper mode guidance on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-27 Unit/Language The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display. Menu item Result Mileage/Fuel Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display. Tire Pressure Allows user to select the tire pressure display units. Changing the tire pressure units will also change the units displayed for the Variable Compression Turbo (if so equipped). Temperature Allows user to select the temperature display units. Language Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display. Key-Linked Settings (if so equipped)

Menu item Result Key-Linked Settings Allows user to turn the Key-Linked Settings on or off. For additional information, refer to “Memory storage function (key-link)” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Factory Reset The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status. Menu item Result Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

2-28 Instruments and controls VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY Indicator Name Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator (if INDICATORS so equipped) Rear Automatic Braking This indicator shows when the BSW system Indicator Name (RAB) indicator (if so is engaged. equipped) Automatic Emergency For additional information, refer to “Blind Braking (AEB) emer- Steering Assist Alert (if Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting and gency warning indica- so equipped) driving” section of this manual. tor (if so equipped) Cruise control indicator (if so equipped) Steering Assist indica- Blind Spot Warning tor (if so equipped) This indicator shows the cruise control sys- (BSW) indicator (if so tem status. equipped) Transmission Shift po- When cruise control is activated, a green sition indicator Cruise control indicator circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The (if so equipped) Vehicle ahead detec- vehicle information display will also display tion indicator (if so the speed the cruise control was set at. If Drive sport mode indi- equipped) you accelerate past the set speed, the cator (if so equipped) speed will blink until you either cancel Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) cruise control or go back to the set speed. If Intelligent Lane Inter- emergency warning indicator (if so cruise control is on and canceled, the vention (I-LI) indicator (if equipped) speed will be displayed to show the speed so equipped) This indicator illuminates along, with an au- the vehicle will return to if the resume button is activated. dible warning, when the system detects Lane Departure Warn- the possibility of a forward collision. Drive sport mode indicator (if so ing indicator (if so equipped) equipped) For additional information, refer to “Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB)” in the A small “S” appears to the right of the Trans- “Starting and driving” section of this mission Shift Position indicator in the ve- manual. hicle information display when the drive sport mode is engaged. Instruments and controls 2-29 Activate the drive sport mode by pushing “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” in the “Start- Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so the switch on the shift lever while the shift ing and driving” section of this manual. equipped) lever is in the D (Drive) position. Steering Assist Alert (if so equipped) This indicator shows when the Automatic For additional information, refer to “Driving Emergency Braking (AEB) system is en- This message may appear when the Steer- the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec- gaged and has detected a vehicle. ing Assist system is engaged. tion of this manual. For additional information, refer to “Auto- It will be displayed under the following con- Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indi- matic Emergency Braking (AEB)” in the dition: cator (if so equipped) “Starting and driving” section of this ∙ When not holding the steering wheel or manual. This indicator shows when the I-LI system when there is no steering wheel opera- is engaged. tion For additional information, refer to “Intelli- Please hold on the steering wheel immedi- gent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting ately. When the steering operation is de- and driving” section of this manual. tected, the warning turns off and the steer- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator ing assist function is automatically (if so equipped) restored. This indicator shows when the LDW system Steering Assist indicator (if so is engaged. equipped) For additional information, refer to “Lane This indicator appears when the Steering Departure Warning (LDW)” and “Intelligent Assist system is engaged. Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. For additional information, refer to “ProPI- LOT Assist” in the “Starting and driving” sec- Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) indicator tion of this manual. (if so equipped) Transmission Shift Position indicator This indicator illuminates to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) This indicator shows the transmission shift system. For additional information, refer to position. 2-30 Instruments and controls LIC4031 Instruments and controls 2-31 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 19. Timer Alert – Have a break? 36. Check Back Seat For All Articles WARNINGS 20. Low Outside Temperature 37. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators (if so equipped) 1. No Key Detected 21. Power will turn off to save the battery 2. Key ID Incorrect 22. Power turned off to save the battery 38. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) indicators 3. Key Battery Low 23. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights (if so equipped) 4. Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual 24. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s 39. Speed Limit Sign indicator (if so Manual (if so equipped) 5. Key Registration Complete equipped) 25. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s 40. System Fault (if so equipped) 6. Shift to Park Manual (if so equipped) 7. Push ignition to OFF 41. Chassis Control System Error: See 26. Driver Attention Alert Malfunction Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) 8. Push brake and start switch to drive 27. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so 42. Not Available System Malfunction (if so equipped) 9. Engine start operation for Intelligent equipped) Key system (if I-Key battery level is low) 28. Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) 43. Not Available: Seat Belt Not Fastened (if 10. Release Parking Brake so equipped) 29. Unavailable: High Camera Temperature 11. Low Fuel (if so equipped) 44. Not Available: Front Radar Blocked (if so 12. Loose Fuel Cap equipped) 30. Driver Attention Alert— Take a Break? 13. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual 45. Currently not available (if so equipped) 31. Malfunction (if so equipped) 14. Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped) 46. Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if 32. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse so equipped) 15. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air 33. Not Available: Parking Brake On (if so 47. Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature (if 16. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual equipped) so equipped) 17. Door Open 34. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual 48. AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so 18. Trunk Open 35. Rear Door Alert is activated equipped) 2-32 Instruments and controls 49. AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so mation, refer to “Battery replacement” in If this warning illuminates, move the shift equipped) the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. lever to the P (Park) position and start the engine. 50. AWD Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual Manual (if so equipped) Push Ignition to OFF After the ignition switch is pushed to the No Key Detected ON position, this light comes on for a period After the Push Ignition to OFF warning illu- of time and then turns off. minates, the warning will illuminate if the This warning appears when the Intelligent ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni- The Key System Error message warns of a position when the shift lever is moved to tion switch in the ON position. Make sure malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys- the P (Park) position. the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. tem. If the light comes on while the engine For additional information, refer to “NISSAN is stopped, it may be impossible to start To turn off the Push warning, place the ig- Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks the engine. nition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position. and adjustments” section of this manual. If the light comes on while the engine is Key ID Incorrect running, you can drive the vehicle. However, Push brake and start switch to drive in these cases, have the system checked. It This warning appears when the ignition This indicator appears when the shift lever is recommended that you visit a NISSAN switch is placed from the OFF position and is in the P (Park) position. dealer for this service. the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the This indicator also appears when the ve- system. You cannot start the engine with Key Registration Complete an unregistered key. hicle has been started using the Remote This appears when a new Intelligent Key is Engine Start (if so equipped) function. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN registered to the vehicle. Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks This indicator means that the engine will and adjustments” section of this manual. Shift to Park start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start This warning illuminates when the ignition Key Battery Low the engine from any position of the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position switch. This indicator illuminates when the Intelli- and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) gent Key battery is running out of power. position. Also, a chime sounds when the If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat- ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF tery with a new one. For additional infor- position. Instruments and controls 2-33 Engine start operation for Intelligent Loose Fuel Cap nates and low tire pressure is detected. The Key system (if I-Key battery level is low) warning appears each time the ignition This warning appears when the fuel-filler switch is placed in the ON position as long This indicator appears when the battery of cap is not tightened correctly after the ve- as the low tire pressure warning light re- the Intelligent Key is low and when the In- hicle has been refueled. For additional in- mains illuminated. If this warning appears, telligent Key system and the vehicle are not formation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres- communicating normally. “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec- sures of all four tires to the recommended tion of this manual. If this appears, touch the ignition switch COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and with the Intelligent Key while depressing Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual Loading Information label. For additional the brake pedal. For additional information, information, refer to “Low tire pressure This warning appears in the message area refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis- warning light” in this section and “Tire Pres- of the vehicle information display if low oil charge” in the “Starting and driving” section sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the pressure is detected. This gauge is not de- of this manual. “Starting and driving” section of this signed to indicate low oil level. The low oil manual. Release Parking Brake pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual This warning illuminates in the message check the oil level. For additional informa- area of the vehicle information display This warning appears when there is an er- tion, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it- when the parking brake is set and the ve- ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes yourself” section of this manual. hicle is driven. on, have the system checked. It is recom- Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped) mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for Low Fuel This warning illuminates when the this service. This warning illuminates when the fuel level windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Door Open in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. soon as it is convenient, preferably before For additional information, refer to This warning illuminates when a door has the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it- been opened. will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank yourself” section of this manual. Trunk Open when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 Tire Pressure Low - Add Air (Empty). This warning illuminates when the trunk This warning appears when the low tire has been opened. pressure warning light in the meter illumi- 2-34 Instruments and controls Timer Alert — Have a break? Reminder: Turn OFF headlights Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) This indicator appears when the set time is This warning appears when the headlights reached. The time can be set up to six are left in the ON position when exiting the This warning appears when one or more of hours. For additional information, refer to vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the the following systems (if so equipped) is “Settings” in this section. OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor- not functioning properly: mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal Low Outside Temperature ∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) switch” in this section. This warning appears if the outside tem- ∙ Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) Headlight System Error: See Owner’s perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera- Manual (if so equipped) ∙ Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) ture can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, re- This warning illuminates when there is an If one or more of these warning appears, fer to “Settings” in this section. error with the system. For additional infor- have the system checked. It is recom- mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for Power will turn off to save the battery switch” in this section. this service. This message appears in the vehicle infor- Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction (if mation display after a period of time if the Manual (if so equipped) so equipped) ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For This warning illuminates when there is an This message appears when the Blind additional information, refer to “Push- error with the system. For additional infor- Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert button ignition switch positions” in the mation, refer to “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (RCTA) systems become unavailable be- “Starting and driving” section of this in the “Starting and driving” section of this cause a radar blockage is detected. For manual. manual. additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert Driver Attention Alert Malfunction Power turned off to save the battery (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section This message appears after the ignition This warning appears when the Intelligent of this manual. Driver Alertness (I-DA) system is not func- switch is automatically turned off. For addi- Unavailable: High Camera Temperature tioning properly. For additional information, tional information, refer to “Push-button ig- (if so equipped) refer to “Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)” in nition switch positions” in the “Starting and the “Starting and driving” section of this This message appears when the camera driving” section of this manual. manual. detects an interior temperature of more Instruments and controls 2-35 than 104°F (40°C). For additional informa- Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse ing comes on, have the system checked. It tion, refer to “Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)” is recommended that you visit a NISSAN This warning may appear if the extended in the “Starting and driving” section of this dealer for this service. storage switch is not pushed in. When this manual. warning appears, push in the extended Rear Door Alert is activated Driver Attention Alert— Take a Break? storage switch to turn off the warning. For When the system is enabled, this message additional information, refer to “Extended This alert appears when the system has appears when the Rear Door Alert system storage switch” in this section. detected that the driver may be displaying is active and can remind the driver to check fatigue or a lack of attention. Not Available Parking Brake On (if so the back seat. equipped) Malfunction (if so equipped) ∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver This message may appear when the Intel- can select “Dismiss Message” to clear This warning appears when one or more of ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with the display for a period of time. If no the following systems (if so equipped) is ProPILOT Assist) is engaged. selection is made, this message auto- not functioning properly: matically turns off after a period of time. Under the following condition, the ICC (for ∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) system is au- ∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver ∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) tomatically canceled: can select “Disable Alert” to disable the with Pedestrian Detection horn alert for the remainder of the cur- ∙ The electronic parking brake is applied. rent trip. If one or more of these warning appears, The above system cannot be used when have the system checked. It is recom- the electronic parking is activated. WARNING mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a this service. For additional information, refer to "Intelli- gent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with stop within a trip temporarily dismisses For additional information, refer to “Auto- ProPILOT Assist)” and “Parking brake” in the the message for that stop without turn- matic Emergency Braking (AEB)” or “Auto- “Starting and driving” section of this ing the system off. Alerts can be pro- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- manual. vided for other stops during the trip. Se- destrian Detection” in the “Starting and lecting “Disable Alert” turns off the Rear CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual driving” section of this manual. Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be This warning illuminates when there is a provided. problem with the CVT system. If this warn- 2-36 Instruments and controls NOTE: Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indica- System Fault (if so equipped) tors (if so equipped) This system is disabled until a driver en- This warning appears if there is a malfunc- ables it using the vehicle information These indicators show the Intelligent tion in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) display. For additional information, refer Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The sta- system. For additional information, refer to to “How to use the vehicle information tus is shown by color. For additional infor- “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” in the “Start- display” in this section. mation, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control ing and driving” section of this manual. (ICC)” in the “Starting and driving” section of For additional information, refer to “Rear Chassis Control System Error: See Own- this manual. Door Alert” in this section. er’s Manual (if so equipped) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for ve- Check Back Seat For All Articles This warning appears if there is an error in hicles with ProPILOT Assist) indicators the Automatic Brake Hold system. Have the When the system is enabled, this message (if so equipped) system checked. It is recommended that appears when the vehicle comes to a com- These indicators show the ProPILOT Assist you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from with Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system additional information, refer to “Chassis the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, control” or “Automatic brake hold” in the status. The status is shown by color. For and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes- “Starting and driving” section of this additional information, refer to “Intelligent sage alerts the driver, after a period of time, manual. Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPI- to check for items in the rear seat after the LOT Assist)” in the “Starting and driving” Not Available System Malfunction (if so audible alert has been provided. section of this manual. equipped) NOTE: Speed Limit Sign indicator (if so This warning appears when one or more of equipped) the following systems (if so equipped) is This system is disabled until a driver en- not functioning properly. ables it using the vehicle information This message may appear when the Traffic display. For additional information, refer Sign Recognition system is engaged. ∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) to “How to use the vehicle information ∙ ProPILOT display” in this section. For additional information, refer to “Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)” in the “Starting and ∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW) For additional information, refer to “Rear driving” section of this manual. Door Alert” in this section. ∙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ∙ Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) Instruments and controls 2-37 If one or more of these warnings appear, the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) The above system cannot be used in some have the system checked. It is recom- with Pedestrian Detection system, or the situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I- VDC system is off.) this service. FCW) system becomes unavailable be- Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if cause the front radar is obstructed. For ad- For additional information, refer to "Intelli- so equipped) ditional information, refer to “Intelligent gent Cruise Control (ICC)” , “ProPILOT Assist” Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles without This message may appear when the Intel- , “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” , “Lane Depar- ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT ture Warning (LDW)” or “Intelligent Lane In- ProPILOT Assist)” , “Intelligent Cruise Control Assist) system , the ICC system or the Intel- tervention (I-LI))” in the “Starting and driving” (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist)” , ligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is en- section of this manual. “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” , “Au- tomatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- gaged. Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened (if destrian Detection” or “Intelligent Forward Under the following conditions, the ICC so equipped) Collision Warning (I-FCW)” in the “Starting (with ProPILOT Assist) , the ICC system or This message may appear when the Intel- and driving” section of this manual. the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) sys- ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Currently not available (if so equipped) tem is automatically canceled: Assist) system is engaged. ∙ When the VDC operates This message may appear when the Intel- Under the following condition, the ICC (with ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT ∙ When a wheel slips ProPILOT Assist) system is automatically Assist) system , the ICC system or the Intel- canceled: The above system cannot be used in some ligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is en- situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.) ∙ When the driver’s seat belt is not fas- gaged. tened Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature (if Under the following conditions, the ICC so equipped) The above system cannot be used when (with ProPILOT Assist) , the ICC system or the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) sys- This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more Not Available: Front Radar Blocked (if so tem is automatically canceled: than approximately 104°F (40°C). For addi- equipped) ∙ When the VDC operates tional information, refer to “Lane Departure This message appears when the Intelligent Warning (LDW)” and “Intelligent Lane Inter- ∙ When a wheel slips Cruise Control (ICC) systems, the Auto- vention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” matic Emergency Braking (AEB) system, ∙ When the VDC system is turned off section of this manual. 2-38 Instruments and controls SECURITY SYSTEMS

AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo- equipped) nents in all situations. Always secure your This warning appears when the all-wheel vehicle even if parking for a brief period. drive system is not functioning properly Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and while the engine is running. always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. equipped) Many devices offering additional protec- This warning may appear while trying to tion, such as component locks, identifica- free a stuck vehicle due to increased oil tion markers, and tracking systems, are temperature. The driving mode may available at auto supply stores and spe- change to 2-Wheel Drive (2WD). If this warn- cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer ing is displayed, stop the vehicle with the such equipment. Check with your insur- engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. LIC0301 ance company to see if you may be eligible Then if the warning turns off, you can con- for discounts for various theft protection tinue driving. Your vehicle may have two types of security features. systems: AWD Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s How to arm the vehicle security Manual (if so equipped) ∙ Vehicle security system system This warning may appear if there is a large ∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System difference between the diameters of the 1. Close all windows and the moonroof. front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The system can be armed even if the windows and moonroof are open. safe area, with the engine idling. Check that The vehicle security system provides visual all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire and audible alarm signals if someone 2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the ve- pressure is correct and that the tires are opens the doors or trunk when the system hicle. not excessively worn. is armed. It is not, however, a motion detec- 3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all tion type system that activates when a ve- doors. The doors can be locked with hicle is moved or when a vibration occurs. the Intelligent Key, door handle request The system helps deter vehicle theft but switch, power door lock switch or me- cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the chanical key (if so equipped). Instruments and controls 2-39 4. Confirm that the indicator light Vehicle security system activation NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER comes on. The indicator stays il- The vehicle security system will give the SYSTEM luminated for a period of time indicat- following alarm: The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ing that the system is in the pre-armed ∙ The headlights blink and the horn will not allow the engine to start without phase. sounds intermittently. the use of a registered key. The indicator light will blink every 3 seconds once the security system is ∙ The alarm automatically turns off after If the engine fails to start using a registered armed. a period of time. However, the alarm key (for example, when interference is If during the pre-armed phase one of reactivates if the vehicle is tampered caused by another registered key, an auto- the following occurs, the system will with again. The alarm can be shut off by mated toll road device or automatic pay- not arm: unlocking the driver’s door or trunk lid ment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures: with the key, or by pressing the ∙ Any door is unlocked with the me- button on the Intelligent Key. chanical key (if so equipped), Intelli- 1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the gent Key or door request switch. The alarm is activated by: ON position for approximately 5 seconds. ∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ∙ opening the door or trunk lid without AUTO ACC or ON position. using the key or Intelligent Key (even if 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or the door is unlocked by releasing the LOCK position, and wait approximately ∙ Even when the driver and/or passen- door inside lock switch). 10 seconds. gers are in the vehicle, the system will activate when all the doors, hood and How to stop an activated alarm 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2. trunk are locked with the ignition The alarm stops only by unlocking a door 4. Restart the engine while holding the switch placed in the LOCK position. or the trunk with the mechanical key (if so device (which may have caused the in- When placing the ignition switch in equipped), pressing the button on terference) separate from the regis- the AUTO new ACC or ON position, the the Intelligent Key, or pushing the request tered key. system will be released. switch on the driver’s or passenger’s door If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN with the Intelligent Key in range of the door recommends placing the registered key on handle. a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

2-40 Instruments and controls FCC Notice: If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for the For USA: NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as This device complies with part 15 of the soon as possible. Please bring all regis- FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- tered keys that you have. It is recom- lowing two conditions: (1) This device mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer may not cause harmful interference, and for this service. (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s author- LIC0474 ity to operate the equipment. Security indicator light For Canada: The security indicator light blinks whenever This device complies with Industry the ignition switch is placed in the OFF, Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). LOCK or AUTO ACC position. Operation is subject to the following two This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle conditions: (1) this device may not cause Immobilizer System is operational. interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer- If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is ence that may cause undesired opera- malfunctioning, the light will remain on tion of the device. while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Instruments and controls 2-41 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

CAUTION NOTE: ∙ Do not operate the washer continu- If the windshield wiper operation is in- ously for more than 30 seconds. terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this ∙ Do not operate the washer if the occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF windshield-washer fluid reservoir is position and remove the snow or ice that empty. is on and around the wiper arms. In ap- ∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on reservoir with windshield-washer again to operate the wiper. fluid concentrates at full strength. The windshield wiper and washer operates Some methyl alcohol based when the ignition switch is placed in the ON windshield-washer fluid concen- position. trates may permanently stain the Push the lever down to operate the wiper LIC2661 grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. at the following speed: SWITCH OPERATION ∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con- ᭺1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob WARNING centrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before toward ᭺A (slower) or᭺B (faster). In freezing temperatures the washer pouring the fluid into the windshield- ᭺2 Low — continuous low speed opera- solution may freeze on the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the tion and obscure your vision which may lead windshield-washer fluid reservoir to to an accident. Warm the windshield mix the windshield-washer fluid con- ᭺3 High — continuous high speed opera- with the defroster before you wash the centrate and water. tion windshield. Push the lever up ᭺4 to have one sweep operation (MIST) of the wiper. Pull the lever toward you ᭺5 to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

2-42 Instruments and controls REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL MIRROR (if so equipped) SWITCH DEFROSTER SWITCH NOTE: The top and bottom few rows of wires on the rear window are not part of the rear window defroster system. These wires make up the antenna for the audio system.

LIC4039 LIC2634 To defrost the rear window glass and out- Type A (if so equipped) side mirrors (if so equipped), place the igni- HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH tion switch in the ON position and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear Lighting window defroster indicator light on the ᭺1 Rotate the switch to the position, switch comes on. Push the switch again to and the front parking, tail, license plate, turn the defroster off. and instrument panel lights will come The rear window defroster automatically on. The will illuminate in the me- turns off after approximately 15 minutes. ter.

CAUTION ᭺2 Rotate the switch to the position, and the headlights will come on and all When cleaning the inner side of the rear the other lights remain on. window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

Instruments and controls 2-43 NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section. To turn on the autolight system: 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position ᭺1 . 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. LIC2635 LIC2636 Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the Type B (if so equipped) Autolight system (if so equipped) OFF position and a door is opened and left CAUTION The autolight system allows the headlights open, the headlights remain on for a period to turn on and off automatically. The auto- of time. If another door is opened while the Use the headlights with the engine run- headlights are on, then the timer is reset. ning to avoid discharging the vehicle light system can: battery. ∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking, To turn the autolight system off, turn the tail, license plate and instrument panel switch to the OFF, ,or position. lights automatically when it is dark. ∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light. ∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

2-44 Instruments and controls High Beam Assist (if so equipped) The High Beam Assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automatically.

WARNING ∙ The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for LIC3051 LIC2637 safe driving operation. The driver Be sure you do not put anything on top Headlight beam select should remain alert at all times, en- of the autolight sensor located in the top sure safe driving practices and switch side ᭺1 of the instrument panel. The au- ᭺1 To select the high beam function, push the high beams and low beam manu- tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it the lever forward. The high beam lights ally when necessary. is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as come on and the light illumi- ∙ The high beam or low beam may not if it is dark out and the headlights will nates in the meter. switch automatically under the fol- illuminate. If this occurs while parked ᭺2 Pull the lever back to select the low lowing conditions. Switch the high with the engine off and the ignition beam. beam and low beam manually. switch placed in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could become dis- ᭺3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes – During bad weather (rain, fog, charged. the headlight high beams on and off. snow, wind, etc.). – When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-45 – When the headlights of the on- ∙ The timing of switching the low beam coming vehicle or the leading ve- and high beam may change under the hicle are turned off, when the color following situations. of the light is affected due to for- – The brightness of the headlights of eign materials on the lights, or the oncoming vehicle or leading when the light beam is out of vehicle. position. – The movement and direction of – When there is a sudden, continu- the oncoming vehicle and the lead- ous change in brightness. ing vehicle. – When driving on a road that passes – When only one light on the oncom- over rolling hills, or a road that has ing vehicle or the leading vehicle is level differences. illuminated. – When driving on a road with many – When the oncoming vehicle or the LIC3696 curves. leading vehicle is a two-wheeled High Beam Assist operation – When a sign or mirror-like surface vehicle. is reflecting intense light towards To activate the High Beam Assist system, – Road conditions (incline, curve, the the front of the vehicle. turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po- road surface, etc.). sition ᭺1 and push the lever forward ᭺2 – When the container, etc. being – The number of passengers and the towed by a leading vehicle is re- (high beam position). The High Beam amount of luggage. flecting intense light. Assist indicator light in the meter will illuminate while the headlights are turned on. – When a headlight on your vehicle is If the High Beam Assist indicator light does damaged or dirty. not illuminate in the above condition, it may – When the vehicle is leaning at an indicate that the system is not functioning angle due to a punctured tire, be- properly. Have the system checked, it is ing towed, etc. recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-46 Instruments and controls When the vehicle speed lowers to less than ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the head- around the ambient image sensor. Do light uses the low beam. not touch the sensor lens that is lo- To turn off the High Beam Assist system, cated on the ambient image sensor. turn the headlight switch to the posi- If the ambient image sensor is damaged tion or select the low beam position by due to an accident, it is recommended that placing the lever in the neutral position. you visit a NISSAN dealer. Battery saver system (if so equipped) If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the or position, the headlights LSD2712 will turn off after a period of time. Ambient image sensor maintenance NOTE: The ambient image sensor ᭺1 for the High Beam Assist system is located in front of The Battery Saver system may be dis- the inside mirror. To maintain the proper abled. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this operation of the high beam assist system section. and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: CAUTION ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. Even though the battery saver feature ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans- automatically turns off the headlights parent material) or install an accessory after a period of time, you should turn near the ambient image sensor. the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Instruments and controls 2-47 DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS WARNING SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped) (DRL) SYSTEM (Type B) (if so When the LED DRL system is active, tail The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) auto- equipped) lights on your vehicle are not on. It is matically illuminate when the engine is necessary at dusk to turn on your head- started with the parking brake released. The LED DRL automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when the engine is started lights. Failure to do so could cause an The DRL operate with the headlight switch accident injuring yourself and others. in the OFF position. Turn the headlight and the parking brake released. The LED switch to the position for full illumina- Daytime Running Lights (DRL) operate with tion when driving at night. (The DRL will turn the headlight switch in the OFF position. off.) When you turn the headlight switch to If the parking brake is applied before the the position for full illumination, the engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate. LED lights switch from LED DRL to the park The DRL illuminate once the parking brake function. is released. The DRL will remain on until the If the parking brake is applied before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi- It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight nate. The LED DRL illuminate when the switch ON for interior controls and parking brake is released. The LED DRL will switches to illuminate, as those remain remain on until the ignition switch is placed OFF while the switch is in the OFF position. in the OFF position. It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight WARNING switch ON for interior controls and When the DRL system is active, tail switches to illuminate, as those remain lights on your vehicle are not on. It is OFF while the switch is in the OFF position. necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

2-48 Instruments and controls Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times. Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.

NOTE: The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to “Ve- hicle information display” in this section. LIC3176 LIC2638 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS TURN SIGNAL SWITCH CONTROL Turn signal Press the “+” button to increase the brightness of instrument panel lights. ᭺1 Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is Press the “-” button to decrease the bright- completed, the turn signal cancels au- ness of instrument panel lights. tomatically. Lane change signal ᭺2 Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

Instruments and controls 2-49 HORN

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

LIC2639 LIC3568 FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so To sound the horn, push near the horn icon equipped) on the steering wheel. To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight WARNING switch to the position, then turn the Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so fog light switch to the position. could affect proper operation of the To turn the fog lights on with the headlight supplemental front air bag system. switch in the AUTO position, the headlights Tampering with the supplemental front must be on, then turn the fog light switch to air bag system may result in serious the position. personal injury. To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

2-50 Instruments and controls HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

CAUTION The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. ∙ The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po- not running. sition. ∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex- 2. Push the switch until either two lights tended periods or when no one is us- are illuminated for high setting, or one ing the seat. light is illuminated for low setting. ∙ Do not put anything on the seat which The heater is controlled by a thermo- insulates heat, such as a blanket, stat, automatically turning the heater cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, on and off. The indicator light will re- the seat may become overheated. main on as long as the switch is on. ∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy 3. When the seat is warmed or before you LIC3973 on the seat or pierce it with a pin or leave the vehicle, be sure to push the similar object. This may result in dam- switch to turn it off. WARNING age to the heater. Do not use or allow occupants to use ∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat the seat heater if you or the occupants should be removed immediately with cannot monitor elevated seat tempera- a dry cloth. tures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of ∙ When cleaning the seat, never use the seat heater by such people could gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any result in serious injury. similar materials. ∙ If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-51 HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if STEERING ASSIST SWITCH (for so equipped) vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off.

NOTE: ∙ Once activated, your heated steering wheel will automatically turn on and off to maintain a temperature above 68°F (20°C). ∙ When the temperature of the steering wheel is above 122°F (50°C) and the heated steering wheel switch is turned on, the system will not heat LIC4030 the steering wheel. This does not in- LIC4101 dicate a malfunction. The heated steering wheel system is de- The Steering Assist switch is used to en- signed to operate only when the surface able and disable the Steering Assist sys- temperature of the steering wheel is below tem that is activated using the settings 68°F (20°C). menu of the vehicle information display. Push the heated steering wheel switch to The Steering Assist system controls the warm the steering wheel after the ignition steering system, when ProPILOT Assist is switch is placed in the ON position. The engaged, to help keep your vehicle near indicator light will come on. the center of the lane when driving. For additional information, refer to ”ProPILOT If the surface temperature of the steering Assist” and “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I- wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of heat the steering wheel and cycle off and this manual. on to maintain a temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on. 2-52 Instruments and controls E-CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so REAR DOOR ALERT equipped)

The Rear Door Alert system functions under certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle. The Rear Door Alert system is initially disabled. The driver can enable the system using the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in this section. When the system is enabled:

LIC4036 LIC4069 ∙ The system is activated when a rear The E-call (SOS) button is used in combina- door is opened and closed approxi- tion with a NissanConnect® Services sub- mately 10 minutes before the vehicle is scription to call for assistance in case of an started. When the vehicle is started and emergency. the system is activated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information The E-call button is under a cover. Press the display. For additional information, refer cover once. The cover will drop down, ex- posing the E-call button. to “Rear Door Alert is activated” in this section. Pressing the button will (with a paid subscription) reach a response specialist that ∙ If a rear door is opened and closed but will provide assistance based on the situa- the vehicle is not started within approxi- tion described by the vehicle’s occupant. For mately 10 minutes, the system will not additional information, or to enroll your ve- be activated. A rear door must be hicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/connect opened and closed and the car started or call 855–426–6628. within 10 minutes for the system to activate. Instruments and controls 2-53 When the Rear Door Alert system is acti- NOTE: NOTE: vated: If “Alert Only” setting is selected, the There may be times when the horn ∙ When the driver puts the vehicle in the P message alert will still be shown in the sounds but there are no objects or pas- (Park) position, a notification message vehicle information display but the horn sengers in the rear seat(s). appears in the vehicle information dis- will not sound. For additional information, refer to “Rear play with the options to “Dismiss Mes- Door Alert is activated” in this section. sage” or “Disable Alert” if desired. WARNING ∙ Select “Disable Alert” to temporarily ∙ If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, no disable for that stop. audible alert will be provided regardless of rear door open/close status. ∙ No selection or ‘Dismiss Message” will keep the alert enabled for that stop. ∙ There may be times when there is an object or passenger in the rear seat(s) ∙ If the alert is enabled when a driver exits but the audible alert does not sound. the vehicle, a message will appear in the For example, this may occur if the en- vehicle information display that states gine is turned off and then on again in “Check Back Seat for All Articles.” a short period of time during a trip, or if rear seat passengers enter or exit If “Horn & Alert” setting is selected: the vehicle during a trip. ∙ An audible horn sound will occur af- ∙ The system does not directly detect ter a short time unless a rear door is objects or passengers in the rear opened and closed within a short seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a time to deactivate the alert. rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in ∙ If the doors are locked before the the rear seat(s). alert is deactivated by opening a rear door, the horn will sound. ∙ If the trunk is opened before a rear door is opened, the horn will be delayed until after the trunk is closed. 2-54 Instruments and controls POWER OUTLET EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

∙ Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. ∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. ∙ Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. ∙ Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the ve- LIC3345 hicle battery. LIC4040 Instrument Panel ∙ Avoid using power outlets when the The power outlet is for powering electrical air conditioner, headlights, or rear accessories such as cellular telephones. It window defroster is on. is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. ∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a The power outlet is powered only when the plug, be sure the electrical accessory ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or ON being used is turned OFF. position. ∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug CAUTION may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open. ∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. ∙ When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

Instruments and controls 2-55 STORAGE

LIC3266 LIC3268 LIC4088 Pulled position Pushed position FRONT-DOOR POCKETS The extended storage switch is used when shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse panel to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.

2-56 Instruments and controls ∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/head rest. ∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/head rest or in the seatback pocket.

LIC1328 LIC2300 SEATBACK POCKETS GLOVE BOX The seatback pockets may be located on Open the glove box by pulling the handle. the back of the driver’s and/or passenger’s Use the master key when locking ᭺1 or seats. The pockets can be used to store unlocking ᭺2 the glove box. maps. WARNING WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving To ensure proper operation of the front to help prevent injury in an accident or a passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag sudden stop. System (if so equipped), please observe the following items:

Instruments and controls 2-57 CAUTION ∙ Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. ∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

LIC4091 LIC4034 CONSOLE BOX OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES To open the console box, press in on the STORAGE lever ᭺1 and raise the lid ᭺2 . To open the sunglasses holder, push and To close, push the lid down until the lock release. latches. Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s view and to help prevent an accident.

2-58 Instruments and controls LIC4032 LIC2297 LIC4089 Front Rear Soft bottle holder (front) CUP HOLDERS CAUTION Soft bottle holder The rear center cup holders are located in Use only soft cups in the cup holder. CAUTION the rear fold-down armrest. Hard objects can injure you in an accident. ∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other WARNING objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people Avoid abrupt starting and braking during sudden braking or an accident. when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is ∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liq- hot, it can scald you or your passenger. uid containers.

Instruments and controls 2-59 WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING ∙ Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadver- LIC4090 tent door lock activation, do not leave LIC3238 Soft bottle holder (rear) children, people who require the as- 1. Window lock switch sistance of others or pets unattended 2. Power door lock switch in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem- 3. Front passenger side automatic perature inside a closed vehicle on a switch warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of 4. Right rear passenger side switch injury or death to people and pets. 5. Left rear passenger side switch 6. Driver’s side automatic switch The power windows operate when the ig- Driver’s side power window nition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s The driver’s side control panel is equipped or passenger’s door is opened during this with switches to open or close all of the period of time, the power to the windows is windows. canceled.

2-60 Instruments and controls To open a window, push the switch to the detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch to the detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached.

LIC2397 LIC2663 Front passenger’s power window Rear power window switch switch The rear power window switches open or The passenger’s window switch operates close only the corresponding windows. To only the corresponding passenger’s win- open the window, push the switch and hold dow. To open the window partially, push the it down ᭺1 . To close the window, pull the switch down lightly until the desired win- switch up ᭺2 . dow position is reached. To close the win- Locking passengers’ windows dow, pull the switch up until the desired window position is reached. When the window lock switch is depressed, only the driver’s side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

Instruments and controls 2-61 Auto-reverse function When power window switch does If the control unit detects something not operate caught in the window as it is closing, the If the power window automatic function window will be immediately lowered. (closing only) does not operate properly, The auto-reverse function can be acti- perform the following procedure to initial- vated when the window is closed by auto- ize the power window system: matic operation when the ignition switch is 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in 2. Open the window more than halfway the OFF position. by operating the power window switch. Depending on the environment or driv- 3. Pull the power window switch and hold ing conditions, the auto-reverse func- it to close the window, and then hold tion may be activated if an impact or the switch more than 3 seconds after LIC0410 load similar to something being caught the window is closed. Automatic operation in the window occurs. 4. Release the power window switch. Op- To fully open a window equipped with au- erate the window by the automatic WARNING tomatic operation, push the window function to confirm the initialization is switch down to the second detent and re- There are some small distances imme- complete. The power window auto- lease it; it need not be held. The window diately before the closed position which matically opens or closes depending on if the automatic down or up func- automatically opens all the way. To stop cannot be detected. Make sure that all tion is selected. the window, lift the switch up while the win- passengers have their hands, etc., in- dow is opening. side the vehicle before closing the 5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for window. other windows. To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the If the power window function does not op- second detent and release it; it need not be erate properly after performing the above held. The window automatically closes all procedure have the system checked and the way. To stop the window, push the repaired. It is recommended that you visit a switch down while the window is closing. NISSAN dealer for this service. 2-62 Instruments and controls MOONROOF (if so equipped)

way. To stop the roof, push the switch once If the moonroof does not operate properly more while it is opening or closing. after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle serviced. It is recom- Tilting the moonroof mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then this service. push the switch and release it; it need not Auto-reverse function (when be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch to the tilt down position ᭺1 . closing or tilting down the moonroof) Resetting the moonroof switch The auto-reverse function can be acti- If the moonroof does not operate properly, vated when the moonroof is closed or perform the following procedure to initial- tilted down by automatic operation when ize the moonroof operation system. the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- LIC2313 1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by sition or for a period of time after the igni- POWER MOONROOF repeatedly pushing the moonroof tion switch is placed in the OFF position. switch to the close position ᭺1 to tilt the The moonroof will only operate when the Depending on the environment or driv- ignition switch is placed in the ON position. moonroof up. ing conditions, the auto-reverse func- The power moonroof is operational for a 2. Push and hold the switch to the close tion may be activated if an impact or period of time, even if the ignition switch is position ᭺1 . load similar to something being caught placed in the AUTO ACC or OFF position. If in the moonroof occurs. the driver’s door or the front passenger’s 3. Release the moonroof switch after the door is opened during this period of time, moonroof moves slightly up and down. WARNING the power to the moonroof is canceled. 4. Push and hold the switch to the open There are some small distances imme- Sliding the moonroof position ᭺2 to fully tilt the moonroof diately before the closed position which down. cannot be detected. Make sure that all To fully open or close the moonroof, push passengers have their hands, etc., in- the switch to the open ᭺2 or close ᭺1 posi- 5. Check if the moonroof switch operates side the vehicle before closing the tion and release it; it need not be held. The normally. moonroof. roof will automatically open or close all the Instruments and controls 2-63 INTERIOR LIGHTS

When closing CAUTION If the control unit detects something ∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or caught in the moonroof as it moves to the sand from the moonroof before front, the moonroof will immediately open opening. backward. ∙ Do not place heavy objects on the When tilting down moonroof or surrounding area. If the control unit detects something Sunshade caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up. Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward. If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the If the moonroof does not close moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down Have your moonroof checked and re- LIC4033 switch within 5 seconds after it happens; paired. It is recommended that you visit a ᭺1 the moonroof will fully close gradually. NISSAN dealer for this service. The interior light can be turned ON re- Make sure nothing is caught in the moon- gardless of door position. The light will roof. go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- WARNING sition when any door is opened. ∙ In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. ∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.

2-64 Instruments and controls ᭺2 The interior lights can be set to operate when the doors are opened. To turn off the interior lights when a door is open, push the switch, the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or the driver’s door is closed and locked. The lights will also go off after a period of time when the doors are open.

NOTE: The step lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened LIC4035 LIC4041 regardless of the interior light switch po- MAP LIGHTS PERSONAL LIGHTS sition. These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while To turn the map lights on, push the To turn the rear personal lights on, push the doors are open to prevent the battery switches. To turn them off, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch from becoming discharged. switches again. again.

CAUTION CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could re- with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. sult in a discharged battery.

Instruments and controls 2-65 TRUNK LIGHT HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro- WARNING opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the vides a convenient way to consolidate the light goes off. functions of up to three individual hand- ∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal held transmitters into one built-in device. Transceiver with any garage door The light will go off after a period of time if opener that lacks safety stop and re- the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: verse features as required by federal switch is placed in the ON position. ∙ Will operate most radio frequency de- safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models For additional information, refer to “Exterior vices such as garage doors, gates, manufactured after April 1, 1982). A and interior lights” in the “Do-it-yourself” home and office lighting, entry door section of this manual. garage door opener which cannot de- locks and security systems. tect an object in the path of a closing ∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No garage door and then automatically separate batteries are required. If the stop and reverse, does not meet cur- vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis- rent federal safety standards. Using a connected, HomeLink® will retain all garage door opener without these programming. features increases the risk of serious injury or death. When the HomeLink® Universal Trans- ∙ During the programming procedure ceiver is programmed, retain the original your garage door or security gate will transmitter for future programming pro- open and close (if the transmitter is cedures (Example: new vehicle pur- within range). Make sure that people chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the or objects are clear of the garage door, programmed HomeLink® Universal gate, etc. that you are programming. Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” in this section.

2-66 Instruments and controls ∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. LIC2365 LIC4095 NOTE: 1. Position the end of your hand-held 2. Using both hands, simultaneously transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from press and hold the desired HomeLink® Place the ignition switch in the ON posi- the HomeLink® surface, keeping the button and hand-held transmitter but- tion (if so equipped) when programming HomeLink® indicator light ᭺1 in view. ton. DO NOT release until the HomeLink®. It is also recommended that HomeLink® indicator light ᭺1 flashes a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being pro- slowly and then rapidly. When the indi- grammed to HomeLink® for quicker pro- cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons gramming and accurate transmission of may be released. (The rapid flashing the radio frequency. indicates successful programming.)

Instruments and controls 2-67 NOTE: tenna wire is attached to the unit). If U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim- there is difficulty locating the button, eout” in the same manner. Some devices may require you to replace reference the garage door opener’s Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- manual. in “Programming HomeLink® for Cana- culties training a gate operator or garage dian customers and gate openers” in this 5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” door opener by using the “Training” proce- section. button. dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®” step 2 with the following: 3. Press and hold the programmed 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press HomeLink® button and observe the in- and hold the trained HomeLink® but- NOTE: dicator light. ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence up When programming a garage door ∙ If the indicator light ᭺1 is to three times to complete the training opener, etc., unplug the device during solid/continuous, programming is process. HomeLink® should now acti- the “cycling” process to prevent possible complete and your device should vate your rolling code equipped device. damage to the garage door opener com- activate when the HomeLink® button ponents. is pressed and released. 7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® 1. For additional information, refer to “Pro- ∙ If the indicator light ᭺1 blinks rapidly buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this for 2 seconds and then turns to a section. at: www.homelink.com or call solid/continuous light, continue 1-800-355-3515. 2. Using both hands, simultaneously with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code depress and hold the desired HomeLink® vice. A second person may make the PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR button and the hand-held transmitter following steps easier. Use a ladder or CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE button. During training, your hand-held other device. Do not stand on your transmitter may automatically stop vehicle to perform the next steps. OPENERS transmitting. Continue to press and 4. At the receiver located on the garage Canadian radio-frequency laws require hold the desired HomeLink® button door opener motor in the garage, lo- transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) cate the “learn” or “smart” button (the after several seconds of transmission – your hand-held transmitter every name and color of the button may vary which may not be long enough for 2 seconds until the frequency signal by manufacturer but it is usually lo- HomeLink® to pick up the signal during has been learned. The HomeLink® indicated near where the hanging an- training. Similar to this Canadian law, some cator light will flash slowly and then 2-68 Instruments and controls rapidly after several seconds upon PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED successful training. DO NOT release un- DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION til the HomeLink® indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indi- If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the The following procedure clears the pro- cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons hand-held transmitter information: grammed information from both buttons. may be released. The rapid flashing in- Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How- ∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter bat- dicates successful training. ever, individual buttons can be repro- teries with new batteries. Proceed with “Programming grammed. For additional information, refer HomeLink®” step 3 to complete. ∙ Position the hand-held transmitter with to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink® If the device was unplugged during the its battery area facing away from the button” in this section. programming procedure, remember HomeLink® surface. To clear all programming: to plug it back in when programming is ∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink® completed. 1. Press and hold the two outer and hand-held transmitter buttons HomeLink® buttons until the indicator without interruption. OPERATING THE HOMELINK® light begins to flash in approximately UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER ∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit- it is programmed, can be used to activate 2. Release both buttons. the programmed device. To operate, sim- ter in that position for up to 15 seconds. ply press and release the appropriate pro- If HomeLink® is not programmed within HomeLink® is now in the programming grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans- that time, try holding the transmitter in mode and can be programmed at any ceiver button. The amber indicator light will another position – keeping the indicator time beginning with “Programming illuminate while the signal is being trans- light in view at all times. HomeLink®” - Step 1. mitted. If you have any questions or are having For convenience, the hand-held transmit- difficulty programming your HomeLink® ter of the device may also be used at any buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: time. www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

Instruments and controls 2-69 REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN NOTE: HOMELINK® BUTTON If your vehicle is stolen, you should change Changes or modifications not expressly To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal the codes of any non-rolling code device approved by the party responsible for Transceiver button, complete the following: that has been programmed into compliance could void the user’s author- HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of ity to operate the equipment. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® each device or call the manufacturer or button. DO NOT release the button. For Canada: dealer of those devices for additional infor- This device complies with Industry 2. The indicator light will begin to flash mation. after 20 seconds. Without releasing the Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro- When your vehicle is recovered, you will Operation is subject to the following two gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1. need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni- conditions: (1) this device may not cause versal Transceiver with your new trans- interference, and (2) this device must ac- For questions or comments, contact mitter information. cept any interference, including interfer- HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or ence that may cause undesired opera- 1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico). FCC Notice: tion of the device. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but- For USA: ton has now been reprogrammed. The This device complies with Part 15 of the new device can be activated by pressing the HomeLink® button that was just pro- FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- grammed. This procedure will not affect lowing two conditions: (1) This device any other programmed HomeLink® but- may not cause interference, and (2) this tons. device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2-70 Instruments and controls MEMO

Instruments and controls 2-71 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys...... 3-2 Canceling a Remote Engine Start...... 3-22 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-2 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System notwork...... 3-23 keys...... 3-4 Hood ...... 3-24 Doors ...... 3-4 Trunk lid ...... 3-25 Locking with key...... 3-5 Opener operation ...... 3-25 Locking with inside lock knob...... 3-6 Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-26 Locking with power door lock switch ...... 3-6 Interior trunk access ...... 3-26 Automatic door locks (if so equipped) ...... 3-7 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-27 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 Opener operation ...... 3-27 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-7 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-27 Operating range...... 3-9 Steering wheel ...... 3-29 Door locks/unlocks precaution ...... 3-10 Tilt operation ...... 3-30 NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation...... 3-10 Telescopic operation ...... 3-30 How to use the remote keyless entry Sun visors ...... 3-30 function ...... 3-14 Vanity mirrors ...... 3-31 Warning signals ...... 3-18 Mirrors ...... 3-31 Troubleshooting guide ...... 3-18 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror Remote Engine Start ...... 3-21 (if so equipped) ...... 3-31 Remote Engine Start operating range ...... 3-21 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror Remote starting the vehicle ...... 3-22 (if so equipped) ...... 3-32 Extending engine run time ...... 3-22 Outside mirrors ...... 3-32 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .....3-33 Entry/exit function ...... 3-35 Memory storage function (key-link) ...... 3-34 System operation ...... 3-35 Memory storage function (switch) ...... 3-34 KEYS

duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.

CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the Intelli- LPD2874 LPD2875 gent Key: Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) ∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which 1. Intelligent Keys (two sets) with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN contains electrical components, to Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. 2. Mechanical key come into contact with water or salt 3. Key number plate (one plate) It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN water. This could affect the system NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® dealer for this service. Since the registra- function. tion process requires erasing all memory in Your vehicle can only be driven with the the Intelligent Key components when reg- ∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key. Intelligent Keys which are registered to istering new keys, be sure to take all Intelli- ∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com- gent Keys that you have to the NISSAN sharply against another object. ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer dealer. System components. ∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli- A key number plate is supplied with your gent Key. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. keys. Record the key number and keep it in As many as four Intelligent Keys can be a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the registered and used with one vehicle. The vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom- new keys must be registered prior to use mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for 3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent CAUTION Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- Always carry the mechanical key in- mediately wipe until it is completely stalled in the Intelligent Key slot. dry. ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an Valet hand-off extended period in an area where When you have to leave a key with a valet, temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep ∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with the mechanical key with you to protect a key holder that contains a magnet. your belongings. ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near To prevent the glove box from being equipment that produces a magnetic opened during valet hand-off, follow the field, such as a TV, audio equipment procedures below: and personal computers. SPA1951 1. Remove the mechanical key from the If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN Mechanical key Intelligent Key. recommends erasing the ID code of that 2. Lock the glove box with the mechani- The Intelligent Key contains the mechani- Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may cal key. prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli- cal key. gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor- 3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet To remove the mechanical key, release the mation regarding the erasing procedure, it and keep the mechanical key with you. lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. is recommended that you visit a NISSAN For additional information, refer to “Stor- dealer. To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it age” in the “Instruments and controls” sec- into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob tion of this manual. returns to the lock position. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors and glove box. For additional information, refer to “Doors” in this section and “Storage” in the “Instru- ments and controls” section of this manual. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 DOORS

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER given to the dealer at the time of registra- When the doors are locked using one of the SYSTEM KEYS tion will no longer be able to start your following methods, the doors cannot be vehicle. opened using the inside or outside door You can only drive your vehicle using the handles. The doors must be unlocked to Intelligent Keys which are registered to the CAUTION open the doors. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com- Do not allow the immobilizer system ponents in your vehicle. key, which contains an electrical tran- WARNING The mechanical key can be used for all the sponder, to come into contact with wa- ∙ Always have the doors locked while locks. ter or salt water. This could affect sys- driving. Along with the use of seat tem function. belts, this provides greater safety in Never leave the keys in the vehicle. the event of an accident by helping to Additional or replacement keys: prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep If you still have a key, the key number is not children and others from unintention- necessary when you need extra NISSAN ally opening the doors, and will help Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex- keep out intruders. isting key can be duplicated without know- ∙ Before opening any door, always look ing the key number. As many as four for and avoid oncoming traffic. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af- ter the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not 3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows and/or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others and/or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

LPD2919 LPD2928 Driver’s side Power (if so equipped) LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as lock or unlock all doors at the same time. shown. Turning the key toward the rear ᭺1 of the Manual vehicle locks all doors. To lock a door, turn the key toward the rear Turning the key one time toward the front of the vehicle ᭺1 . To unlock, turn the key ᭺2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From toward the front of the vehicle ᭺2 . that position, returning the key to neutral ᭺3 (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the front again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors ᭺4 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 Opening and closing windows (if so equipped) The driver’s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with automatic operation at the same time. ∙ To open the windows, turn the driver’s door key toward the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked. ∙ To close the windows, turn the driver’s door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked. LPD2862 LPD2309 Windows stop when the key cylinder is re- Inside lock Door lock switch leased. LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR To lock the door without the key, move the LOCK SWITCH inside lock knob to the lock position ᭺1 , To lock all the doors without a key, push the then close the door. door lock switch (driver’s or front passen- To unlock the door without the key, move ger’s side) to the lock position ᭺1 . When the inside lock knob to the unlock position locking the door this way, be certain not to ᭺2 . leave the key inside the vehicle. To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to the unlock position ᭺2 .

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Lockout protection WARNING With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect and any door open, all doors will unlock electric medical equipment. Those automatically and a chime will sound after who use a pacemaker should contact the door is closed. the electric medical equipment These functions help to prevent the Intelli- manufacturer for the possible influ- gent Key from being accidentally locked ences before use. inside the vehicle. ∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so The FAA advises the radio waves may equipped) affect aircraft navigation and com- ∙ All doors lock automatically when the munication systems. Do not operate vehicle speed reaches 15 mph the Intelligent Key while on an air- LPD2863 (24 km/h). plane. Make sure the buttons are not CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK operated unintentionally when the ∙ All doors unlock automatically when the unit is stored for a flight. transmission is placed in the P (Park) Child safety locks help prevent the rear position or when the ignition switch is doors from being opened accidentally, es- The Intelligent Key can operate all the door placed in the OFF position. pecially when small children are in the ve- locks using the remote control function or hicle. pushing the request switch on the vehicle NOTE: without taking the key out from a pocket or The child safety lock levers are located on purse. The operating environment and/or The automatic door unlock function can the edge of the rear doors. be changed using the “Vehicle Settings” conditions may affect the Intelligent Key When the lever is in the unlock position ᭺2 , of the vehicle information display. For operation. the door can be opened from the outside additional information, refer to “Vehicle or the inside. Be sure to read the following before using information display” in the “Instruments the Intelligent Key. and controls” section of this manual. When the lever is in the LOCK position ᭺1 , the door can be opened only from the outside.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 CAUTION ∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park- additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom- ing meter. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. ∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key In such cases, correct the operating condi- with you when operating the vehicle. CAUTION tions before using the Intelligent Key func- ∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the tion or use the mechanical key. Listed below are conditions or occur- vehicle when you leave the vehicle. rences which will damage the Intelli- Although the life of the battery varies de- gent Key: The Intelligent Key is always communicat- pending on the operating conditions, the ing with the vehicle as it receives radio battery’s life is approximately two years. If ∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak the battery is discharged, replace it with a contains electrical components, to radio waves. Environmental conditions new one. come into contact with water or salt may interfere with the operation of the In- water. This could affect the system telligent Key under the following operating When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an function. indicator illuminates in the vehicle informa- conditions: tion display. For additional information, re- ∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key. ∙ When operating near a location where fer to “Vehicle information display” in the ∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key strong radio waves are transmitted, “Instruments and controls” section of this sharply against another object. manual. such as a TV tower, power station and ∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli- broadcasting station. Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re- gent Key. ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near ∙ When in possession of wireless equip- ∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent equipment which transmits strong radio ment, such as a cellular telephone, Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- waves, such as signals from a TV and per- transceiver or a CB radio. mediately wipe until it is completely sonal computer, the battery life may be- dry. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact come shorter. with or covered by metallic materials. ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an For additional information, refer to “Battery extended period in an area where ∙ When any type of radio wave remote replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). control is used nearby. of this manual. ∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near As many as four Intelligent Keys can be a key holder that contains a magnet. an electric appliance such as a personal registered and used with one vehicle. For computer. information about the purchase and use of 3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- equipment that produces a magnetic charged or strong radio waves are present field, such as a TV, audio equipment near the operating location, the Intelligent and personal computers. Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN function properly. recommends erasing the ID code of that The operating range is within 31.50 in Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may (80 cm) from each request switch ᭺1 . prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli- gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor- If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door mation regarding the erasing procedure, it glass, handle or rear bumper, the request is recommended that you visit a NISSAN switches may not function. dealer. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelli- gent Key, to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2864 OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch ᭺1 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 ∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors. ∙ Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

LPD2554 LPD2865 DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® PRECAUTION OPERATION ∙ Do not push the door handle request You can lock or unlock the doors without switch with the Intelligent Key held in taking the key out of your pocket or bag. your hand as illustrated. The close dis- When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, tance to the door handle will cause the you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing Intelligent Key system to have difficulty the door handle request switch within the recognizing that the Intelligent Key is range of operation. outside the vehicle. ∙ After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while any door is open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open. ∙ Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.

CAUTION ∙ After locking the doors using the re- LPD2887 LPD2165 quest switch, make sure that the Locking doors NOTE: doors have been securely locked by operating the door handle or the ∙ Request switches for all doors and 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- trunk opener switch. tion, place the ignition switch in the trunk can be deactivated when the “Ext. LOCK position and make sure you carry Door Switch” setting is switched to OFF ∙ When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the the Intelligent Key with you. in the vehicle settings of the vehicle information display. For additional infor- Intelligent Key in your possession be- 2. Close all doors. mation, refer to “Vehicle information fore operating the request switch to display” in the “Instruments and con- prevent the Intelligent Key from being 3. Push any door handle request switch left in the vehicle. ᭺1 while carrying the Intelligent Key trols” section of this manual. ∙ The request switch is operational only with you. ∙ Doors lock with the door handle re- when the Intelligent Key has been de- 4. All doors and the trunk will lock. quest switch while the ignition switch is tected by the Intelligent Key system. not in the LOCK position. 5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside chime sounds twice.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 Lockout protection ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in- To prevent the Intelligent Key from being side the door pockets. accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on protection is equipped with the Intelligent or under the spare tire area. Key. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in- When the driver’s side door is open, the side or near metallic materials. doors are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; the lock will automatically unlock and the door chime sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli- LPD2887 gent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the Unlocking doors door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, 1. Carry the Intelligent Key. pocket or your other hand. 2. Push the door handle request switch CAUTION ᭺1 . The lockout protection may not func- 3. The hazard warning lights flash once tion under the following conditions: and the outside chime sounds once. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on 4. Push the door handle request switch top of the instrument panel. ᭺1 again within 60 seconds to unlock all doors and trunk. The outside chime ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on sounds again. top of the rear parcel shelf. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin. 3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pushing the request switch: ∙ Opening any door. ∙ Pushing the ignition switch. The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light is switched ON when the door opens. The interior light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following LPD2165 operations: LPD2866 If a door handle is pulled while unlocking ∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po- Opening the trunk lid the doors, that door may not be unlocked. sition. Returning the door handle to its original To open the trunk lid, perform the following: ∙ Locking the doors with the remote con- position will unlock the door. If the door 1. Push the trunk opener switch ᭺A for does not unlock after returning the door trol. more than 1 second while carrying the handle, push the door handle request ∙ Switching the room light switch to the Intelligent Key with you. switch to unlock the door. OFF position. 2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound four times. 3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 Lockout protection CAUTION To prevent the Intelligent Key from being When locking the doors using the Intel- accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in protection is equipped with the Intelligent the vehicle. Key. When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will open. HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can op- LPD2876 erate all door locks using the remote key- Locking doors less function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve- position. hicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle. 2. Close all doors. The remote keyless entry function may not 3. Press the button on the Intelli- function under the following conditions: gent Key. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the 4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice operational range. and the horn beeps once. ∙ When the doors or the trunk are open or 5. All doors will be locked. not closed securely. ∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged. 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments CAUTION NOTE: After locking the doors using the Intel- The unlocking operation can be changed ligent Key, be sure that the doors have in Selective door unlock in the vehicle been securely locked by operating the settings of the vehicle information dis- door handles. play. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “In- struments and controls” section of this manual. All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pressing the button: LPD2877 ∙ Opening any doors. Unlocking doors ∙ Pushing the ignition switch. 1. Press the button on the Intelligent The interior light illuminates for a period of Key. time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position. 2. The hazard warning lights flash once, and the driver’s door will unlock. The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following opera- 3. Press the button again within tions: 60 seconds to unlock all doors and ∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po- trunk. sition. ∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key. ∙ Switching off the room light switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 ∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF position in vehicle settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. Opening windows (if so equipped) The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic operation. ∙ To open the windows, press the button on the Intelligent Key longer than 3 seconds after all doors are un- WPD0364 WPD0361 locked. The door windows cannot be closed by Releasing the trunk lid Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- using the Intelligent Key. Press the button for longer than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk ened, you may activate the panic alarm to release button will not operate when the call attention by pressing and holding ignition switch is placed in the ON position. the button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time. The panic alarm stops when: ∙ It has run for a period of time, or ∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ The request switch on the driver or pas- NOTE: senger door has been pushed and the If you change the answer back horn and Intelligent Key is in range of the door light flash feature with the Intelligent handle. Key, the vehicle information display screen will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle information display screen can also be used to change the answer back horn mode. To deactivate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard indicator lights will flash three LPD2878 times to confirm that the answer back Answer back horn feature horn feature has been deactivated. If desired, the answer back horn feature To activate: Press and hold the can be deactivated using the Intelligent and buttons for at least 2 seconds Key. When it is deactivated and the once more. button is pressed, the hazard indicator The hazard indicator lights will flash once lights flash twice. When the button is and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reac- pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights tivated. nor the horn operates. Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is trig- gered.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 If the light does not blink, your battery may TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE be too weak to communicate to the vehicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that be replaced. For additional information re- are programmed for the vehicle. If another garding the replacement of a battery, refer Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve- to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it- hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif- yourself” section of this manual. ferently than expected. WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or LPD2836 buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the Intelligent Key button operation instrument panel. light When a chime or beep sounds or a warning The light blinks only when you push any is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle button on the Intelligent Key. The light illu- and the Intelligent Key. mination only signifies that the key fob has transmitted a signal. You may look and/or For additional information, refer to listen to verify that the vehicle has per- “Troubleshooting guide” in this section and formed the intended operation. The num- “Vehicle information display” in the “Instru- ber of blinks identifies each registered key ments and controls” section of this manual. (i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for your own identification purposes.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Symptom Possible Cause Remedy The Shift to Park warning appears in Move the shift lever to the P (Park) The shift lever is not in the P (Park) When stopping the engine the display and the inside warning position. position. chime sounds continuously. The door open warning appears in the When opening the driver’s door to get The ignition switch is in the ACC Place the ignition switch in the OFF display and the inside warning chime out of the vehicle position. position. sounds continuously. The No Key Detected warning appears in the display, the outside chime The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF sounds three times and the inside position. position. warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds. The Shift to Park warning appears in The ignition switch is in the ACC posi- Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- When closing the door after getting the display and the outside chime tion and the shift lever is not in the P sition and place the ignition switch in out of the vehicle sounds continuously. (Park) position. the OFF position. The Rear Door Alert warning message appears on the display, the horn Check the back seat for all articles, sounds three times twice, or a Check The Rear Door Alert is activated. press the ENTER button to clear the Back Seat For All Articles warning ap- Rear Door Alert warning message. pears on the display. The outside chime sounds for approxi- When closing the door with the inside mately 3 seconds and all the doors The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. lock knob turned to LOCK unlock. When pushing the door handle re- The outside chime sounds for approxi- quest switch or the button The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. mately 2 seconds. on the Intelligent Key to lock the door

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 Symptom Possible Cause Remedy Replace the battery with a new one. The Key Battery Low indicator appears For additional information, refer to The battery charge is low. in the display. “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it- yourself” section of this manual. When pushing the ignition switch to The Key ID Incorrect warning appears start the engine in the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds. The Intelligent Key system warning It warns of a malfunction with the In- It is recommended that you visit a When pressing the ignition switch light in the meter illuminates in yellow. telligent Key system. NISSAN dealer.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REMOTE ENGINE START

∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate REMOTE ENGINE START control system will default to either a OPERATING RANGE heating or cooling mode depending on outside and cabin temperatures. For WARNING additional information, refer to “Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate To help avoid risk of injury or death Control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, through unintended operation of the phone and voice recognition systems” vehicle and/or its systems, including section of the manual. entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave chil- Laws in some local communities may re- dren, people who require the assistance strict the use of remote starters. For ex- of others or pets unattended in your ve- ample, some laws require a person using hicle. Additionally, the temperature in- Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in side a closed vehicle on a warm day can view. Check local regulations for any re- quickly become high enough to cause a LPD2879 quirements. The button will be on the NISSAN In- significant risk of injury or death to telligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote En- Other conditions may affect the function of people and pets. gine Start. This feature allows the engine to the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi- start from outside the vehicle. tional information, refer to “Conditions the CAUTION Remote Engine Start will not work” in this The following features may be affected When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- section. when Remote Engine Start is used: charged or other strong radio wave Other conditions can affect the perfor- sources are present near the operating ∙ Vehicles with a manual climate control mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. location, the Intelligent Key operating system will default to the last used For additional information, refer to “NISSAN range becomes narrower, and the Intel- heating or cooling mode. Intelligent Key®” in this section. ligent Key may not function properly.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 The Remote Engine Start function can only ∙ The engine will continue to run for ∙ Extending engine run time will count to- be used when the Intelligent Key is within 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend wards the two Remote Engine Start the specified operating range from the ve- the time for an additional 10 minutes. limit. hicle. For additional information, refer to “Ex- A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, tending engine run time” in this section. The Remote Engine Start operating range or a single Remote Engine Start with an is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the ve- Depress and hold the brake then push the extension, are allowed between ignition hicle. push-button ignition switch to the ON po- cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled sition before driving. For additional infor- to the ON position and then back to the REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE mation, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the OFF position before the Remote Engine To use the Remote Engine Start feature to “Starting and driving” section of this Start procedure can be used again. manual. start the engine perform the following: CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE 1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle. EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME START 2. Press the button to lock all The Remote Engine Start feature can be To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform doors. extended one time by performing the one of the following: steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle” 3. Within 5 seconds press and hold in this section. Run time will be calculated ∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle the button until the turn signal as follows: and press until the parking lights lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If turn off. the vehicle is not within view press and ∙ The first 10 minute run time will start ∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers. hold the button for at least 2 sec- when the Remote Engine Start function onds. is performed. ∙ Cycle the ignition switch ON and then The following events will occur when the OFF. ∙ The second 10 minutes will start imme- engine starts: diately when the Remote Engine Start ∙ The extended engine run time has ex- ∙ The parking lights will turn on and re- function is performed again. For expired. main on as long as the engine is run- ample, if the engine has been running ∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired. ning. for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are ∙ The engine hood has been opened. ∙ The doors will be locked and the climate added, the engine will run for a total of control system may come on. 15 minutes. ∙ The shift lever is moved out of park. 3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry ∙ The button is not pressed and ∙ The Remote Engine Start function has into the vehicle. held for at least 2 seconds. been switched to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle informa- ∙ The ignition switch is pushed without ∙ The button is not pressed and tion display. For additional information, an Intelligent Key in the vehicle. held within 5 seconds of pressing the refer to “Vehicle information display” in ∙ The ignition switch is pushed with an lock button. the “Instruments and controls” section Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the ∙ The brake is pressed. of this manual. brake pedal is not depressed. The Remote Engine Start may display a ∙ The doors are not closed and locked. CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE warning or indicator in the vehicle informa- ∙ The trunk is open. tion display. For additional information, re- START WILL NOT WORK fer to “Vehicle information display” in the ∙ The Key System Error remains solid in “Instruments and controls” section of this The Remote Engine Start will not operate if the vehicle information display. any of the following conditions are present: manual. ∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry ∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON into the vehicle. position. ∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single ∙ The hood is not securely closed. Remote Engine Start with an extension, ∙ The hazard indicator lights are on. have already been used. ∙ The engine is still running. The engine ∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park). must be completely stopped. Wait at ∙ There is a detected registered key al- least 6 seconds if the engine goes from ready inside of the vehicle. running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23 HOOD

WARNING ∙ Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. The vehicle should only ever be operated with the hood securely closed. ∙ If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD2867 1. Pull the hood lock release handle ᭺1 5. When closing the hood, return the sup- located below the driver’s side instru- port rod to its original position, lower ment panel; the hood springs up the hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) slightly. above the latch and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood 2. To open the hood, push the lever ᭺2 latch. underneath the front of the hood up- wards with your fingertips as illustrated and raise the hood. 3. Remove the support rod from the clamp ᭺3 . 4. Insert the support rod ᭺4 into the slot on the passenger side of the hood.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments TRUNK LID

LPD2932 WPD0364 LPD2866 Instrument panel Intelligent Key Trunk opener switch OPENER OPERATION ∙ Closely supervise children when they To open the trunk lid perform one of the are around cars to prevent them from following after unlocking all doors: WARNING playing and becoming locked in the ∙ Press the button on the instrument ∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open. trunk where they could be seriously panel. This could allow dangerous exhaust injured. Keep the car locked, with the ∙ Press the button on the Intelligent Key. gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent additional information, refer to “Ex- ∙ Push the trunk opener switch ᭺A . haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the children’s access to car keys. “Starting and driving” section of the To close the trunk lid, lower and push the manual. trunk lid down securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25 NOTE: The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children Request switches for all doors and trunk can be deactivated when the I-Key Door and adults in the event they become Lock setting is switched to OFF in the locked inside the trunk. “Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle informa- To open the trunk from the inside, pull the tion display. For additional information, illuminated release handle until the lock re- refer to “Vehicle information display” in leases and push up on the trunk lid. The the “Instruments and controls” section release handle is made of a material that of the manual. glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light. The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the interior of the trunk lid. LPD2081 INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE The trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat. WARNING 1. Move the front passenger seat to the Closely supervise children when they most forward position. are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the 2. Open the access cover on the rear par- trunk where they could be seriously in- cel shelf. jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched 3. Slide the handle in the direction of the when not in use, and prevent children’s arrow. access to car keys. 4. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments FUEL-FILLER DOOR

WARNING FUEL-FILLER CAP ∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the WARNING cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of ∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and these areas by passengers without highly explosive under certain condi- proper restraints could result in seri- tions. You could be burned or serious injury or death in an accident or ously injured if it is misused or mis- sudden stop. handled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or sparks near the vehicle when straps to help prevent it from sliding refueling. or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop ∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank or collision, unsecured cargo could after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off cause personal injury. LPD2869 automatically. Continued refueling OPENER OPERATION may cause fuel overflow, resulting in ∙ When returning the seatbacks to the fuel spray and possibly a fire. upright position, be certain they are The fuel-filler door release is located below completely secured in the latched po- ∙ Use only an original equipment type the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler sition. If they are not completely se- fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has cured, passengers may be injured in door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel- a built-in safety valve needed for an accident or sudden stop. filler door securely. proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An in- ∙ Closely supervise children when they correct cap can result in a serious mal- are around cars to prevent them from function and possible injury. It could playing and becoming locked in the also cause the Malfunction Indi- trunk where they could be seriously cator Light (MIL) to come on. injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely ∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body latched when not in use, and prevent to attempt to start your vehicle. children’s access to car keys.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27 ∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in ∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning message ∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity will be displayed/warning will appear flush it away with water to avoid paint can cause an explosion of flammable if the fuel-filler cap is not properly damage. liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or tightened. It may take a few driving trailer. To reduce the risk of serious trips for the message to be displayed. NOTE: injury or death when filling portable Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap Changing ignition switch status during fuel containers: properly after the Loose Fuel Cap the refueling process may cause a delay warning message is – Always place the container on the in fuel gauge response. displayed/warning appears may ground when filling. cause the Malfunction Indicator – Do not use electronic devices when Light (MIL) to illuminate. filling. ∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap – Keep the pump nozzle in contact properly may cause the Mal- with the container while you are function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi- filling it. nate. If the light illuminates be- – Use only approved portable fuel cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or containers for flammable liquid. missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. CAUTION The light should turn off after a ∙ Do not use a fuel that contains more few driving trips. If the light does than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For not turn off after a few driving trips, additional information, refer to “Fuel have the vehicle inspected. It is rec- recommendation” in the “Technical ommended that you visit a NISSAN and consumer information” section of dealer for this service. this manual. ∙ For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments STEERING WHEEL

WARNING ∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. ∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or LPD2870 LPD2888 fatal injuries from the air bag if you To remove the fuel-filler cap: Loose Fuel Cap warning are up against it when it inflates. Al- ways sit back against the seatback 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock- The Loose Fuel Cap warning ᭺A appears in and as far away as practical from the wise to remove. the vehicle information display when the steering wheel. Always use the seat 2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly af- belts. ᭺1 while refueling. ter the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to To install the fuel-filler cap: be displayed. To turn off the warning, per- 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the form the following: fuel-filler tube. 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a soon as possible. For additional infor- single click is heard. mation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in this section. 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29 SUN VISORS

TELESCOPIC OPERATION Pull the lock lever down ᭺1 and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward ᭺3 to the desired position. Push the lock lever up ᭺1 firmly and hold on until end of stroke to lock the steering wheel in place.

LPD2871 TILT OPERATION Pull the lock lever down and hold on until the end of the stroke ᭺1 and adjust the steering wheel up or down ᭺2 to the desired position. Push the lock lever up ᭺1 firmly and hold on until end of stroke to lock the steering wheel in place.

WPD0344 3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments MIRRORS

1. To block glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor ᭺1 . 2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor ᭺2 from the center mount and swing the visor to the side. 3. To extend the sun visor, slide in or out as needed ᭺3 .

CAUTION ∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position.

∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor LPD2589 WPD0126 forcedly downward. VANITY MIRRORS MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun MIRROR (if so equipped) visor down and flip open the mirror cover. Use the night position ᭺1 to reduce glare Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and from the headlights of vehicles behind you turn on when the mirror cover is open. at night. Use the day position ᭺2 when driving in daylight hours.

WARNING Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31 NOTE: Do not hang any objects over the sensors ᭺1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation. The indicator light ᭺2 will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating. ∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the O button. The indicator light will turn off.

LPD0469 ∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, press LPD2452 the | button. The indicator light will turn AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE on. OUTSIDE MIRRORS REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) For information on HomeLink® Universal WARNING The inside mirror is designed so that it au- Transceiver operation, refer to the tomatically dims during night time condi- “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the ∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv- tions and according to the intensity of the “Instruments and controls” section of this ing. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. headlights of the vehicle following you. The manual. automatic anti-glare feature is activated ∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- on the passenger side are closer than tion. they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped)

The outside mirror remote control only op- The automatic drive positioner system has erates when the ignition switch is placed in three features: the ACC or ON position. ∙ Memory storage function (Key-link) Move the small switch ᭺1 to select the right ∙ Memory storage function (Switch) or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch ᭺2 . ∙ Entry/exit function Move the small switch ᭺1 to the center (neutral) position to prevent accidentally Key-link, when enabled, automatically removing the mirror. tains the driver’s last seat position for that specific key when the ignition is turned from ON to OFF. Each memory switch button (1 or 2) on the driver’s door can also store one additional position which is independent of the key- LPD2084 linked position. Manual folding outside mirrors Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it. Heated mirrors (if so equipped) Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, refer to “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru- ments and controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33 Once step 4 is completed, every time the ignition is switched from ON to OFF, the memory positions of the driver’s seat are linked to the Intelligent Key. Follow the same procedure if you want to link the 2nd, 3rd or 4th Intelligent Key.

NOTE: If new memory positions are set prior to turning the ignition from ON to OFF, the previously linked memory positions for the respective key will be overwritten by new positions. LPD2432 Recalling Intelligent Key memory LPD2872 MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION positions MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION (key-link) (switch) If the “Key-Linked Settings” are enabled in Use the following process to setup key-link: the vehicle information display for that par- Use the following process to manually ticular key, every time you enter the vehicle 1. Unlock the vehicle with the desired In- store the two memory positions in the the driver’s seat will automatically move to telligent Key while the ignition is OFF. switch: the driver’s last position of the respective 2. Place the ignition in the ON position. Intelligent Key. 1. The vehicle should be stopped while setting the memory. 3. Within the “Settings” menu of the ve- NOTE: hicle information display, select “Key- 2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired Linked Settings” and press the OK but- The key-linked memory positions can be positions by manually operating each ton on the steering switch. different from the positions stored in the adjusting switch. For additional infor- memory switch (1 or 2). mation, refer to “Seats” in the “Safety— 4. While in the menu, press the OK button on the steering switch to turn the sys- Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- tem ON/OFF. straint system” section of this manual. 3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec- The driver’s seat will slide backward: 2. Open and close the driver’s door more onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2). than two times with the ignition switch ∙ When the driver’s door is opened and in the OFF position. The indicator light for the pushed memory the ignition switch is in the OFF position. switch will come on and stay on for ap- The entry/exit function should now work proximately 5 seconds. The chime will ∙ When the ignition switch is turned from properly. sound when the memory is stored. ACC to OFF with the driver’s door open. SYSTEM OPERATION The driver’s seat will return to the previous NOTE: position: The automatic drive positioner system will If a new memory position is stored in the not work or will stop operating under the ∙ When the ignition switch is turned to same memory switch, the previous following conditions: ACC or ON while the shift lever is in the P memory position will be overwritten by (Park) position. ∙ When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph the new stored position. (7 km/h). Recalling switch memory The entry/exit function can be adjusted or canceled through the “Vehicle Settings” in ∙ When any of the memory switches are positions the vehicle information display by perform- pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating. To recall the manually stored positions, ing the following: ∙ When the switch for the driver’s seat is press the memory switch (1 or 2). The driv- ∙ Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to er’s seat will move to the positions stored pushed while the automatic drive posi- OFF. to those buttons. tioner is operating. ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION Restarting the entry/exit function ∙ When the seat has already been moved to the memorized position. This system is designed so that the driver’s If the battery cable is disconnected or if the seat will automatically move when the shift fuse opens, the stored memory positions ∙ When no seat position is stored in the lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows may be lost and some of the functions will memory switch. be restricted. the driver to easily get in and out of the ∙ When the shift lever is moved from P driver’s seat. 1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h). (Park) to any other position. OR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35 4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual...... 4-2 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-20 RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ...... 4-3 Intelligent Around View Monitor system RearView Monitor system operation ...... 4-4 limitations...... 4-20 How to read the displayed lines...... 4-5 System maintenance...... 4-22 Difference between predicted and Moving Object Detection (MOD) actual distances...... 4-5 (if so equipped) ...... 4-23 How to park with predicted course MOD system operation ...... 4-24 lines ...... 4-7 Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) .....4-26 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-8 MOD system limitations ...... 4-26 How to turn on and off predicted System maintenance...... 4-27 course lines ...... 4-9 Vents...... 4-28 RearView Monitor system limitations ...... 4-9 Heater and air conditioner (manual) System maintenance...... 4-10 (if so equipped) ...... 4-29 Intelligent Around View Monitor Controls ...... 4-30 (if so equipped) ...... 4-11 Heater operation ...... 4-30 Intelligent Around View Monitor system Air conditioner operation ...... 4-32 operation...... 4-12 Air flow charts ...... 4-33 Difference between predicted and Heater and air conditioner (automatic) actual distances...... 4-16 (if so equipped) ...... 4-36 How to park with predicted course Automatic operation ...... 4-37 lines ...... 4-18 Manual operation ...... 4-38 How to switch the display ...... 4-19 Operating tips ...... 4-39 Servicing air conditioner...... 4-40 Antenna...... 4-41 USB/iPod® charging port ...... 4-41 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-41 NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S MANUAL

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual that includes the following information. ∙ NissanConnect® Services ∙ Navigation system (if so equipped) ∙ Audio system ∙ Apple CarPlayTM ∙ Android AutoTM ∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system ∙ Viewing information ∙ Other settings ∙ Voice recognition ∙ General system information

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

LHA4800 1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3 WARNING CAUTION ∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in- Do not scratch the camera lens when structions for proper use of the Rear- cleaning dirt or snow from the front of View Monitor system could result in the camera. serious injury or death. The RearView Monitor system automati- ∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when feature and is not a substitute for the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) proper backing. Always turn and look position. The radio can still be heard while out the windows and check mirrors to the RearView Monitor is active. be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to LHA4801 the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to To display the rear view, the RearView Moni- help avoid damaging the vehicle. tor system uses a camera located just above the vehicle’s license plate ᭺1 . ∙ The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM reference only when the vehicle is on a OPERATION level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference With the ignition switch in the ON position, only and may be different than the move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po- actual distance between the vehicle sition to operate the RearView Monitor. and displayed objects.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Vehicle width guide lines ᭺4 as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects Indicate the vehicle width when backing behind the vehicle. up. Predicted course lines ᭺5 Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is LHA4805 in the straight-ahead position. HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED The vehicle width guide lines and the width LINES of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course. Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with refer- DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED ence to the vehicle body line ᭺A are dis- AND ACTUAL DISTANCES played on the monitor. The displayed guidelines and their loca- Distance guide lines tions on the ground are for approximate Indicate distances from the vehicle body. reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actu- ∙ Red line ᭺1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) ally located at distances different from ∙ Yellow line ᭺2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When ∙ Green line ᭺3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) in doubt, turn around and view the objects

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 LHA4804 LHA4944 LHA4806 Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the object distance guide lines and the vehicle width distance guide lines and the vehicle width The predicted course lines ᭺A do not touch guide lines are shown closer than the actual guide lines are shown farther than the actual the object in the display. However, the ve- distance. Note that any object on the hill is distance. Note that any object on the hill is hicle may hit the object if it projects over further than it appears on the monitor. closer than it appears on the monitor. the actual backing up course. 4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems object when backing up to the position ᭺A if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

LHA3522 ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. Press the CAMERA button. 2. Touch the “Display Settings” key. 3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”, “Color”, or “Black Level” key. 4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” LHA4770 key on the touch-screen display. 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the pre- NOTE: dicted course lines ᭺B enter the parking space ᭺C . Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF ∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor- ∙ When washing the vehicle with high PREDICTED COURSE LINES ner areas of the bumper cannot be pressure water, be sure not to spray it viewed on the RearView Monitor be- around the camera. Otherwise, water To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course cause of its monitoring range limita- may enter the camera unit causing lines while in the P (Park) position: tion. The system will not show small water condensation on the lens, a 1. Press the CAMERA button. objects below the bumper, and may malfunction, fire or an electric shock. not show objects close to the bumper ∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci- 2. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” key or on the ground. to turn the feature ON or OFF. sion instrument. Otherwise, it may ∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni- malfunction or cause damage result- To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course tor differ from actual distance being in a fire or an electric shock. lines while in the R (Reverse) position, press cause a wide-angle lens is used. the CAMERA button. The following are operating limitations and ∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will do not represent a system malfunction: REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and out- ∙ When the temperature is extremely LIMITATIONS side mirrors. high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects. WARNING ∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the ∙ When strong light directly shines on the Listed below are the system limitations number of occupants, fuel level, ve- camera, objects may not be displayed for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate hicle position, road conditions and clearly. the vehicle in accordance with these road grade. system limitations could result in seri- ∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on ous injury or death. ∙ Make sure that the trunk is securely the screen. This is due to strong re- closed when backing up. ∙ The system cannot completely elimi- flected light from the bumper. ∙ Do not put anything on the rearview nate blind spots and may not show ∙ The screen may flicker under fluores- camera. The rearview camera is in- every object. cent light. stalled above the license plate. ∙ The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 ∙ Objects on the monitor may not be If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the clear in a dark environment. camera ᭺1 , the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera ∙ There may be a delay when switching by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a between views. diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip- ∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the ing it with a dry cloth. camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera. ∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

LHA4801 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. ∙ Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

LHA4800 1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 WARNING The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in Failure to follow the warnings and in- situations such as slot parking or parallel structions for the proper use of the In- parking. telligent Around View Monitor system could result in serious injury or death The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen for- ∙ The Intelligent Around View Monitor is mat. Not all views are available at all times. a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle opera- Available views: tion because it has areas where ob- ∙ Front View jects cannot be viewed. The four cor- An approximately 150–degree view of ners of the vehicle in particular, are the front of the vehicle. areas where objects do not always appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear ∙ Rear View views. Always check your surround- An approximately 150–degree view of LHA4802 ings to be sure that it is safe to move the rear of the vehicle. To display the multiple views, the Intelligent before operating the vehicle. Always ∙ Bird’s-Eye View Around View Monitor system uses cam- operate the vehicle slowly. The surrounding views of the vehicle eras located in the front grille, on the vehi- ∙ The driver is always responsible for from above. cle’s outside mirrors and one just above the vehicle’s license plate ᭺1 . safety during parking and other ∙ Front-Side View maneuvers. The view around and ahead of the front INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW passenger’s side wheel. MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION CAUTION ∙ Full Screen Rear View With the ignition switch in the ON position, Do not scratch the camera lens when The view to the rear of the vehicle move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po- cleaning dirt or snow from the front of (which is a little wider than the standard sition or press the CAMERA button to oper- the camera. Rear View). ate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The screen displayed on the Intelligent ∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob- Around View Monitor will automatically re- jects viewed in the monitor are fur- turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after ther than they appear. When driving the CAMERA button has been pressed with the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed the shift lever in a position other than the R in the monitor are closer than they (Reverse) position. appear. Available views ∙ Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when WARNING viewed in the monitor and outside mirrors. ∙ The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a ∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to reference only when the vehicle is on a properly judge distances to other paved, level surface. The apparent objects. distance viewed on the monitor may SAA1840 ∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road, Front view be different than the actual distance there may be a difference between between the vehicle and displayed the predicted course lines and the ac- Front and rear view objects. tual course line. Guiding lines that indicate the approximate ∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’s- ∙ The vehicle width and predicted vehicle width and distance to objects with eye view as a reference. The lines and course lines are wider than the actual reference to the vehicle body line ᭺A are the bird’s-eye view are greatly af- width and course. displayed on the monitor. fected by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road ∙ The displayed lines will appear Distance guide lines: condition and road grade. slightly off to the right, because the rearview camera is not installed in the Indicate distances from the vehicle body: ∙ If the tires are replaced with different rear center of the vehicle. ∙ Red line ᭺1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) sized tires, the predicted course lines and the bird’s-eye view may be dis- ∙ Yellow line ᭺2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) played incorrectly. ∙ Green line ᭺3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE: When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight- ahead position, both the right and left predicted course lines ᭺6 are displayed. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only LHA4992 on the opposite side of the turn. LHA4534 Rear view Front view ∙ Green line ᭺4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m) Bird’s-eye view (if so equipped) The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead Vehicle width guide lines ᭺5 : view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course Indicate the approximate vehicle width to a parking space. when backing up. The vehicle icon ᭺1 shows the position of Predicted course lines ᭺6 : the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis- Indicate the predicted course when oper- tance between objects viewed in the bird’s- ating the vehicle. The predicted course eye view may differ somewhat from the lines will be displayed on the monitor when actual distance to the vehicle. the steering wheel is turned. The predicted The areas that the cameras cannot cover course lines will move depending on how ᭺2 are indicated in black. much the steering wheel is turned and will 4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems move depending on how much the steer- ∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be ing wheel is turned and will not be dis- misaligned when the camera position played while the steering wheel is in the alters. neutral position. ∙ A line on the ground may be mis- When the monitor displays the front view aligned and is not seen as being and the steering wheel turns about 90 de- straight at the seam of the views. The grees or less from the neutral position, the misalignment will increase as the line two green predicted course lines are proceeds away from the vehicle. shown in front of the vehicle. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, one green predicted course line is shown in front of the vehicle and the other predicted course line is LHA4535 shown at the side of the vehicle. Rear view The non-viewable area ᭺2 is highlighted in When the monitor displays the rear view, yellow for several seconds after the bird’s- the predicted course lines are shown at the eye view is displayed. It will be shown only back of the vehicle. the first time after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. WARNING In addition, the non-viewable corners are ∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap- displayed in red and blink for the first 3 sec- pear further than the actual distance. onds ᭺3 to remind the driver to be cau- ∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, tious. may be misaligned or not displayed at Predicted course lines ᭺4 indicate the pre- the seam of the views. dicted course when operating the vehicle. ∙ Objects that are above the camera The predicted course lines will be displayed cannot be displayed. on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle. LHA2652 Front-side view Guiding lines Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor. The front-of-vehicle line ᭺1 shows the front part of the vehicle. LHA4804 The side-of-vehicle line ᭺2 shows the ap- Backing up on a steep uphill proximate vehicle width including the out- When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the side mirrors. distance guide lines and the vehicle width The extensions ᭺3 of both the front ᭺1 and guide lines are shown closer than the actual side ᭺2 lines are shown with a green dotted distance. Note that any object on the hill is line. further than it appears on the monitor. 4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

LHA4944 LHA4806 Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting When backing up the vehicle down a hill, object the distance guide lines and the vehicle The predicted course lines ᭺A do not touch width guide lines are shown farther than the object in the display. However, the ve- the actual distance. Note that any object hicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 object when backing up to the position ᭺A if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING ∙ If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. ∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line. ∙ If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures: – Turn the steering wheel from lock LHA4945 to lock while the engine is running. LHA5043 Backing up behind a projecting – Drive the vehicle on a straight road 1. Visually check that the parking space is object for more than 5 minutes. safe before parking your vehicle. ∙ When the steering wheel is turned 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed The position ᭺C is shown farther than the with the ignition switch in the ACC po- on the screen ᭺A when the shift lever is position ᭺B in the display. However, the position, the predicted course lines may moved to the R (Reverse) position. ᭺C sition is actually at the same distance as be displayed incorrectly. the position ᭺A . The vehicle may hit the 4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive) the vehicle width guide lines ᭺D parallel position, the available views are: to the parking space ᭺C while referring ∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen to the predicted course lines. ∙ Front view/front-side view split screen 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the The display will switch from the Intelligent P (Park) position and apply the parking Around View Monitor screen when: brake. ∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the CAMERA button or move the shift ∙ A different screen is selected. lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views. If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are: LHA4770 ∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting ∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines ᭺B enter the park- ∙ Full screen rear view ing space ᭺C .

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 NOTE: Do not adjust any of the display settings of the Intelligent Around View Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

LHA3522 ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. While on the main menu screen, touch the “Settings” key. 2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen and touch the “Camera” key. 3. Touch the “Display Settings” key. LHA4808 4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”, INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW “Color”, or “Black Level” key. MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS 5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” key on the touch-screen display.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ∙ The colors of objects on the Intelligent WARNING ∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are Around View Monitor may differ some- precision instruments. Doing so could Listed below are the system limitations what from the actual color of objects. cause a malfunction or cause damage for Intelligent Around View Monitor. resulting in a fire or an electric shock. Failure to operate the vehicle in accor- ∙ Objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not be clear and the color dance with these system limitations There are some areas where the system could result in serious injury or death. of the object may differ in a dark envi- will not show objects and the system does ronment. ∙ Do not use the Intelligent Around View not warn of moving objects. When in the Monitor with the outside mirrors in front or rear view display, an object below ∙ There may be differences in sharpness the stored position, and make sure the bumper or on the ground may not be between each camera view of the that the trunk is securely closed when viewed ᭺1 . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall bird’s-eye view. operating the vehicle using the Intelli- object near the seam ᭺2 of the camera ∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens. gent Around View Monitor. viewing areas will not appear in the moni- Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that ∙ The apparent distance between ob- tor. has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry jects viewed on the Intelligent Around The following are operating limitations and cloth. View Monitor differs from the actual do not represent a system malfunction: distance. ∙ There may be a delay when switching ∙ The cameras are installed on the front between views. grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put any- ∙ When the temperature is extremely thing such as a license plate frame on high or low, the screen may not display the vehicle that covers or blocks the objects clearly. view of the cameras. ∙ When strong light directly shines on the ∙ When washing the vehicle with high camera, objects may not be displayed pressure water, be sure not to spray it clearly. around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing ∙ The screen may flicker under fluores- water condensation on the lens, a cent light. malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 LHA3591 LHA3592 LHA4802 System temporarily unavailable When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE screen, the camera image may be receiv- When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen, ing temporary electronic disturbances CAUTION there are abnormal conditions in the Intel- from surrounding devices. This will not hin- ligent Around View Monitor. This will not der normal driving operation but the sys- ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner hinder normal driving operation but the tem should be inspected if it occurs fre- to clean the camera. This will cause system should be inspected. It is recom- quently. It is recommended that you visit a discoloration. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Do not damage the cameras as the this service. monitor screen may be adversely affected. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras ᭺1 , the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth. 4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)

LHA4800 1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 WARNING MOD SYSTEM OPERATION Failure to follow the warnings and in- The MOD system will turn on automatically structions for proper use of the Moving under the following conditions: Object Detection (MOD) system could ∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) result in serious injury or death position. ∙ The MOD system is not a substitute ∙ When the CAMERA button is pressed to for proper vehicle operation and is not activate the camera view on the display. designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When ∙ When vehicle speed decreases below maneuvering, always use the outside approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the mirrors and rearview mirror and turn camera screen is displayed. and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver. LHA4190 ∙ The system is deactivated at speeds Front and bird’s-eye views above 5 mph (8 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is dis- ∙ The MOD system is not designed to played: detect surrounding stationary objects. ∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is The MOD system can inform the driver of stopped, the MOD system detects mov- moving objects near the vehicle when ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The backing out of garages, maneuvering in MOD system will not operate if the out- parking lots and in other such instances. side mirrors are moving in or out, in the The MOD system detects moving objects stowed position, or if either front door is by using image processing technology on opened. the image shown in the display.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA4191 LHA4997 LHA4998 Rear and bird’s-eye views Rear and front-side views Full screen rear view ∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) The MOD system does not detect moving NOTE: position and the vehicle speed is below objects in the front-side view. The MOD While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the icon is not displayed on the screen when in beeping, the MOD system does not MOD system detects moving objects in this view. chime. the front view. When the MOD system detects moving ob- In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame ᭺1 is ∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard displayed on each camera image (front, position and the vehicle speed is below when in front or rear view and a yellow rear, right, left) depending on where mov- approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the frame will be displayed on the view where ing objects are detected. MOD system detects moving objects in the objects are detected. While the MOD ᭺2 the rear view. The MOD system will not system continues to detect moving ob- The yellow frame is displayed on each view in the front view and rear view modes. operate if the trunk is open. jects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 A blue MOD icon ᭺3 is displayed in the view ∙ Do not use the MOD system when – When the position of the moving where the MOD system is operative. A gray towing a trailer. The system may not objects in the display is not MOD icon is displayed in the view where the function properly. changed. MOD system is not operative. ∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio ∙ The MOD system might detect flowing If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD system volume or open vehicle win- water droplets on the camera lens, icon ᭺3 is not displayed. dow) will interfere with the chime white smoke from the muffler, mov- TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so sound, and it may not be heard. ing shadows, etc. equipped) ∙ The MOD system performance will be ∙ The MOD system may not function limited according to environmental properly depending on the speed, di- Some vehicles include the option to allow conditions and surrounding objects rection, distance or shape of the mov- the MOD system to be turned on or off. such as: ing objects. To turn the MOD system on or off: – When there is low contrast be- ∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the tween background and the moving parts where the camera is installed, 1. Touch the “Setting” key. objects. leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the 2. Touch the “Camera” key. – When there is a blinking source of MOD system may not detect objects light. 3. Touch the “Moving Object Detection” properly. key to switch between ON or OFF. – When strong light such as another ∙ When the temperature is extremely vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is high or low, the screen may not dis- MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS present. play objects clearly. This is not a WARNING – When camera orientation is not in malfunction. its usual position, such as when a Listed below are the system limitations mirror is folded. for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limita- – When there is dirt, water drops or tions could result in serious injury or snow on the camera lens. death.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras ᭺1 , the MOD system may not The blue MOD icon will change to orange operate properly. Clean the camera by wip- if one of the following has occurred: ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted ∙ When the system is malfunctioning. mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth. ∙ When the component temperature reaches a high level (icon will blink). ∙ When the RearView camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink). If the icon light continues to illuminate orange, have the MOD system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LHA4802 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. ∙ Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 VENTS

LHA4940 LHA4939 LHA1134 Side Center Rear (if so equipped) Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent slides. Open or close the vents by using the slide. Move the slide toward the to open the vents or toward the to close them.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped)

8. A/C (air conditioner) button WARNING ∙ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. ∙ Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. ∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

LHA4783 NOTE: 1. Fan speed control dial 4. Rear window and outside mir- ∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve- 2. Heated seat switches (if so ror (if so equipped) defroster hicle can build up in the air condi- equipped) switch tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas- 3. Front defroster button 5. Air recirculation button senger compartment through the 6. MAX A/C / temperature control dial vents. 7. Air flow control buttons Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 ∙ When parking, set the heater and air Temperature control dial A/C (air conditioner) button conditioner controls to turn off air re- The temperature control dial allows you to Start the engine, turn the fan speed circulation to allow fresh air into the adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To passenger compartment. This should control dial to the desired position and lower the temperature, turn the dial to the help reduce odors inside the vehicle. left. To increase the temperature, turn the press the button to turn on the air CONTROLS dial to the right. conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again. Fan speed control dial Turn the dial to the MAX A/C position for The air conditioner cooling function op- maximum cooling. Air will flow from center The fan speed control dial turns the erates only when the engine is running. and side vents. fan on and off, and controls fan speed. Rear window and outside mirror Air flow control buttons Air recirculation button (if so equipped) defroster switch The air flow control buttons allow you to On position (Indicator light on): For additional information, refer to “Rear select the air flow outlets. Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. window and outside mirror (if so equipped) — Air flows from center and side Press the button to the on position defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. vents. when: — Air flows from center and side ∙ driving on a dusty road. Heated seat switches (if so vents and foot outlets. equipped) — Air flows mainly from foot ∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering outlets. passenger compartment. For additional information, refer to “Heated — Air flows from defroster outlets seat switches” in the “Instruments and con- and foot outlets. ∙ for maximum cooling when using the trols” section of this manual. air conditioner. — Air flows mainly from defroster HEATER OPERATION outlets. Off position (Indicator light off): Outside air is drawn into the passenger Heating compartment and distributed through the selected outlet. This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from Use the off position for normal heater or air the defrost outlets and the side vent out- conditioner operation. lets. 4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 1. Press the button to the off posi- 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to 2. Press the air flow control button. tion for normal heating. the desired position. 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. the desired position between the 4. Turn the temperature control dial to 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to middle and the hot position. the desired position. the desired position. ∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the Heating and defogging 4. Turn the temperature control dial to windows, turn the fan speed con- This mode heats the interior and defogs the desired position between the trol dial to the highest setting and the the windshield. middle and the hot position. temperature control to the full HOT po- Ventilation sition. 1. Press the air flow control button. This mode directs outside air to the side ∙ When the position is selected, the 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to and center vents. air conditioner automatically turns on if the desired position. the outside temperature is more than 1. Press the button to the off posi- 3. Turn the temperature control dial to 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air the desired position between the tion. which helps defog the windshield. middle and the hot position. 2. Press the air flow control button. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the ∙ When the position is selected, the 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to passenger compartment to further im- air conditioner automatically turns on if the desired position. prove the defogging performance. The the outside temperature is more than recirculation mode cannot be activated 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air 4. Turn the temperature control dial to which helps defog the windshield. the desired position. in the position. The mode automatically turns off, Defrosting or defogging Bi-level heating allowing outside air to be drawn into the The bi-level mode directs warmed air to This mode directs the air to the defrost passenger compartment to further im- the side and center vents and to the front prove the defogging performance. outlets to defrost/defog the windows. and rear floor outlets. 1. Press the defrost/defog button . 1. Press the button to the off position. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 Operating tips ∙ For quick cooling when the outside ∙ When the or are selected, Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades temperature is high, press the the air conditioner automatically turns and air inlet in front of the windshield. button to the ON position. Be sure to on if the outside temperature is more This improves heater operation. return the to the off position for than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION normal cooling. MAX A/C may be used which helps defog the windshield. for quick cooling. The mode automatically turns off, Start the engine, turn the fan speed Dehumidified heating allowing outside air to be drawn into the control dial to the desired position, and passenger compartment to further im- This mode is used to heat and dehumidify press the button to activate the air prove the defogging performance. conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the air. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to cooling and dehumidifying functions are 1. Press the button to the off posi- the desired position. added to the heater operation. tion. The air conditioner cooling function op- Operating tips erates only when the engine is running. 2. Press the air flow control button. ∙ Keep the windows closed while the air Cooling 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to conditioner is in operation. the desired position. This mode is used to cool and dehumidify ∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or the air. 4. Press the A/C button. The indicator 3 minutes with the windows open to light comes on. 1. Press the button to the off posi- vent hot air from the passenger com- tion. 5. Turn the temperature control dial to partment. Then, close the windows. the desired position. This allows the air conditioner to cool 2. Press the air flow control button. the interior more quickly. Dehumidified defogging 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to ∙ The air conditioning system should be the desired position. This mode is used to defog the windows operated for approximately 10 minutes and dehumidify the air. at least once a month. This helps pre- 4. Press the A/C button. The indicator light comes on. 1. Press the air flow control button. vent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. 5. Turn the temperature control dial to 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. the desired position. 4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. ∙ If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. ∙ When Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) is activated, the manual climate control system will default to the last used heating or cooling mode. AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should always be in the off position for heating and defrosting.

LHA4786 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 LHA4787 LHA4788 4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA4789 LHA4790 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped)

9. Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) 10. Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch 11. Front defroster button 12. ON-OFF button WARNING ∙ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. ∙ Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. LHA4784 1. AUTO (automatic) climate control 4. SYNC button / temperature control ∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the inte- button / temperature control dial dial (passenger’s side) rior air to become stale and the win- (drivers side) 5. A/C (air conditioner) button dows to fog up. 2. Display screen 6. Air recirculation button Start the engine and operate the controls 3. Heated seat switches (if so 7. Air flow control button to activate the air conditioner. equipped) 8. Fan speed control buttons 4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: ∙ The temperature of the passenger ∙ Do not set the temperature lower than compartment will be maintained auto- the outside air temperature. Otherwise, ∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve- matically. Air flow distribution, air intake the system may not work properly. hicle can build up in the air condi- control and fan speed are also con- tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas- ∙ Not recommended if windows fog up. trolled automatically. senger compartment through the Dehumidified defrosting or vents. ∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as defogging ∙ When parking, set the heater and air the air is cooled rapidly. This does not conditioner controls to turn off air re- 1. Press the front defroster button indicate a malfunction. circulation to allow fresh air into the on. passenger compartment. This should 3. You can individually set driver’s and 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set help reduce odors inside the vehicle. front passenger’s side temperature us- the desired temperature. ing each temperature control dial. To ∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside AUTOMATIC OPERATION synchronize the driver’s and front pas- of the windows, use the fan speed Cooling and/or dehumidified senger’s temperature settings, press the SYNC button. control buttons to set the fan speed to heating (AUTO) maximum. Heating (A/C OFF) This mode may be used all year round as ∙ As soon as possible after the wind- the system automatically works to keep a The air conditioner does not activate. When shield is clean, press the AUTO button to constant temperature. Air flow distribution, you need to heat only, use this mode. return to the automatic mode. air intake control, and fan speed are also 1. Press the AUTO button. ∙ When the front defroster button is controlled automatically. pressed, the air conditioner will auto- 1. Press the AUTO button on. 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set matically be turned on at outside tem- the desired temperature. peratures above 36°F (2°C). The air recir- 2. Turn the temperature control dial to ∙ The temperature of the passenger culate mode automatically turns off, the left or right to set the desired tem- allowing outside air to be drawn into the compartment will be maintained auto- perature. passenger compartment to further im- matically. Air flow distribution and fan prove the defogging performance. ∙ Adjust the temperature display to speed are also controlled automatically. about 75°F (24°C) for normal operation. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37 Remote Engine Start with dial to the right. Temperature can be ad- A/C (air conditioner) button Intelligent Climate Control (if so justed on the driver’s and passenger’s side. Start the engine, press the fan speed equipped) Air recirculation control buttons to the desired position and Vehicles equipped with automatic climate Press the air recirculation button to press the button to turn on the air controls and Remote Engine Start function recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, may go into automatic heating or cooling The indicator light on the button will press the button again. mode when Remote Engine Start is acti- come on. The air conditioner cooling function op- vated depending on outside and cabin The air recirculation cannot be activated erates only when the engine is running. temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be when the air conditioner is in the Air flow control inoperable until the ignition switch is front defrosting mode. turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost- When the outside temperature exceeds Pressing the button manually con- ing mode, the rear window defroster and 70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may trols air flow and selects the air outlet: heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may default to air recirculation mode automati- — Air flows from center and side cally to reduce overall power consumption. be activated automatically. vents. To exit air recirculation mode, deselect the — Air flows from center and side MANUAL OPERATION air recirculation button (indicator light will turn off) to enter fresh air mode. vents and foot outlets. Fan speed control buttons — Air flows mainly from foot Automatic intake air control outlets. Press the fan speed control buttons — Air flows from defroster and to manually control the fan speed. In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be foot outlets. Press the AUTO button to return to auto- controlled automatically. To manually con- matic control of the fan speed. trol the intake air, press the air recir- Synchronize climate settings culation button. To return to the automatic Press the SYNC button to synchronize cli- Temperature control dial control mode, press and hold the air mate settings. The sync indicator will turn The temperature control dial allows you to recirculation button for about 2 seconds. on. adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To The indicator light will flash twice, and then Pressing SYNC will synchronize driver’s and lower the temperature, turn the dial to the the intake air will be controlled automati- front passenger’s climate settings. left. To increase the temperature, turn the cally. 4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems To change climate settings when SYNC is Heated seat switches (if so active (the SYNC indicator is on): equipped) ∙ The driver’s side temperature control For additional information, refer to “Heated dial will control the driver and front pas- seat switches” in the “Instruments and con- senger temperatures. trols” section of this manual. ∙ The fan speed control dial will control Heated steering wheel switch (if the fan speeds. so equipped) To exit SYNC: For additional information, refer to “Heated ∙ To remove the front passenger from steering wheel switch” in the “Instruments SYNC, turn the passenger’s side tem- and controls” section of this manual. perature control dial.

∙ Pressing SYNC multiple times will re- LHA4943 activate SYNC. OPERATING TIPS To turn system off The sunload sensor, located on the top Press the ON-OFF button. center of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Rear window and outside mirror Do not put anything on or around this sen- defroster switch sor. For additional information, refer to “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39 SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

∙ When the climate system is in auto- ∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you The air conditioner system in your NISSAN matic operation and the engine coolant have selected and the outlets the air is vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de- temperature and outside air tempera- coming out do not match, select signed with the environment in mind. ture are low, the air flow outlet may de- the mode. This refrigerant does not harm the fault to defroster mode for a maximum earth’s ozone layer. ∙ When you change the air flow mode, of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a you may feel air flow from the foot out- Special charging equipment and lubricant malfunction. After the engine coolant lets for just a moment. This is not a is required when servicing your NISSAN air temperature warms up, the air flow out- malfunction. conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or let will return to foot mode and opera- lubricants will cause severe damage to tion will continue normally. your air conditioner system. For additional ∙ When the outside and interior cabin information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” temperatures are moderate to high, the in the “Technical and consumer informa- intake setting may default to turn off air tion” section of this manual. recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. You may no- It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN tice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level dealer to service your “environmentally mode, or side demist vent outlets for a friendly” air conditioner system. maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur when the previous climate setting WARNING was turned off. This is not a malfunction. The air conditioner system contains re- After the initial warm air is expelled, the frigerant under high pressure. To avoid intake will return to automatic control, personal injury, any air conditioner ser- the air flow outlet will return to previous vice should be done only by an experi- settings, and operation will continue enced technician with proper normally. To exit, press any climate con- equipment. trol button. ∙ Keep the moonroof (if so equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation. 4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems USB/iPod® CHARGING PORT ANTENNA CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

The antenna pattern is printed inside the When installing a CB, ham radio or car rear window. phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the CAUTION new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic ∙ Do not place metalized film near the parts. rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor recep- WARNING tion or noise ∙ A cellular phone should not be used ∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear for any purpose while driving so full window, be careful not to scratch or attention may be given to vehicle op- damage the rear window antenna. eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit Lightly wipe along the antenna with a the use of cellular phones while dampened soft cloth. driving. LHA4803 ∙ If you must make a call while your ve- There is a USB/iPod® charging port located hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- on the rear center console. This port will lar phone operational mode is highly charge compatible devices. recommended. Exercise extreme cau- NOTE: tion at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Only the USB connection port located ∙ If you are unable to devote full atten- below the instrument panel will allow tion to vehicle operation while talking operation of the USB/iPod® devices on the phone, pull off the road to a through the audio system. safe location and stop your vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41 CAUTION ∙ Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules. ∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. ∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. ∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. ∙ For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43 5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-4 Parking brake ...... 5-25 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...... 5-4 Pedal type ...... 5-26 Three-way catalyst ...... 5-5 Switch type (models with electronic Tire Pressure Monitoring System parking brake system)...... 5-26 (TPMS)...... 5-5 Automatic brake hold (if so equipped) ...... 5-28 Avoiding collision and rollover ...... 5-9 How to activate/deactivate the Off-roadrecovery...... 5-9 automatic brake hold function ...... 5-29 Rapid air pressure loss ...... 5-10 How to use the automatic brake hold Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...... 5-11 function ...... 5-30 Driving safety precautions ...... 5-11 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so equipped) . . . 5-31 Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-13 System operation ...... 5-32 Operating range...... 5-14 Turning the Traffic Sign Recognition Push-button ignition switch positions ...... 5-14 (TSR) system on and off ...... 5-33 Emergency engine shut off ...... 5-15 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-33 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery System malfunction ...... 5-33 discharge ...... 5-16 System maintenance...... 5-34 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 5-16 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so Before starting the engine...... 5-17 equipped) ...... 5-34 Starting the engine ...... 5-17 LDW system operation ...... 5-35 Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...... 5-18 How to enable/disable the LDW system .....5-36 Driving the vehicle ...... 5-18 LDW system limitations...... 5-36 Continuously Variable Transmission System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-37 (CVT) ...... 5-18 System malfunction ...... 5-38 System maintenance...... 5-38 Precautions on cruise control...... 5-63 Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) Cruise control operations...... 5-64 (if so equipped) ...... 5-39 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles I-LI system operation ...... 5-40 without ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped)...... 5-66 How to enable/disable the I-LI system...... 5-41 How to select the cruise control mode ...... 5-68 I-LI system limitations ...... 5-42 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-43 mode ...... 5-68 System malfunction ...... 5-44 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control System maintenance...... 5-44 mode operation ...... 5-70 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped)...... 5-45 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control BSW system operation ...... 5-47 mode switches...... 5-71 How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-48 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control BSW system limitations...... 5-49 mode limitations ...... 5-78 BSW driving situations ...... 5-50 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-82 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-53 System maintenance...... 5-84 System maintenance...... 5-54 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-55 control mode...... 5-85 RCTA system operation...... 5-56 ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped)...... 5-90 How to enable/disable the RCTA ProPILOT Assist system operation ...... 5-92 system ...... 5-58 Turning the conventional (fixed speed) RCTA system limitations...... 5-59 cruise control mode on...... 5-95 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-61 Operating ProPILOT Assist ...... 5-96 System maintenance...... 5-62 How to enable/disable the Steering Cruise control (if so equipped) ...... 5-63 Assist ...... 5-101 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) Turning the AEB with Pedestrian (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist)...... 5-102 Detection system ON/OFF ...... 5-140 Steering Assist ...... 5-113 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system Conventional (fixed speed) cruise limitations...... 5-141 control mode...... 5-120 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-143 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (if so equipped) . 5-124 System malfunction ...... 5-144 RAB system operation...... 5-125 System maintenance...... 5-144 Turning the RAB system on/off ...... 5-126 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW). . . 5-146 RAB system limitations ...... 5-127 I-FCW system operation ...... 5-148 System malfunction ...... 5-128 Turning the I-FCW system on/off ...... 5-149 System maintenance...... 5-129 I-FCW system limitations ...... 5-150 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-155 (if so equipped) ...... 5-129 System malfunction ...... 5-156 AEB system operation ...... 5-131 System maintenance...... 5-156 Turning the AEB system on/off ...... 5-132 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) ...... 5-157 AEB system limitations ...... 5-133 Intelligent Driver Alertness system System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-134 operation...... 5-158 System malfunction ...... 5-135 How to enable/disable the Intelligent System maintenance...... 5-135 Driver Alertness (I-DA) system ...... 5-159 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) Pedestrian Detection (if so equipped) ...... 5-137 system limitations...... 5-159 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system Break-in schedule ...... 5-160 operation...... 5-138 Fuel efficient driving tips ...... 5-161 Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-162 Sonar limitations ...... 5-177 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ...... 5-162 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-177 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-165 System maintenance...... 5-178 Power steering ...... 5-166 Cold weather driving ...... 5-178 Brake system...... 5-167 Freeing a frozen door lock ...... 5-178 Brake precautions ...... 5-167 Antifreeze ...... 5-178 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-168 Battery...... 5-178 Brake Assist ...... 5-169 Draining of coolant water...... 5-179 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ...... 5-169 Tire equipment ...... 5-179 Brake force distribution...... 5-171 Special winter equipment ...... 5-179 Chassis Control ...... 5-172 Driving on snow or ice ...... 5-179 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC)...... 5-172 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ...... 5-180 Active Ride Control (ARC) ...... 5-172 Active noise cancellation/Active sound Hill start assist system...... 5-173 enhancement (if so equipped) ...... 5-181 Rear Sonar System (RSS) (if so equipped) ...... 5-173 Active noise cancellation ...... 5-181 System operation ...... 5-174 How to enable/disable the sonar Active sound enhancement ...... 5-181 system ...... 5-176 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) 2. Set the air recirculation button to off and the fan control dial to ∙ Do not leave children or adults who WARNING would normally require the assis- high to circulate the air. tance of others alone in your vehicle. ∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they ∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con- Pets should also not be left alone. contain colorless and odorless carbon nections must pass to a trailer They could accidentally injure them- monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan- through the seal on the trunk lid or the selves or others through inadvertent gerous. It can cause unconsciousness body, follow the manufacturer’s rec- operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, or death. ommendation to prevent carbon sunny days, temperatures in a closed ∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are monoxide entry into the vehicle. vehicle could quickly become high entering the vehicle, drive with all ∙ The exhaust system and body should enough to cause severe or possibly windows fully open, and have the ve- fatal injuries to people or animals. be inspected by a qualified mechanic hicle inspected immediately. whenever: ∙ Closely supervise children when they ∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces a. The vehicle is raised for service. are around cars to prevent them from such as a garage. playing and becoming locked in the b. You suspect that exhaust fumes trunk where they could be seriously ∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en- are entering into the passenger injured. Keep the car locked, with the gine running for any extended length compartment. rear seatback and trunk lid securely of time. latched when not in use, and prevent c. You notice a change in the sound of ∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, the exhaust system. children’s access to car keys. doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise ex- d. You have had an accident involving haust gases could be drawn into the damage to the exhaust system, passenger compartment. If you must underbody, or rear of the vehicle. drive with one of these open, follow these precautions: 1. Open all the windows.

5-4 Starting and driving THREE-WAY CATALYST ∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- placard or tire inflation pressure label, you The three-way catalyst is an emission con- tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or should determine the proper tire inflation trol device installed in the exhaust system. electrical systems can cause overrich pressure for those tires.) Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, As an added safety feature, your vehicle are burned at high temperatures to help causing it to overheat. Do not keep has been equipped with a Tire Pressure reduce pollutants. driving if the engine misfires, or if no- Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates ticeable loss of performance or other a low tire pressure telltale when one or unusual operating conditions are de- WARNING more of your tires is significantly under- tected. Have the vehicle inspected inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire ∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- promptly. It is recommended that you tem are very hot. Keep people, ani- visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. pressure telltale illuminates, you should mals or flammable materials away stop and check your tires as soon as pos- from the exhaust system ∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low sible, and inflate them to the proper pres- components. fuel level. Running out of fuel could sure. Driving on a significantly under- cause the engine to misfire, damag- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and ∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over ing the three-way catalyst. flammable materials such as dry can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also grass, waste paper or rags. They may ∙ Do not race the engine while warming reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, ignite and cause a fire. it up. and may affect the vehicle’s handling and ∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to stopping ability. CAUTION start the engine. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is ∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING from leaded gasoline will seriously re- the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor- duce the three-way catalyst’s ability SYSTEM (TPMS) rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi- to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a mended by the vehicle manufacturer on TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure when the system is not operating properly. label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- size than the size indicated on the vehicle bined with the low tire pressure telltale. Starting and driving 5-5 When the system detects a malfunction, ∙ The TPMS will activate only when the ∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn- the telltale will flash for approximately one vehicle is driven at speeds above ing does not appear if the low tire pres- minute and then remain continuously illu- 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may sure warning light illuminates to indi- minated. This sequence will continue upon not detect a sudden drop in tire pres- cate a TPMS malfunction. subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as sure (for example, a flat tire while driv- ∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending the malfunction exists. When the malfunc- ing). on the heat caused by the vehicle’s option indicator is illuminated, the system ∙ The low tire pressure warning light does eration and the outside temperature. may not be able to detect or signal low tire not automatically turn off when the tire Do not reduce the tire pressure after pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions pressure is adjusted on all four tires. Af- driving because the tire pressure rises may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- after driving. Low outside temperature ter all four tires are inflated to the rec- ing the installation of replacement or alter- can lower the temperature of the air ommended pressure, the vehicle must nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that inside the tire which can cause a lower be driven at speeds above 16 mph prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- tire inflation pressure. This may cause (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction the low tire pressure warning light to off the low tire pressure warning light. telltale after replacing one or more tires or illuminate. If the warning light illumi- Use a tire pressure gauge to check the wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the nates, check the tire pressure for all four tire pressure. replacement or alternate tires and wheels tires. allow the TPMS to continue to function ∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn- ∙ The Tire and Loading Information label properly. ing appears in the vehicle information is located in the driver’s door opening. display when the low tire pressure Additional information: warning light is illuminated and low tire ∙ You can also check the tire pressure of all tires (except the spare) on the vehicle ∙ When replacing a wheel without the pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning turns off when information display screen. The order of TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS the tire pressure figures displayed on does not monitor the tire pressure of the low tire pressure warning light turns off. the screen corresponds with the actual the spare tire. order of the tire position. ∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. 5-6 Starting and driving For additional information, refer to “Low tire ∙ If the low tire pressure warning light ∙ When replacing a wheel without the pressure warning light” in the “Instruments illuminates while driving, avoid sud- TPMS such as the spare tire, when a and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Moni- den steering maneuvers or abrupt spare tire is mounted or a wheel is toring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off replaced, tire pressure will not be indi- emergency” section and “Tire pressure” in the road to a safe location and stop cated, the TPMS will not function and the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- the low tire pressure warning light will ing with underinflated tires may per- flash for approximately 1 minute. The WARNING manently damage the tires and in- light will remain on after 1 minute. It is ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect crease the likelihood of tire failure. recommended that you visit a NISSAN electric medical equipment. Those Serious vehicle damage could occur dealer for tire replacement and/or who use a pacemaker should contact and may lead to an accident and could system resetting. result in serious personal injury. the electric medical equipment ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- Check the tire pressure for all four manufacturer for the possible influ- nally specified by NISSAN could affect tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the ences before use. the proper operation of the TPMS. recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Infor- ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol mation label to turn the low tire pres- tire sealant into the tires, as this may sure warning light off. If you have a flat cause a malfunction of the tire pres- tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon sure sensors. as possible. (For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of CAUTION emergency” section for changing a Do not place metalized film or any flat tire.) metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Starting and driving 5-7 Some devices and transmitters may tem- FCC Notice: TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert porarily interfere with the operation of the For USA: TPMS and cause the low tire pressure When adding air to an under-inflated tire, warning light to illuminate. This device complies with Part 15 of the the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- visual and audible signals outside the ve- Some examples are: lowing two conditions: (1) This device hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec- ∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi- may not cause harmful interference, and ommended COLD tire pressure. lar radio frequencies are near the ve- (2) this device must accept any interfer- Vehicle set-up hicle. ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen- 1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place. cies is being used in or near the vehicle. NOTE: 2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. ∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or Changes or modifications not expressly a DC/AC converter is being used in or approved by the party responsible for 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po- near the vehicle. compliance could void the user’s author- sition. Do not start the engine. The low tire pressure warning light may ity to operate the equipment. Operation illuminate in the following cases: For Canada: 1. Add air to the tire. ∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel This device complies with Industry and tire without TPMS. 2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica- Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). tors will start flashing. ∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the Operation is subject to the following two ID has not been registered. conditions: (1) this device may not cause 3. When the designated pressure is interference, and (2) this device must ac- reached, the horn beeps once and the ∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by cept any interference, including interfer- hazard indicators stop flashing. NISSAN. ence that may cause undesired opera- 4. Perform the above steps for each tire. tion of the device. ∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem 5-8 Starting and driving on the tire briefly to release pressure. ∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op- Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving When the pressure reaches the des- erate due to TPMS interference, move when tired. Never drive when under the in- ignated pressure, the horn beeps the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- once. or forward and try again. scription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your ∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, within approximately 15 seconds af- tire pressure gauge. seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi- AVOIDING COLLISION AND tem” section of this manual, and also in- cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is ROLLOVER struct your passengers to do so. not operating. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in ∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy- WARNING collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, Fill Tire Alert under the following con- Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe an unbelted or improperly belted person ditions: and prudent manner may result in loss is significantly more likely to be injured – If there is interference from an exter- of control or an accident. or killed than a person properly wearing nal device or transmitter. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. a seat belt. – The air pressure from the inflation Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive OFF-ROAD RECOVERY device is not sufficient to inflate the speed, high speed cornering, or sudden tire. steering maneuvers, because these driving While driving, the right side or left side practices could cause you to lose control of wheels may unintentionally leave the road – There is a malfunction in the TPMS. your vehicle. surface. If this occurs, maintain control of – There is a malfunction in the horn or As with any vehicle, loss of control could the vehicle by following the procedure be- hazard indicators. result in a collision with other vehicles or low. Please note that this procedure is only objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, a general guide. The vehicle must be driven – The identification code of the tire particularly if the loss of control causes as appropriate based on the conditions of pressure sensor is not registered to the vehicle to slide sideways. the vehicle, road and traffic. the system. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. – The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low. 2. Do not apply the brakes.

Starting and driving 5-9 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS WARNING wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course. Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can The following actions can increase the occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged chance of losing control of the vehicle if 4. When appropriate, slowly release the due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air there is a sudden loss of tire air pres- accelerator pedal to gradually slow the pressure loss can also be caused by driving sure. Losing control of the vehicle may vehicle. on under-inflated tires. cause a collision and result in personal 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the injury. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han- vehicle to follow the road while vehicle dling and stability of the vehicle, especially ∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls speed is reduced. Do not attempt to in the direction of the flat tire. drive the vehicle back onto the road at highway speeds. surface until vehicle speed is reduced. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by ∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes. 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn maintaining the correct air pressure and ∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator the steering wheel until both tires re- visually inspecting the tires for wear and pedal. turn to the road surface. When all tires damage. For additional information, refer ∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel. are on the road surface, steer the ve- to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” hicle to stay in the appropriate driving section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. lane. air pressure or “blows-out” while driving, 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering maintain control of the vehicle by following ∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re- wheel with both hands and try to hold a the procedure below. Please note that this turn the vehicle to the road surface straight course. based on vehicle, road or traffic con- procedure is only a general guide. The ve- ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a hicle must be driven as appropriate based 3. When appropriate, slowly release the stop in a safe place off the road. on the conditions of the vehicle, road and accelerator pedal to gradually slow the traffic. vehicle. 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible. 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle. 5-10 Starting and driving 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! ∙ Drive carefully when off the road and and contact a roadside emergency That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, avoid dangerous areas. Every person service to change the tire. For addi- prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t who drives or rides in this vehicle tional information, refer to “Changing a drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is should be seated with their seat belt flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other fastened. This will keep you and your section of this manual. physical condition. passengers in position when driving DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS over rough terrain. ∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. In- DRIVING Your NISSAN is designed for both normal stead drive either straight up or and off-road use. However, avoid driving in straight down the slopes. Off-road ve- WARNING deep water or mud as your NISSAN is hicles can tip over sideways much mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a Never drive under the influence of alco- more easily than they can forward or conventional off-road vehicle. hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream backward. reduces coordination, delays reaction Remember that 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod- ∙ Many hills are too steep for any ve- time and impairs judgement. Driving af- els are less capable than All-Wheel Drive hicle. If you drive up them, you may ter drinking alcohol increases the likeli- (AWD) models for rough road driving and stall. If you drive down them, you may hood of being involved in an accident in- extrication when stuck in deep snow or not be able to control your speed. If juring yourself and others. Additionally, if mud, or the like. you drive across them, you may roll you are injured in an accident, alcohol can over. increase the severity of the injury. Please observe the following precautions: ∙ Do not shift gears while driving on NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How- WARNING downhill grades as this could cause ever, you must choose not to drive under ∙ Spinning the front wheels on slippery loss of control of the vehicle. the influence of alcohol. Every year thou- surfaces may cause the AWD warning sands of people are injured or killed in ∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a message to display and the AWD sys- alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo- hill. At the top there could be a drop- tem to automatically switch from the cal laws vary on what is considered to be off or other hazard that could cause AWD to the 2WD mode. This could re- legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol an accident. duce the traction. Be especially care- affects all people differently and most ful when towing a trailer (AWD people underestimate the effects of alco- models). hol. Starting and driving 5-11 ∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot ∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the ∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD make it to the top of a steep hill, never steering wheel when driving off-road. equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna- attempt to turn around. Your vehicle The steering wheel could move sud- mometer (such as the dynamometers could tip or roll over. Always back denly and injure your hands. Instead used by some states for emissions straight down in R (Reverse) gear and drive with your fingers and thumbs on testing) or similar equipment even if apply brakes to control your speed. the outside of the rim. the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test fa- ∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could ∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure cility personnel that your vehicle is cause your brakes to overheat and that the driver and all passengers equipped with AWD before it is placed fade, resulting in loss of control and have their seat belts fastened. on a dynamometer. Using the wrong an accident. Apply brakes lightly and ∙ Always drive with the floor mats in test equipment may result in drive- use a low gear to control your speed. place as the floor may become hot. train damage or unexpected vehicle ∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown ∙ Lower your speed when encountering movement which could result in seri- around when driving over rough ter- strong crosswinds. With a higher cen- ous vehicle damage or personal rain. Properly secure all cargo so it will ter of gravity, your NISSAN is more af- injury. not be thrown forward and cause in- fected by strong side winds. Slower ∙ When a wheel is off the ground due to jury to you or your passengers. speeds ensure better vehicle control. an unlevel surface, do not spin the ∙ Exceeding the roof rack capacity can ∙ Do not drive beyond the performance wheel excessively. raise the center of gravity excessively capability of the tires, even with AWD ∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering and affect the handling and stability engaged. maneuvers or sudden braking may of the vehicle. ∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at- cause loss of control. ∙ Secure heavy loads in the cargo area tempt to raise two wheels off the ∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning as far forward and as low as possible. ground and shift the transmission to maneuvers, particularly at high Do not equip the vehicle with tires any drive or reverse position with the speeds. Your NISSAN vehicle has a larger than specified in this manual. engine running. Doing so may result higher center of gravity than a pas- This could cause your vehicle to roll in drivetrain damage or unexpected senger car. The vehicle is not de- over. vehicle movement which could result signed for cornering at the same in serious vehicle damage or personal speeds as passenger cars. injury.

5-12 Starting and driving PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

∙ Failure to operate this vehicle cor- WARNING rectly could result in loss of control Do not operate the push-button igni- and/or a rollover accident. tion switch while driving the vehicle ex- ∙ Always use tires of the same type, cept in an emergency. (The engine will size, brand, construction (bias, bias- stop when the ignition switch is pushed belted, or radial), and tread pattern on three consecutive times in quick suc- all four wheels. Install tire chains on cession or the ignition switch is pushed the front wheels when driving on slip- and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the pery roads and drive carefully. engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and ∙ Be sure to check the brakes immedi- serious injury. ately after driving in mud or water. For additional information, refer to “Brake precautions” in this section. LSD2645 ∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it When the ignition switch is pushed without rolls forward, backward or sideways, depressing the brake pedal, the ignition you could be injured. switch will illuminate. ∙ Whenever you drive off-road through Push the ignition switch center: sand, mud or water as deep as the ∙ Once to change to ON. wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. For additional ∙ Two times to change to OFF. information, refer to “Maintenance under severe operating conditions” in The ignition switch will automatically re- the “Maintenance and schedules” sec- turn to the LOCK position when any door is tion of this manual. either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position.

Starting and driving 5-13 The ignition lock is designed so that the The operating range of the engine start ignition switch cannot be placed in the OFF function is inside of the vehicle ᭺1 . position until the shift lever is moved to the ∙ The luggage area is not included in the P (Park) position. operating range, but the Intelligent Key When the ignition switch cannot be placed may function. in the OFF position, proceed as follows: ∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- instrument panel or inside the glove tion. box, storage bin or door pocket, the In- telligent Key may not function. 2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON ∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the position. door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function. 3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position. LSD2089 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH The shift lever can be moved from the P OPERATING RANGE POSITIONS (Park) position if the ignition switch is in LOCK (Normal parking position) the ON position and the brake pedal is The Intelligent Key functions can only be depressed. used when the Intelligent Key is within the The ignition switch can only be locked in specified operating range. this position. If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved When the Intelligent Key battery is almost The ignition switch will be unlocked when it from the LOCK position. discharged or strong radio waves are pres- is pushed to the ON position while carrying ent near the operating location, the Intelli- the Intelligent Key. Some indicators and warnings for opera- gent Key system’s operating range be- tion are displayed on the vehicle informa- comes narrower and may not function The ignition switch will lock when any door tion display. For additional information, re- properly. is opened or closed with the ignition fer to “Vehicle information display” in the switched off. “Instruments and controls” section of this If the Intelligent Key is within the operating manual. range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine. 5-14 Starting and driving ON (Normal operating position) OFF EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF This position turns on the ignition system The ignition switch is in the OFF position To shut off the engine in an emergency and electrical accessories. when the engine is turned off using the situation while driving, perform the follow- ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on ON has a battery saver feature that will ing procedure: the ignition switch. place the ignition switch in the OFF posi- ∙ Rapidly push the ignition switch three tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some AUTO ACC: consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec- time under the following conditions: With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the onds, or ∙ All doors are closed. Intelligent Key with you and the ignition ∙ Push and hold the ignition switch for switch placed from the ON position to the ∙ The shift lever is in P (Park). more than 2 seconds. OFF position, the radio can still be used for The battery saver feature will be canceled if a period of time, or until the driver’s door is any of the following occur: opened. ∙ Any door is opened. After a period of time, functions such as radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® Hands- ∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P Free Phone System may be restarted by (Park) position. pressing the POWER button/VOLUME con- ∙ The ignition switch changes position. trol knob or the key fob unlock button. For additional information, refer to the sepa- CAUTION rate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

Starting and driving 5-15 After step 3 is performed, when the NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER ignition switch is pushed without de- SYSTEM pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to the ON The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System position. will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key. 4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds If the engine fails to start using a registered after the chime sounds. The engine will key (for example, when interference is start. caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic pay- NOTE: ment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedure: ∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position or the engine is 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po- SSD0860 started by the above procedure, the sition for approximately 5 seconds. Intelligent Key battery discharge in- 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® dicator appears in the vehicle infor- LOCK position, and wait approximately BATTERY DISCHARGE mation display even when the Intelli- 10 seconds. gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® not a malfunction. To turn off the In- 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. is discharged or environmental conditions telligent Key battery discharge indi- interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, cator, touch the ignition switch with 4. Restart the engine while holding the start the engine according to the following the Intelligent Key again. device (which may have caused the in- procedure: terference) separate from the regis- ∙ If the Intelligent Key battery dis- tered key. 1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi- charge indicator appears, replace the tion. battery as soon as possible. For addi- If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on 2. Firmly apply the foot brake. tional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” a separate key ring to avoid interference 3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel- section of this manual. from other devices. ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.) 5-16 Starting and driving BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake. switch to the LOCK position. After clear. cranking the engine, release the ac- 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N celerator pedal. Crank the engine ∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil, (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. coolant, brake fluid, and windshield- with your foot off the accelerator washer fluid as frequently as possible, The starter is designed not to oper- pedal by depressing the brake pedal or at least whenever you refuel. ate if the shift lever is in any of the and pushing the ignition switch to driving positions. start the engine. If the engine starts, ∙ Check that all windows and lights are but fails to run, repeat the above pro- 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po- clean. cedure. sition. Depress the brake pedal and ∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear- push the ignition switch to start the ance and condition. Also check tires for engine. CAUTION proper inflation. Do not operate the starter for more To start the engine immediately, push than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine ∙ Lock all doors. and release the ignition switch while does not start, push the ignition switch depressing the brake pedal with the ∙ Position seat and adjust to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds ignition switch in any position. headrests/head restraints. before cranking again, otherwise the ∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors. ∙ If the engine is very hard to start in starter could be damaged. extremely cold weather or when re- ∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen- starting, depress the accelerator 4. Warm-up: gers to do likewise. pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the Allow the engine to idle for at least ∙ Check the operation of warning lights floor) and while holding, crank the en- 30 seconds after starting. Do not race when the ignition switch is pushed to gine. Release the accelerator pedal the engine while warming it up. Drive at the ON position. For additional informa- when the engine starts. a moderate speed for a short distance tion, refer to “Warning lights, indicator ∙ If the engine is very hard to start be- first, especially in cold weather. In cold lights and audible reminders” in the “In- cause it is flooded, depress the accel- weather, keep the engine running for a struments and controls” section of this erator pedal all the way to the floor minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before manual. and hold it. Push the ignition switch shutting it off. Starting and stopping to the ON position to start cranking the engine over a short period of time the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop may make the vehicle more difficult to cranking by pushing the ignition start. Starting and driving 5-17 DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever 1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE to the P (Park) position and push the you. TRANSMISSION (CVT) ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Apply the brake. WARNING NOTE: 3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON position. ∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal Care should be taken to avoid situations while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- that can lead to potential battery dis- For additional information, refer to “NISSAN tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), L (Low) or charge and potential no-start conditions Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks manual shift mode (if so equipped). such as: and adjustments” section of this manual. Always depress the brake pedal until 1. Installation or extended use of elec- shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and tronic accessories that consume bat- have an accident. tery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD ∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use players, etc.). caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has 2. The vehicle is not driven regularly warmed up. and/or only driven short distances. ∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery In these cases, the battery may need to roads. This may cause a loss of be charged to maintain battery health. control. REMOTE ENGINE START (if so ∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R equipped) (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D Vehicles started with the Remote Engine (Drive) position while the vehicle is re- Start require the ignition switch to be versing. This could cause an accident placed in the ON position before the shift or damage the transmission. lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON position, follow these steps:

5-18 Starting and driving CAUTION ∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission. ∙ To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically LSD3073 LSD3074 controlled to produce maximum power 1. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) and smooth operation. Starting the vehicle 2. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) when Follow these procedures for maximum ve- 1. After starting the engine, fully depress shaded and Intelligent Lane Interven- hicle performance and driving enjoyment. the foot brake pedal before moving the tion (I-LI) when solid shift lever out of the P (Park) position. NOTE: 3. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) The Continuously Variable Transmis- Engine power may be automatically re- sion is designed so the foot brake duced to protect the CVT if the engine pedal MUST be depressed before speed increases quickly when driving on shifting from P (Park) to any drive po- slippery roads or while being tested on sition while the ignition switch is in some dynamometers. the ON position.The shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK position.

Starting and driving 5-19 2. A screen is displayed for a period of WARNING CAUTION time that indicates the status of the driving aid functions (if so equipped). ∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal ∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- to the N (Neutral) position while driv- – AEB, LDW, and BSW are enabled tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), L (Low) or ing. Coasting with the transmission in when the specified driving aid is manual shift mode (if so equipped). the N (Neutral) position may cause se- shaded. Always depress the brake pedal until rious damage to the transmission. shifting is completed. Failure to do so – I-LI is enabled when the driving aid is ∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve- could cause you to lose control and solid. hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an have an accident. uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by – Use the ᭺1 or ᭺2 button ∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use depressing the accelerator pedal. The to navigate the settings screen. For caution when shifting into a forward foot brake should be used for this additional information, refer to “How or reverse gear before the engine has purpose. to use the vehicle information dis- warmed up. play” in the “Instruments and con- ∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery trols” section of this manual. roads. This may cause a loss of 3. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed control. and move the shift lever to a driving ∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R position. (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D 4. Release the foot brake, then gradually (Drive) position while the vehicle is restart the vehicle in motion. versing. This could cause an accident 5. Stop the vehicle completely before or damage the transmission. moving the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

5-20 Starting and driving WARNING R (Reverse) Apply the parking brake if the shift lever CAUTION is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause To prevent transmission damage, use the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only away and result in serious personal in- when the vehicle is completely jury or property damage. stopped. Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. P (Park) Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) CAUTION position. The brake pedal must be de- To prevent transmission damage, use pressed to move the shift lever from P the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to LSD2643 when the vehicle is completely R (Reverse). stopped. To move the shift lever: N (Neutral) Press the button ᭺A while depressing Use the P (Park) shift lever position when Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- the brake pedal the vehicle is parked or when starting the gaged. The engine can be started in this engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and Press the button ᭺A to shift stopped. The brake pedal should be de- restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is pressed to move the shift lever from N moving. Shift without pressing the button ᭺A (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a D (Drive) Shifting hill, apply the parking brake first, then move Use this position for all normal forward the shift lever into the P (Park) position. driving. After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

Starting and driving 5-21 L(Low) When canceling the manual shift mode, push the drive sport mode switch. The Use this position for engine braking on steep downhill gradients/climbing steep transmission returns to the normal driving slopes and whenever approaching sharp mode. When you pull the paddle shifter bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in while in the D (Drive) position with the drive any other circumstances. sport mode switch pushed, the transmission will shift to the upper or lower range temporarily. The transmission will automatically return to the drive sport mode after a short period of time. If you want to return to the drive sport mode manually, pull and hold the paddle shifter for about 1.5 seconds.

LSD2914 In the manual shift mode, the shift range is Manual shift mode (if so displayed on the position indicator in the equipped) meter. Shift ranges up or down one by one as When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi- follows: tion and the drive sport mode switch is pushed, the transmission is ready for the 1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7 ⇔ 8 manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by pulling the right-side M8 (8th) and M7 (7th) or left-side paddle shifter. Use this position for all normal forward When shifting up, pull the right side paddle driving at highway speeds. shifter (+) ᭺B . The transmission shifts to the M6 (6th) and M5 (5th) higher range. Use this position when driving up long When shifting down, pull the left side slopes or for engine braking when driving paddle shifter (Ϫ) ᭺A . The transmission down long slopes. shifts to the lower range. 5-22 Starting and driving M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd) ∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected Use for hill climbing or engine braking on gear. This helps maintain driving per- downhill grades. formance and reduces the chance of M1 (1st) vehicle damage or loss of control. Use this position when climbing steep hills ∙ In the manual shift mode, the trans- slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, mission may shift up automatically to sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak- a higher range than selected if the ing on steep downhill grades. engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the trans- ∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds mission automatically shifts down for extended periods of time in lower and shifts to 1st gear before the ve- than the 8th range. This reduces fuel hicle comes to a stop. economy. ∙ Continuously Variable Transmission LSD2644 When shifting up (CVT) operation is limited to automatic drive mode when CVT fluid tempera- Shift lock release Use the + (up) side paddle shifter. (Shifts to ture is extremely low even if manual If the battery charge is low or discharged, higher range.) shift mode is selected. This is not a mal- the shift lever may not be moved from the When shifting down function. When CVT fluid warms up, P (Park) position even with the brake pedal manual mode can be selected. depressed and the shift lever button Use the Ϫ (down) side paddle shifter. (Shifts ∙ When the CVT fluid temperature is high, pressed. to lower range.) the shift range may upshift in lower It will be necessary to jump start or have When canceling the manual shift mode rpm than usual. This is not a malfunc- your battery charged. For additional infor- tion. mation, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In To cancel manual shift mode, push the case of emergency” section of this manual. drive sport mode switch on the shift lever Contact a NISSAN dealer or a professional or press and hold either paddle shifter. towing service.

Starting and driving 5-23 To move the shift lever, complete the fol- Each time the engine is started, or when lowing procedure: the shift lever is shifted to any position other than D (Drive), the drive sport mode 1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK will automatically turn off. position. 2. Apply the parking brake. Accelerator downshift — in D (Drive) position — 3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift For passing or hill climbing, depress the lock release cover. accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts ∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also the transmission down into a lower gear, be used. depending on the vehicle speed. 4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift High fluid temperature protection lock release slot and push down. mode LSD3250 5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) Drive sport mode This transmission has a high fluid tem- position while holding down the shift perature protection mode. If the fluid tem- lock release. Drive sport mode switch perature becomes too high (for example, If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P When the drive sport mode switch is when climbing steep grades in high tem- (Park), have the transmission checked as pushed with the shift lever in the D (Drive) peratures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under soon as possible. It is recommended that position, the drive sport mode indicator in some conditions, vehicle speed will be de- you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. the instrument panel illuminates. For addi- creased automatically to reduce the tional information, refer to “Drive sport chance of transmission damage. Vehicle WARNING mode indicator” in the “Instruments and speed can be controlled with the accelera- controls” section of this manual. If the shift lever cannot be moved from tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed the P (Park) position while the engine is Use the drive sport mode when you need may be limited. running and the brake pedal is de- improved engine braking. pressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause To turn off the drive sport mode, push the an accident injuring yourself and others. drive sport mode switch again. The drive sport mode indicator will turn off. 5-24 Starting and driving PARKING BRAKE

Fail-safe WARNING WARNING If the vehicle is driven under extreme When the high fluid temperature pro- ∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re- conditions, such as excessive wheel tection mode or fail-safe operation oc- leased before driving. Failure to do so spinning and subsequent hard braking, curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re- can cause brake failure and lead to an the fail-safe system may be activated. duced. The reduced speed may be lower accident. than other traffic, which could increase The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) ∙ Do not release the parking brake from the chance of a collision. Be especially may come on to indicate the fail-safe outside the vehicle. mode is activated. For additional infor- careful when driving. If necessary, pull mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator to the side of the road at a safe place ∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con- and allow the transmission to return to the parking brake. When parking, be trols” section of this manual. This will oc- normal operation, or have it repaired if sure the parking brake is fully engaged. cur even if all electrical circuits are func- necessary. tioning properly. In this case, place the ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death ignition switch in the OFF position and through unintended operation of the wait for 10 seconds. Then push the vehicle and/or its systems, do not switch back to the ON position. The ve- leave children, people who require the hicle should return to its normal operat- assistance of others or pets unat- ing condition. If it does not return to its tended in your vehicle. Additionally, normal operating condition, have the the temperature inside a closed ve- transmission checked. It is recom- hicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a signifi- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer cant risk of injury or death to people for this service. and pets.

Starting and driving 5-25 The electronic parking brake is automatically released as soon as the vehicle starts and the accelerator pedal is depressed with the driver’s seat belt fastened.

WARNING Before leaving the vehicle, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and check that the electronic parking brake warning light is illuminated to confirm that the electronic parking brake is applied. The electronic parking brake warning light will remain on for a period of time after the driver’s door is locked. LSD0158 LSD3210 PEDAL TYPE SWITCH TYPE (models with CAUTION electronic parking brake system) To engage: Firmly depress the parking When parking in an area where the out- brake. The electronic parking brake can be ap- side temperature is below 32°F (0°C), the To release: plied or released automatically or by oper- parking brake, if applied, may freeze in ating the parking brake switch. place and may be difficult to release. 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. Automatic operation For safe parking, it is recommended 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- that you place the shift lever in the P sition. The electronic parking brake will apply au- (Park) position and securely block the tomatically if the ignition switch is placed in wheels. 3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal the OFF position when the brake force is and it will release. maintained by the automatic brake hold 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn- function. ing light goes out.

5-26 Starting and driving NOTE: ∙ If the ignition switch is placed in the NOTE: OFF position when the brake force is ∙ To keep the electronic parking brake ∙ A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is maintained by the automatic brake released after the engine is turned driven without releasing the parking hold function, the electronic parking off, place the ignition switch in the brake. For additional information, re- brake will apply automatically. OFF position, depress the brake pedal fer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and push down the parking brake Manual operation and audible reminders” in the “Instru- switch before opening the driver’s The electronic parking brake will not be au- ments and controls” section of this door. tomatically applied if the engine is stopped manual. ∙ If a malfunction occurs in the elec- without using the ignition switch (for ex- ∙ While the electronic parking brake is tronic parking brake system (for example, by engine stalling). In such a case, applied or released, an operating ample, due to battery discharge), it is you have to apply the parking brake manu- sound is heard from the lower side of recommended that you visit a NISSAN ally. the rear seat. This is normal and does dealer. To apply: Pull the switch up ᭺1 . The indica- not indicate a malfunction. ∙ If the shift lever is moved to the P tor light ᭺A will illuminate. ∙ When the electronic parking brake is (Park) position when the brake force To release: With the ignition switch in the frequently applied and released in a is maintained by the automatic brake ON position, depress the brake pedal and short period of time, the parking hold function, the electronic parking push the switch down ᭺2 . The indicator brake may not operate in order to brake will apply automatically. light ᭺A will turn off. prevent the parking brake system from overheating. If this occurs, oper- ∙ If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened Before driving, check that the electronic ate the electronic parking brake when the brake force is maintained parking brake indicator light ( or PARK) switch again after waiting approxi- by the automatic brake hold function, goes out. For additional information, refer mately 1 minute. the electronic parking brake will ap- to “Warning lights, indicator lights and au- ply automatically. ∙ If the electronic parking brake must dible reminders” in the “Instruments and be applied while driving in an emer- controls” section of this manual. gency, pull up and hold the parking brake switch. When you release the parking brake switch, the parking brake will be released. Starting and driving 5-27 AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD (if so equipped)

∙ While pulling up the electronic park- The automatic brake hold function main- ∙ Be sure to deactivate the automatic ing brake switch during driving, the tains the braking force without the driver brake hold function when using a car parking brake is applied and a chime having to depress the brake pedal when wash or towing your vehicle. sounds. The electronic parking brake the vehicle is stopped at a traffic light or indicator light in the meter and in the intersection. As soon as the driver de- ∙ Make sure to place the shift lever in parking brake switch illuminates. presses the accelerator pedal again, the the P (Park) position and apply the This does not indicate a malfunction. automatic brake hold function is deacti- parking brake when parking your vehicle or loading luggage. Failure to do The electronic parking brake indica- vated and the braking force is released. The so could cause the vehicle to move or tor light in the meter and in the park- operating status of the automatic brake ing brake switch turns off when the roll away unexpectedly and result in hold can be displayed on the vehicle infor- parking brake is released. serious personal injury or property mation display. damage. ∙ When pulling the electronic parking brake switch up with the ignition WARNING ∙ If any of the following conditions oc- switch in the OFF or AUTO ACC posi- cur, the automatic brake hold function ∙ The automatic brake hold function is tion, the parking brake switch indica- may not function. Have the system not designed to hold the vehicle on a tor light will continue to illuminate for checked promptly. It is recommended steep hill or slippery road. Never use a short period of time. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this the automatic brake hold when the service. Failure to operate the vehicle vehicle is stopped on a steep hill or in accordance with these conditions slippery road. Failure to do so may could cause the vehicle to move or roll cause the vehicle to move. away unexpectedly and result in seri- ∙ When the automatic brake hold func- ous personal injury or property tion is activated but fails to maintain damage. the vehicle at a standstill, depress the – A warning message appears in the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. If the vehicle information display. vehicle unexpectedly moves due to outside conditions, the chime may – The indicator light on the auto- sound and automatic brake hold matic brake hold switch does not warning may illuminate in the vehicle illuminate when the switch is information display. pushed.

5-28 Starting and driving ∙ The automatic brake hold function How to activate the automatic will not be activated if the Vehicle Dy- brake hold function namic Control (VDC) OFF indicator 1. With the ignition switch in the ON posi- light, electronic parking brake warn- tion, push the automatic brake hold ing light or master warning light illu- switch ᭺1 . The indicator light on the au- minate and the chassis control sys- tomatic brake hold switch ᭺2 illumi- tem fault message appears in the nates. vehicle information display. 2. When the automatic brake hold func- ∙ To maintain the braking force to keep tion goes into standby, the automatic the vehicle to a standstill, a noise may brake hold indicator light (white) illumi- be heard. This is not a malfunction. nates. To use the automatic brake hold function, LSD3211 the following conditions need to be met: HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE ∙ The driver’s seat belt is fastened. THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD ∙ The electronic parking brake is re- FUNCTION leased. For additional information on activating ∙ The shift lever is not in the P (Park) posi- and deactivating the automatic brake hold tion. function, refer to the instructions outlined in this section. ∙ The vehicle is not parked on a steep hill.

NOTE: The automatic brake hold function resets to OFF every time the ignition switch is switched from the OFF position to the ON position.

Starting and driving 5-29 How to deactivate the automatic HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC Parking brake hold function BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION When the shift lever is in the P (Park) posi- While the automatic brake hold function is For additional information on using the au- tion with the brake force maintained by the activated, push the automatic brake hold tomatic brake hold function, refer to the automatic brake hold function, the parking switch to turn off the automatic brake hold instructions outlined in this section. brake will automatically be applied and the indicator light and deactivate the auto- brake force of the automatic brake hold will matic brake hold function. To deactivate To maintain braking force be released. The automatic brake hold in- the automatic brake hold function while automatically dicator light turns off. When the parking the brake force has been maintained by brake is applied with the brake force main- the automatic brake hold function, depress With the automatic brake hold function ac- tained by the automatic brake hold func- the brake pedal and push the automatic tivated and the automatic brake hold indi- tion, the brake force of the automatic brake brake hold switch. cator light (white) illuminated on the meter, hold will be released. The automatic brake depress the braking pedal to stop the ve- hold indicator light turns off. WARNING hicle. The brake force is automatically NOTE: Make sure to firmly depress and hold maintained without your foot depressed the brake pedal when turning off the on the brake pedal. While the brake hold is ∙ Under the following conditions, the automatic brake hold function while maintained, the automatic brake hold indi- parking brake will automatically be the brake force is applied. When the au- cator light (green) illuminates on the meter. applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold function is deacti- To start the vehicle from a tomatic brake hold will be released: vated, the brake force will be released. standstill – The braking force is applied by the This could cause the vehicle to move or automatic brake hold function for roll away unexpectedly. Failure to pre- With the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N 3 minutes or longer. vent the vehicle from rolling may result (Neutral) position, depress the accelerator – The driver’s seat belt is unfas- in serious personal injury or property pedal while the brake force is maintained. tened. damage. The brake force will automatically be released to restart the vehicle. – The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. The automatic brake hold indicator light (white) on the meter illuminates and the – If a malfunction occurs in the au- automatic brake hold returns to standby. tomatic brake hold function. 5-30 Starting and driving TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) (if so equipped)

∙ When the vehicle stops, but the brake WARNING force is not automatically applied, depress the brake pedal firmly until the The TSR system is only intended to be a automatic brake hold indicator light support device to provide the driver (green) illuminates. with information. It is not a replacement for the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and drive safely at all times.

NOTE: If the system detects a school zone speed limit, the speed displayed will au- LSD3212 tomatically change to the lower school The TSR system provides the driver with zone speed. information about the most recently detected speed limit. The system captures the road sign information with the multi- sensing front camera unit ᭺1 located on the windshield in front of the inside rearview mirror and displays the detected signs in the vehicle information display. For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, the speed limit displayed is based on a combination of navigation system data and live camera recognition. TSR information is always displayed at the top of the vehicle information display, and optionally in the main central area of the display screen. Starting and driving 5-31 CAUTION ∙ The TSR system is intended as an aid to careful driving. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and observe all road regulations that currently apply, including looking out for road signs. ∙ The TSR system may not function properly under the following conditions: – When the road sign is not clearly visible, for example, due to dam- LSD3330 LSD3331 age or weather conditions. SYSTEM OPERATION ᭺A Speed sign detected (in Canada) – When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the multi- The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system ᭺B Speed sign detected (in USA) sensing camera unit. displays the following types of road signs: ᭺C Speed sign detected (no speed limit – When the headlights are not bright detected) due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly. ᭺D “Do not pass” sign detected – When strong light enters the cam- E ᭺ School speed limit sign era unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) – When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

5-32 Starting and driving – In areas not covered by the naviga- SYSTEM TEMPORARILY tion system. UNAVAILABLE – If there are deviations in relation to If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight the navigation, for example due to under high temperature conditions (over changes in the road routing. approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then started, the TSR system may be deacti- – When overtaking buses or trucks vated automatically. The “Unavailable: High with speed stickers. Camera Temperature” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Action to take: When the interior temperature is reduced, LSD3243 the TSR system will resume operating au- TURNING THE TRAFFIC SIGN tomatically. RECOGNITION (TSR) SYSTEM ON SYSTEM MALFUNCTION AND OFF If the TSR system malfunctions, it will be Perform the following steps to enable or turned off automatically and the system disable the TSR system. “Malfunction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information dis- Action to take: play. Use the button to select If the TSR “Malfunction” message appears, “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK pull of the road at a safe location and stop button. the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the TSR “Malfunction” mes- 2. Select “Speed Limit Sign” and press the sage continues to appear, have the system OK button to turn the system on or off. checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Starting and driving 5-33 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) (if so equipped)

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately The TSR system uses the same multi- 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only sensing front camera unit that is used by when the lane markings are clearly visible the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system, on the road. located in front of the interior rearview mirror. For additional information, refer to ”Sys- The LDW system monitors the lane mark- tem maintenance” in the “Lane Departure ers on the traveling lane using the camera Warning (LDW)” section. unit ᭺A located above the inside mirror. The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. For additional information, refer to “LDW system operation” in this section. LSD3213 WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

5-34 Starting and driving LDW SYSTEM OPERATION The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LSD3291 Starting and driving 5-35 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Lane” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Lane Departure Warning” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Starting and driving 5-37 When the interior temperature is reduced, in the vehicle information display, have the the LDW system will resume operating au- system checked. It is recommended that tomatically. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions: ∙ When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.) ∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). LSD3216 After the above conditions have finished SYSTEM MAINTENANCE and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume. The lane camera unit ᭺1 for the LDW sys- SYSTEM MALFUNCTION tem is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW sys- If the LDW system malfunctions, it will can- tem and prevent a system malfunction, be cel automatically and “Not Available Sys- sure to observe the following: tem Malfunction” will appear in the vehicle information display. If “Not Available Sys- ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. tem Malfunction” appears in the vehicle in- ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans- formation display, pull off the road to a safe parent material) or install an accessory location and stop the vehicle. Place the near the camera unit. shift lever in the P (Park) position and the ignition switch in the OFF position and restart the engine/motor. If “Not Available System Malfunction” continues to appear 5-38 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION (I-LI) (if so equipped)

∙ Do not place reflective materials, such ∙ The I-LI system is primarily intended as white paper or a mirror, on the instru- for use on well-developed freeways or ment panel. The reflection of sunlight highways. It may not detect the lane may adversely affect the camera unit’s markers in certain road, weather, or capability of detecting the lane mark- driving conditions. ers. The I-LI system must be turned on with the ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with around the camera unit. Do not touch ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel, ev- the camera lens or remove the screw ery time the ignition is placed in the ON located on the camera unit. If the cam- position. era unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a The I-LI system will operate when the ve- NISSAN dealer. hicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only LSD3213 when the lane markings are clearly visible WARNING on the road. Failure to follow the warnings and in- The I-LI system warns the driver when the structions for proper use of the I-LI sys- vehicle has left the center of the traveling tem could result in serious injury or lane with an indicator and a steering wheel death. vibration. The system helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of ∙ The I-LI system will not steer the ve- the traveling lane by applying the brakes to hicle or prevent loss of control. It is the the left or right wheels individually (for a driver’s responsibility to stay alert, short period of time). drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the The I-LI system monitors the lane markers vehicle at all times. on the traveling lane using the camera unit ᭺A located above the inside mirror.

Starting and driving 5-39 ᭺1 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator ᭺2 Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indicator (if so equipped) ᭺3 ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION The I-LI system operates above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator (orange) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane. To turn on the I-LI system, push the ProPI- LOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPI- LOT Assist) on the steering wheel after starting the engine/motor. The I-LI indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch again to turn off the I-LI system. The I-LI indicator will turn off.

LSD3309 5-40 Starting and driving HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I-LI system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Lane” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Lane Departure Prevention” and press the OK button. 4. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system on or off.

NOTE: When Lane Departure Prevention is enabled in the settings menu, turning the ProPILOT Assist system (if so equipped) on will activate the I-LI system at the same time. If Lane Departure Prevention is not enabled in the settings menu, I-LI will automatically activate when the Pro- PILOT Assist system is “SET.” For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in this section.

LSD3215 Starting and driving 5-41 I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ∙ The I-LI system will not operate at – When the vehicle is equipped with speeds below approximately 37 mph nonoriginal brake parts or suspen- WARNING (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane sion parts. markers. Listed below are the system limitations – When you are towing a trailer or for the I-LI system. Failure to follow the ∙ Do not use the I-LI system under the other vehicle. warnings and instructions for proper following conditions as it may not – On roads where there are multiple use of the I-LI system could result in function properly: serious injury or death. parallel lane markers; lane mark- – During bad weather (rain, fog, ers that are faded or not painted ∙ The I-LI system may activate if you snow, etc.). clearly; yellow painted lane mark- change lanes without first activating ers; non-standard lane markers; or – When driving on slippery roads, your turn signal or, for example, if a lane markers covered with water, such as on ice or snow. construction zone directs traffic to dirt, snow, etc. cross an existing lane marker. If this – When driving on winding or un- – On roads where discontinued lane occurs you may need to apply correc- even roads. tive steering to complete your lane markers are still detectable. – When there is a lane closure due to change. – On roads where there are sharp road repairs. ∙ Because the I-LI may not activate un- curves. – When driving in a makeshift or der the road, weather, and lane – On roads where there are sharply temporary lane. marker conditions described in this contrasting objects, such as shad- section, it may not activate every time – When driving on roads where the ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, your vehicle begins to leave its lane lane width is too narrow. seams or lines remaining after and you will need to apply corrective – When driving without normal tire road repairs. (The I-LI system could steering. conditions (for example, tire wear, detect these items as lane ∙ When the I-LI system is operating, low tire pressure, installation of markers.) avoid excessive or sudden steering spare tire, tire chains, non- – On roads where the traveling lane maneuvers. Otherwise, you could lose standard wheels). merges or separates. control of the vehicle.

5-42 Starting and driving – When the vehicle’s traveling direc- SYSTEM TEMPORARILY ∙ When the vehicle is accelerated during tion does not align with the lane UNAVAILABLE I-LI system operation. marker. ∙ When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) Condition A: – When traveling close to the vehicle approach warning occurs. in front of you, which obstructs the The warning and assist functions of the I-LI ∙ When the hazard warning flashers are lane camera unit detection range. system are not designed to work under the operated. following conditions: – When rain, snow or dirt adheres to ∙ When driving on a curve at high speed. the windshield in front of the lane ∙ When you operate the lane change sig- camera unit. nal and change the traveling lanes in After the above conditions have finished the direction of the signal. (The I-LI sys- and the necessary operating conditions – When the headlights are not bright tem will be deactivated for approxi- are satisfied, the I-LI system application of due to dirt on the lens or if the aim- mately 2 seconds after the lane change the brakes will resume. ing is not adjusted properly. signal is turned off.) Condition C: – When strong light enters the lane ∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less camera unit. (For example, the light If the following messages appear in the than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). directly shines on the front of the vehicle information display, the I-LI system vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) After the above conditions have finished will be turned off automatically. – When a sudden change in bright- and the necessary operating conditions ∙ “Not Available Poor Road Conditions”: ness occurs. (For example, when are satisfied, the warning and assist func- When the VDC system (except Traction the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel tions will resume. Control System [TCS] function) or ABS or under a bridge.) Condition B: operates. ∙ “Currently not available”: While the I-LI system is operating, you may The assist function of the I-LI system is not When the VDC system is turned off. hear a sound of brake operation. This is designed to work under the following con- normal and indicates that the I-LI system is ditions (warning is still functional): operating properly. ∙ When the brake pedal is depressed. ∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary for the vehicle to change lanes. Starting and driving 5-43 Action to take: SYSTEM MALFUNCTION When the above conditions no longer exist, If the I-LI system malfunctions, it will cancel turn off the I-LI system. Push the ProPILOT automatically. The LDW indicator (orange) Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT will illuminate in the display. If the LDW indi- Assist) on the steering wheel again to turn cator (orange) illuminates in the display, the I-LI system back on. pull off the road to a safe location and stop Temporary disabled status at high tem- the vehicle. Turn the engine/motor off and perature: restart the engine/motor. If the LDW indicator (orange) continues to illuminate, have If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight the I-LI system checked. It is recom- under high temperature conditions (over mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then the this service. I-LI system is turned on, the I-LI system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear on the ve- LSD3216 hicle information display: “Unavailable: High SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Cabin Temperature.” When the interior temperature is reduced, the system will re- The lane camera unit ᭺1 for the I-LI system sume operating automatically. is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the I-LI system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

5-44 Starting and driving BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)

∙ Do not place reflective materials, such WARNING as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight Failure to follow the warnings and in- may adversely affect the camera unit’s structions for proper use of the BSW capability of detecting the lane mark- system could result in serious injury or ers. death. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas ∙ The BSW system is not a replacement around the camera unit. Do not touch for proper driving procedures and is the camera lens or remove the screw not designed to prevent contact with located on the camera unit. If the cam- vehicles or objects. When changing era unit is damaged due to an accident, lanes, always use the side and rear it is recommended that you visit a mirrors and turn and look in the direc- NISSAN dealer. tion your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system. LSD3286 The BSW system uses radar sensors ᭺1 The BSW system helps alert the driver of installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in adjacent lanes when other vehicles in an adjacent lane. changing lanes.

Starting and driving 5-45 SSD1030 Detection zone The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

LSD3313 5-46 Starting and driving 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, 2. BSW indicator then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light BSW SYSTEM OPERATION flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, refer to “BSW driving The BSW system operates above approxi- situations” in this section. mately 20 mph (32 km/h). The BSW system automatically turns on If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the every time the engine is started, as long as detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica- it is activated using the settings menu on tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is the vehicle information display. then activated, the system chimes (twice), the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and the BSW indicator illuminates (yellow) in the vehicle information display. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

Starting and driving 5-47 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Blind Spot Warning” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE: When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.

LSD3217 5-48 Starting and driving BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – A vehicle which your vehicle over- – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on takes rapidly. the vehicle WARNING – A vehicle that passes through the ∙ Do not attach stickers (including Listed below are the system limitations detection zone quickly. transparent material), install accesso- for the BSW system. Failure to operate ries or apply additional paint near the – When overtaking several vehicles the vehicle in accordance with these radar sensors. These conditions may in a row, the vehicles after the first system limitations could result in seri- reduce the ability of the radar to de- vehicle may not be detected if they ous injury or death. tect other vehicles. are traveling close together. ∙ The BSW system cannot detect all ve- ∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio ∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is hicles under all conditions. system volume, open vehicle window) designed based on a standard lane will interfere with the chime sound, ∙ The radar sensors may not be able to width. When driving in a wider lane, and it may not be heard. detect and activate BSW when certain the radar sensors may not detect ve- objects are present such as: hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv- – Pedestrian, bicycles, animals. ing in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes – Vehicles such as motorcycles, low away. height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles. ∙ The radar sensors are designed to ig- nore most stationary objects; how- – Oncoming vehicles. ever, objects such as guardrails, walls, – Vehicles remaining in the detec- foliage and parked vehicles may oc- tion zone when you accelerate casionally be detected. This is a nor- from a stop. mal operation condition. – A vehicle merging into an adjacent ∙ The following conditions may reduce lane at a speed approximately the the ability of the radar to detect other same as your vehicle. vehicles: – A vehicle approaching rapidly from – Severe weather behind. – Road spray

Starting and driving 5-49 Another vehicle approaching from behind Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

LSD2299 LSD2300 Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the Indicator detection zone, then the system chimes on (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. Indicator off NOTE: Indicator ∙ The radar sensors may not detect ve- flashing hicles which are approaching rapidly from behind. ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. 5-50 Starting and driving ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2302 LSD2303 Illustration3–Overtaking another Illustration4–Overtaking another vehicle vehicle Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu- detection zone, then the system chimes minates if you overtake a vehicle and that (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds. NOTE: ∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together. ∙ The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly. Starting and driving 5-51 ∙ The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

LSD2305 LSD2308 Illustration 5 – Entering from the side Illustration 6 – Entering from the side Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu- detection zone, then the system chimes minates if a vehicle enters the detection (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. zone from either side. NOTE: ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

5-52 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD3292 Starting and driving 5-53 Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn additional paint near the radar sensors. off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW indicator Do not strike or damage the area around (orange) will appear in the vehicle informa- the radar sensors. It is recommended that tion display. you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a NOTE: collision. If the BSW system stops working, the Radio frequency statement RCTA system will also stop working. For USA Action to take: Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- LSD3286 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Rules. sage continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a The two radar sensors ᭺1 for the BSW and Operation is subject to the following two NISSAN dealer for this service. RCTA systems are located near the rear conditions: bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- 1. This device may not cause harmful in- dar sensors clean. terference, and The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- 2. This device must accept any interfer- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ence received, including interference ing water, mist or fog. that may cause undesired operation. The blocked condition may also be caused FCC Warning by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for Check for and remove objects obstructing compliance could void the user’s authority the area around the radar sensors. to operate the equipment. 5-54 Starting and driving REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if so equipped)

For Canada Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz WARNING Applicable law: Canada 310 Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts Failure to follow the warnings and in- This device complies with Industry Canada structions for proper use of the RCTA licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation could result in serious injury or death. is subject to the following two conditions: ∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is 1. This device may not cause interference, not designed to prevent contact with and vehicles or objects. When backing out 2. This device must accept any interfer- of a parking space, always use the ence, including interference that may side and rear mirrors and turn and cause undesired operation of the de- look in the direction your vehicle will vice. move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system. Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz The RCTA system will assist you when Output power: less than 20 milliwatts backing out from a parking space. When Droit applicable: Canada 310 the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approach- Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- system detects cross traffic, it will alert you. eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. Starting and driving 5-55 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space. When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational. If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD3259 5-56 Starting and driving LSD2216 LSD3286 The RCTA system uses radar sensors ᭺1 installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle. The radar sensors ᭺1 can detect an approaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

Starting and driving 5-57 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Rear Cross Traffic Alert” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE: When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

LSD3218 5-58 Starting and driving WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as: – Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles – A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) – A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph LSD3195 (8 km/h) RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ∙ The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations: – Illustration ᭺A : When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.

Starting and driving 5-59 – Illustration ᭺B : When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space. – Illustration ᭺C : When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground. – Illustration ᭺D : When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle. – Illustration ᭺E : When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small. ∙ The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: LSD2043 LSD2044 – Severe weather Illustration 1 Illustration 2 – Road spray NOTE: – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on In the case of several vehicles approach- the vehicle ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo- ∙ Do not attach stickers (including site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may transparent material), install accesso- not be sounded by the RCTA system af- ries or apply additional paint near the ter the first vehicle passes the sensors. radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles. ∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

5-60 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD3292 Starting and driving 5-61 Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will additional paint near the radar sensors. turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW Do not strike or damage the area around indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle the radar sensors. It is recommended that information display. you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a NOTE: collision. If the BSW system stops working, the Radio frequency statement RCTA system will also stop working. For USA Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- LSD3286 gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC sage continues to appear, have the system SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Rules. checked. It is recommended that you visit a ᭺1 Operation is subject to the following two NISSAN dealer for this service. The two radar sensors for the BSW and RCTA systems are located near the rear conditions: bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- 1. This device may not cause harmful in- dar sensors clean. terference, and The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- 2. This device must accept any interfer- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ence received, including interference ing water, mist or fog. that may cause undesired operation. The blocked condition may also be caused FCC Warning by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for Check for and remove objects obstructing compliance could void the user’s authority the area around the radar sensors. to operate the equipment. 5-62 Starting and driving CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

For Canada Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz Applicable law: Canada 310 Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz LSD3251 Output power: less than 20 milliwatts PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL Droit applicable: Canada 310 ᭺1 RES+ switch Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- ᭺2 CANCEL switch eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation ᭺3 SET– switch est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: ᭺4 Cruise control switch 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de ∙ If the cruise control system malfunc- brouillage, et tions, it cancels automatically. The indicator in the instrument panel then 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter blinks to warn the driver. tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. Starting and driving 5-63 ∙ If the indicator blinks, turn the CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS cruise control switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended Cruise Control Indicator Color Description that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this None System off service. White Standby ∙ The indicator may blink when the Green Set cruise control switch is turned on while pushing the RES+, SET–, or CANCEL Green(Blinking) System fault switch. To properly set the cruise control system, use the following proce- The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without dures. keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: ∙ When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. ∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. ∙ On winding or hilly roads. ∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). ∙ In very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

5-64 Starting and driving To turn on the cruise control, push the The cruise control is automatically can- ∙ Push and hold the SET– switch. Release cruise control switch on. The indica- celed if: the switch when the vehicle slows to tor in the instrument panel will illuminate. the desired speed. ∙ You depress the brake pedal while To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve- pushing the RES+ or SET– switch. The ∙ Push and release the SET– switch. Each hicle to the desired speed, push the SET– preset speed is deleted from memory. time you do this, the set speed de- switch and release it. Take your foot off the creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains ∙ The vehicle slows down more than To resume the preset speed, push and the set speed. 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed. release the RES+ switch. The vehicle re- ∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the ∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral). turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). accelerator pedal. When you release the To reset at a faster cruising speed, use pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ- one of the following three methods: To turn off the cruise control, use one of ously set speed. the following three methods: ∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When ∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set the vehicle attains the desired speed, ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. speed when going up or down steep push and release the SET– switch. hills. If this happens, drive without the ∙ Tap the brake pedal. cruise control. ∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. When ∙ Push the cruise control switch off. To cancel the preset speed, use one of the the vehicle attains the speed you desire, The indicator in the instrument following three methods: release the switch. panel goes out. ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. ∙ Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed in- ∙ Tap the brake pedal. creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). ∙ Push the cruise control switch off. To reset at a slower cruising speed, use The indicator in the instrument one of the following three methods: panel goes out. ∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET– switch and release it.

Starting and driving 5-65 INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) ᭺A ICC switch

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. ∙ Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them. ∙ Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

LSD3294 5-66 Starting and driving ∙ In the conventional (fixed speed) ∙ Conventional (fixed speed) cruise cruise control mode, a warning chime control mode: For cruising at a preset will not sound to warn you if you are speed too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay Push the ICC switch ᭺A to choose the special attention to the distance be- cruise control mode between the vehicle- tween your vehicle and the vehicle to-vehicle distance control mode and the ahead of you or a collision could occur. conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode. NOTE: Once a control mode is activated, it cannot For vehicles equipped with ProPILOT As- be changed to the other cruise control sist, refer to “ProPILOT Assist” in this sec- mode. To change the mode, push the ICC tion. switch ᭺A once to turn the system off. Then push the ICC switch ᭺A again to turn the The ICC system maintains a selected dis- system back on and select the desired tance from the vehicle in front of you within cruise control mode. the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set Always confirm the setting in the ICC sys- speed can be selected by the driver be- tem display. tween 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, refer to “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance The vehicle travels at a set speed when the control mode” in this section. road ahead is clear. For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise The ICC system can be set to one of two control mode, refer to “Conventional (fixed cruise control modes: speed) cruise control mode” in this section. ∙ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset speed Starting and driving 5-67 LSD3295 LSD3293 HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE Selecting the conventional (fixed speed) VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE cruise control mode: To choose the con- CONTROL MODE ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle dis- ᭺2 , push and hold the ICC switch ᭺A for In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control tance control mode: To choose the longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For mode, the ICC system automatically main- vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode additional information, refer to “Conven- tains a selected distance from the vehicle ᭺1 , quickly push and release the ICC switch tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode” in traveling in front of you according to that ᭺A . this section. vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear. The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.

5-68 Starting and driving If the radar sensor ᭺1 detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance. The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary. The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

LSD3296 Starting and driving 5-69 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE disengage when the vehicle goes above The ICC system does not control vehicle CONTROL MODE OPERATION the maximum set speed. speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control For additional information, refer to “Ap- must pay attention to vehicle operation to mode is designed to maintain a selected proach warning” in this section. maintain proper distance from vehicles distance from the vehicle in front of you The following items are controlled in the ahead when approaching toll gates or traf- and can reduce the speed to match a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: fic congestion. slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the ∙ When there are no vehicles traveling vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC control mode maintains the speed set system can only apply up to 40% of the by the driver. The set speed range is vehicle’s total braking power. between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h). This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re- ∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, main fairly constant or when vehicle the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control speeds change gradually. If a vehicle mode adjusts the speed to maintain moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a the distance, selected by the driver, vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle the distance between vehicles may be- ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle de- come closer because the ICC system can- celerates to a standstill within the limi- not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. tations of the system. The system will If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a cancel once it judges a standstill with a warning chime and blink the system dis- warning chime. play to notify the driver to take necessary action. ∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the The system will cancel and a warning vehicle-to-vehicle distance control chime will sound if the speed is below ap- mode accelerates and maintains ve- proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle hicle speed up to the set speed. is not detected ahead. The system will also 5-70 Starting and driving Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

SSD0254 LSD3265 When driving on the freeway at a set speed VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE and approaching a slower traveling vehicle CONTROL MODE SWITCHES ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the The system is operated by the ICC switch driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle and four control switches, all mounted on ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the steering wheel. the ICC system will accelerate and main- 1. CANCEL switch: tain the speed up to the set speed. Pay Deactivates the system without eras- attention to the driving operation to main- ing the set speed. tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed. 2. RES+ switch: The vehicle may not maintain the set Resumes set speed or increases speed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc- speed incrementally. curs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed. Starting and driving 5-71 3. DISTANCE switch: ∙ ICC system warning (yellow): Indi- cates that there is a malfunction in Changes the vehicle’s following dis- the ICC system. tance: 2. Set vehicle speed indicator: ∙ Long Indicates the set vehicle speed. ∙ Middle For Canadian models, the speed is dis- ∙ Short played in km/h. 4. ICC switch: 3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator: Master switch to activate the system. Indicates whether it detects a vehicle 5. SET- switch: in front of you. Sets desired cruise speed or reduces 4. Set distance indicator: speed incrementally. LSD3297 Displays the selected distance be- Vehicle-to-vehicle distance tween vehicles set with the distance control mode display and switch. indicators The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer. 1. This indicator indicates the ICC system status depending on a color: ∙ ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indi- cates that the ICC switch is on. ∙ ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

5-72 Starting and driving LSD3298 LSD3299 LSD3102 Operating vehicle-to-vehicle To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- When the SET– switch is pushed under the distance control mode hicle to the desired speed, push the SET– following conditions, the system cannot be switch ᭺C and release it. The ICC system set set and the ICC indicators will blink for ap- To turn on the cruise control, quickly push indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection proximately 2 seconds: and release the ICC switch ᭺A . The ICC sys- indicator, set distance indicator and set ve- tem ON indicator (gray), set distance indi- hicle speed indicator ᭺B will come on. Take ∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) cator and set vehicle speed indicator ᭺B your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your and a vehicle ahead is not detected come on in a standby state for setting. vehicle will maintain the set speed. ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or Manual mode ∙ When the parking brake is applied ∙ When the brakes are operated by the driver

Starting and driving 5-73 When the SET– switch is pushed under the Vehicle detected ahead following conditions, the system cannot be set. When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve- A warning chime will sound and a message hicle by controlling the throttle and apply- will pop up: ing the brakes to match the speed of a ∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the slower vehicle ahead. The system then ICC system, turn on the VDC system. controls the vehicle speed based on the Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the system and reset the ICC switch by driver selected distance. pushing the ICC switch again.) NOTE: For additional information about the VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic ∙ The stop lights of the vehicle come on Control (VDC) system” in this section. when braking is performed by the ICC LSD3301 system. ∙ When VDC is operating ᭺1 System set display with vehicle ahead ∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC ∙ When the brake operates, a noise may ᭺2 System set display without vehicle be heard. This is not a malfunction. system, make sure the wheels are no ahead longer slipping.) When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve- The driver sets the desired vehicle speed hicle ahead detection indicator comes on. based on the road conditions. The ICC sys- The ICC system will also display the set tem maintains the set vehicle speed, simi- speed and selected distance. lar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The Vehicle ahead not detected ICC system displays the set speed. When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.

5-74 Starting and driving When a vehicle is no longer detected, the How to change the set vehicle vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off. speed If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera- To cancel the preset speed, use one of the tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the following methods: ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle. ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out. When a vehicle is no longer detected under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys- ∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle tem will be canceled. speed indicator will go out. ∙ Turn the ICC switch off. The ICC indicators will go out. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use LSD3267 one of the following methods: When passing another vehicle, the set ∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When speed indicator ᭺A will flash when the ve- the vehicle attains the desired speed, hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve- push and release the SET– switch. hicle detect indicator will turn off when the ∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the vehicle speed will increase by approxi- pedal is released, the vehicle will return to mately 5 mph (5 km/h). the previously set speed. ∙ Push, then quickly release the RES+ Even though your vehicle speed is set in the switch. Each time you do this, the set ICC system, you can depress the accelera- speed will increase by approximately tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate 1 mph (1 km/h). your vehicle rapidly.

Starting and driving 5-75 To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods: ∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET– switch and release it. ∙ Push and hold the SET– switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h). ∙ Push, then quickly release the SET– switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and LSD2683 LSD2752 release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will How to change the set distance resume the last set cruising speed when Distance Approximate distance at the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h). to the vehicle ahead 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)] The distance to the vehicle ahead can be 1. Long 200 (60) selected at any time depending on the traf- 2. Middle 150 (45) fic conditions. 3. Short 90 (30) Each time the distance switch ᭺A is ∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will pushed, the set distance will change to change according to the vehicle speed. long, middle, short and back to long again, The higher the vehicle speed, the longer in that sequence. the distance. ∙ The distance setting will remain at the current setting even if the engine is restarted.

5-76 Starting and driving Approach warning The warning chime will not sound when: Automatic cancellation If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles A chime sounds under the following condi- ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve- that are parked or moving slowly. tions and the control is automatically can- hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys- celed: ∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed, tem warns the driver with the chime and overriding the system. ∙ When the vehicle ahead is not detected ICC system display. Decelerate by depress- and your vehicle is traveling below the ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve- NOTE: speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) hicle distance if: ∙ When the system judges the vehicle is ∙ The chime sounds. The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when at a standstill ∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator the ICC sensor detects objects on the ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) blinks. side of the vehicle or on the side of the position, Manual mode or L (Low) range. The warning chime may not sound in road. This may cause the ICC system to ∙ When the parking brake system is ap- some cases when there is a short distance decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The plied between vehicles. Some examples are: ICC sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding ∙ When the VDC system is turned off ∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when same speed and the distance between entering or exiting a curve. In these ∙ When VDC operates vehicles is not changing. cases you will have to manually control ∙ When distance measurement be- ∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling the proper distance ahead of your ve- comes impaired due to adhesion of dirt faster and the distance between vehicle. or obstruction to the sensor hicles is increasing. Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected ∙ When a wheel slips ∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or ∙ When the radar signal is temporarily in- driving position in the lane) or traffic or ve- terrupted hicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

Starting and driving 5-77 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE ∙ As there is a performance limit to the ∙ The system may not detect the ve- CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS distance control function, never rely hicle in front of you in certain road or solely on the ICC system. This system weather conditions. To avoid acci- WARNING does not correct careless, inattentive dents, never use the ICC system under or absentminded driving, or over- the following conditions: Listed below are the system limitations come poor visibility in rain, fog, or – On roads where the traffic is heavy for the ICC system. Failure to operate other bad weather. Decelerate the ve- or there are sharp curves the vehicle in accordance with these hicle speed by depressing the brake system limitations could result in seri- pedal, depending on the distance to – On slippery road surfaces such as ous injury or death. the vehicle ahead and the surround- on ice or snow, etc. ∙ The ICC system is primarily intended ing circumstances in order to main- – During bad weather (rain, fog, for use on straight, dry, open roads tain a safe distance between vehicles. snow, etc.) with light traffic. It is not advisable to ∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, – When rain, snow or dirt adhere to use the ICC system in city traffic or the vehicle decelerates to a standstill congested areas. the bumper around the distance within the limitations of the system. sensor ∙ The ICC system will not adapt auto- The system will cancel once it judges matically to road conditions. This sys- that the vehicle has come to a stand- – On steep downhill roads (the ve- tem should be used in evenly flowing still and sound a warning chime. To hicle may go beyond the set ve- traffic. Do not use the system on roads prevent the vehicle from moving, the hicle speed and frequent braking with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in driver must depress the brake pedal. may result in overheating the brakes) heavy rain or in fog. ∙ Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manu- – On repeated uphill and downhill ally control the proper following dis- roads tance. The ICC system may not be able – When traffic conditions make it dif- to maintain the selected distance be- ficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles (following distance) or tween vehicles because of fre- selected vehicle speed under some quent acceleration or deceleration circumstances.

5-78 Starting and driving – Interference by other radar The following are some conditions in which The detection zone of the radar sensor is sources the sensor cannot properly detect a ve- limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de- hicle ahead and the system may not oper- tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis- ∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are ate properly: tance detection mode to maintain the se- towing a trailer. The system may not lected distance from the vehicle ahead. detect a vehicle ahead. ∙ When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a detection zone due to its position within ∙ When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc. vehicle or object can unexpectedly the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may come into the sensor detection zone ∙ When excessively heavy baggage is not be detected in the same lane ahead if and cause automatic braking. Always loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of they are traveling offset from the centerline stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys- your vehicle. of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the tem where not recommended in this lane ahead may not be detected until the warning section. The ICC system is designed to automati- vehicle has completely moved into the cally check the sensor’s operation within lane. The radar sensor will not detect the follow- the limitations of the system. ing objects: If this occurs, the ICC system may warn When the sensor is covered with dirt or is you by blinking the system indicator and ∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles obstructed, the system will automatically sounding the chime. The driver may be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway have to manually control the proper dis- ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, tance away from vehicle traveling ahead. ∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane etc., the ICC system may not detect them. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle ∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel distance control mode may not cancel and lane may not be able to maintain the selected The sensor generally detects the signals following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, regularly. if the sensor cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the selected distance.

Starting and driving 5-79 SSD0252

5-80 Starting and driving SSD0253 When driving on some roads, such as wind- If this occurs, the ICC system may warn ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads you by blinking the system indicator and which are under construction, the radar sounding the chime unexpectedly. You sensor may detect vehicles in a different will have to manually control the proper lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve- distance away from the vehicle traveling hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the ahead. radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

Starting and driving 5-81 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Condition A Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set: ∙ When the VDC system is turned off ∙ When the VDC operates ∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) ∙ When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive), Manual mode or L (Low) range. ∙ When the parking brake is applied ∙ When a wheel slips ∙ When the radar signal is temporarily in- LSD3303 terrupted 5-82 Starting and driving Action to take When driving on roads with limited road structures (for example, long bridges, des- When the conditions listed above are no erts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), longer present, turn the system off using the system may illuminate the system the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on warning light and display the “Not Available: to use the system. Front Radar Blocked” message. Condition B Action to take When the radar sensor area of the front When the above driving conditions no lon- bumper is covered with dirt or is ob- ger exist, turn the system back on. structed, the ICC system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the “Not Avail- able: Front Radar Blocked” warning mes- LSD3245 sage will appear in the vehicle information display. Condition C Action to take When the ICC system is not operating properly, a chime sounds and the ICC sys- If the warning message appears, stop the tem warning light (orange) will come on. vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the “Not Available: Front Radar Blocked” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-83 ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction. ∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Radio frequency statement For USA FCC ID OAYARS4B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC LSD3304 LSD3293 Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Action to take SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 1. This device may not cause harmful in- If the warning light comes on, park the ve- The sensor for the ICC system ᭺1 is located terference, and hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, on the front of the vehicle. restart the engine, resume driving and set 2. This device must accept any interfer- the ICC system again. To keep the ICC system operating properly, ence received, including interference be sure to observe the following: that may cause undesired operation. If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate ∙ Always keep the sensor area clean. FCC Warning that the system is malfunctioning. Al- Changes or modifications not expressly though the vehicle is still drivable under ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. approved by the party responsible for normal conditions, have the vehicle compliance could void the user’s authority checked. It is recommended that you ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans- to operate the equipment. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. parent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction. 5-84 Starting and driving For Canada Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor- CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) mation: Model: ARS4–B CRUISE CONTROL MODE This equipment complies with FCC radia- IC: 4135A-ARS4B This mode allows driving at a speed be- tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with- FCC ID: OAYARS4B trolled environment. out keeping your foot on the accelerator This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC This equipment should be installed and pedal. Rules and with Industry Canada licence- operated with minimum distance of 30 cm exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- between the radiator and your body. WARNING ject to the following two conditions: The transmitter must not be co-located or ∙ In the conventional (fixed speed) 1. This device may not cause harmful in- operating in conjunction with any other an- cruise control mode, a warning chime terference, and tenna or transmitter. does not sound to warn you if you are 2. This device must accept any interfer- Cet équipement est conforme aux limites too close to the vehicle ahead, as nei- ence received, including interference d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies ther the presence of the vehicle ahead that may cause undesired operation. pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec detected. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la ∙ Pay special attention to the distance d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- source de rayonnement et votre corps. between your vehicle and the vehicle eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation ahead of you or a collision could occur. est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv- FCC Notice antes: ∙ Always confirm the setting in the ICC Changes or modifications not expressly system display. 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de approved by the party responsible for brouillage, et compliance could void the user’s authority ∙ Do not use the conventional (fixed to operate the equipment. speed) cruise control mode when 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter driving under the following tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, conditions: même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. – When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed

Starting and driving 5-85 – In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed – On winding or hilly roads – On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.) – In very windy areas ∙ Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

LSD3271 LSD3106 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches control mode display and 1. CANCEL switch: indicators Deactivates the system without eras- The display is located in the vehicle infor- ing the set speed mation display. 2. RES+ switch: 1. Cruise indicator: Resumes set speed or increases speed This indicator indicates the condition of incrementally the ICC system depending on a color. 3. ICC switch: ∙ Cruise control ON indicator (gray): In- Master switch to activate the system dicates that the ICC switch is on 4. SET- switch: ∙ Cruise control SET indicator (green): Sets desired cruise speed or reduces Indicates that the cruising speed is speed incrementally set 5-86 Starting and driving ∙ Cruise control warning (yellow): Indi- ing the ICC switch again will turn the sys- cates that there is a malfunction in tem completely off. When the ignition the ICC system switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. 2. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle To use the ICC system again, quickly push speed. For Canadian models, the and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to ve- speed is displayed in km/h. hicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.

CAUTION To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ICC switch LSD3107 off when not using the ICC system. Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC switch ᭺A for longer than about 1.5 seconds. When pushing ICC switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators ᭺B are displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold ICC switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set your desired cruising speed. Push- Starting and driving 5-87 To cancel the preset speed, use any of the To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one following methods: of the following three methods: 1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle 1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the speed indicator will turn off. vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it. 2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off. 2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows 3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise down to the desired speed. indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off. 3. Push, then quickly release the SET- switch. Each time you do this, the set To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one speed will decrease by about 1 mph of the following three methods: (1.6 km/h). 1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When To resume the preset speed, push and re- LSD3108 the vehicle attains the desired speed, lease the RES+ switch. The vehicle will re- To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- push and release the SET- switch. hicle to the desired speed, push the SET- ᭺C sume the last set cruising speed when the switch and release it. (The color of the 2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). cruise indicator changes to green and set the vehicle attains the desired speed, vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take release the switch. your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your 3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ vehicle will maintain the set speed. switch. Each time you do this, the set ∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the speed will increase by about 1 mph accelerator pedal. When you release the (1.6 km/h). pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. ∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed. 5-88 Starting and driving System temporarily unavailable A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled: ∙ When the vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode ∙ When the parking brake is applied ∙ When the VDC operates (including the traction control system) ∙ When a wheel slips When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the color of the cruise indicator will change to orange. Action to take If the color of the cruise indicator changes to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and then perform the setting again.

LSD3305 Starting and driving 5-89 PROPILOT ASSIST (if so equipped)

If it is not possible to set or the indicator WARNING ∙ There are limitations to the ProPILOT stays on, it may indicate that the system Assist system capability. The ProPI- is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle Failure to follow the warnings and in- LOT Assist system does not function is still drivable under normal conditions, structions for proper use of the ProPI- in all driving, traffic, weather, and road have the vehicle checked. It is recom- LOT Assist system could result in seri- conditions. It is the driver’s responsi- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ous injury or death. bility to stay alert, drive safely, keep for this service. ∙ ProPILOT Assist is not a self-driving the vehicle in the traveling lane, and system. Within the limits of its capa- be in control of the vehicle at all times. bilities, as described in this manual, it ∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is only an helps the driver with certain driving aid to assist the driver and is not a activities. collision warning or avoidance device. ∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is not a ∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is for replacement for proper driving proce- highway use only and is not intended dures and is not designed to correct for city driving. Failure to apply the careless, inattentive or absent- brakes or steer the vehicle when nec- minded driving. ProPILOT Assist will essary may result in a serious not always steer the vehicle to keep it accident. in the lane. The ProPILOT Assist system is not designed to prevent loss of ∙ Always observe posted speed limits control. It is the driver’s responsibility and do not set the speed over them. to stay alert, drive safely, keep the ve- ∙ Never take your hands off the steering hicle in the traveling lane, and be in wheel when driving. Always keep your control of the vehicle at all times. hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely. ∙ Never unfasten your safety belt when using ProPILOT Assist. Doing so automatically cancels the ProPILOT Assist system.

5-90 Starting and driving ∙ The ProPILOT Assist system does not centered in the traveling lane when clear react to stationary and slow moving lane markings are detected. vehicles. ∙ Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ProPILOT Assist system. Read and understand the Own- er’s Manual thoroughly before using the ProPILOT Assist system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the Pro- PILOT Assist system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions. LSD3223 The ProPILOT Assist system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction. The ProPILOT Assist system uses a multi- sensing front camera ᭺A installed behind the windshield and a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle ᭺B to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane and to monitor the lane markers. If the vehicle detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance. The system will also help keep the vehicle Starting and driving 5-91 ᭺1 Steering-wheel-mounted control (left) ᭺2 Vehicle information display ᭺3 Steering-wheel-mounted control (right) ᭺4 ProPILOT Assist switch PROPILOT ASSIST SYSTEM OPERATION The ProPILOT Assist system has the following two functions: 1. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes: ∙ Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed

LSD3224 5-92 Starting and driving NOTE: – When your vehicle is at a standstill for more than 3 seconds and the Steering Assist is not available in the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, conventional (fixed speed) cruise control push the RES+ switch or lightly de- mode. press the accelerator pedal. The ICC ∙ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control system starts to follow the vehicle mode: The ICC system maintains a ahead. selected distance from the vehicle in – When no vehicle is detected ahead front of you within the speed range of within the driver selected distance, 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the the vehicle travels at the speed set set speed. The set speed can be se- by the driver. The speed must be lected by the driver between 20 to above 20 mph (32 km/h) to use this 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). When the function. vehicle ahead slows to a stop, your vehicle gradually decelerates to a NOTE: LSD3225 standstill. When the vehicle is stopped, the ICC system maintains Even if the Automatic Emergency Brak- ProPILOT Assist switches braking force to keep your vehicle ing (AEB) setting is turned off by the ᭺1 DISTANCE switch: stopped. driver using the “Settings” menu in the vehicle information display, AEB will be – Long NOTE: automatically turned on when ICC is – Middle used. When your vehicle is stopped for less – Short than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead 2. Steering Assist begins to move, your vehicle will start ᭺2 The Steering Assist function controls RES+ switch: moving again automatically. the steering system to help keep your Resumes set speed or increases vehicle within the traveling lane. speed incrementally When there is no vehicle ahead, Steer- ᭺3 CANCEL switch: ing Assist is not available at speeds under 37 mph (60 km/h). Deactivates the ProPILOT Assist system Starting and driving 5-93 – Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane departure is detected ᭺2 Set distance indicator Displays the selected distance ᭺3 Vehicle ahead detection indicator Indicates whether the system detects a vehicle in front of you ᭺4 Steering Assist indicator Indicates the status of the Steering As- sist function by the color of the indicator LSD3226 LSD3227 – Steering Assist indicator (gray): ᭺4 ProPILOT Assist switch: The ProPILOT Assist system Steering Assist standby Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or display and indicators – Steering Assist indicator (green): off ᭺1 Lane marker indicator Steering Assist active ᭺5 SET- switch: Indicates whether the system detects – Steering Assist indicator (orange): Steering Assist malfunction Sets desired cruise speed or reduces lane markers speed incrementally ᭺5 ProPILOT Assist activation – No lane markers displayed: Steering ᭺6 Steering Assist switch: Assist is turned off Displays once the ProPILOT Assist system is activated Turns the Steering Assist function on – Lane marker indicator (gray): No lane or off markers detected – Lane marker indicator (green): Lane markers detected

5-94 Starting and driving ᭺6 ProPILOT Assist status indicator ᭺9 Speed control status indicator/warning TURNING THE CONVENTIONAL Indicates the status of the ProPILOT Displays the status of speed control by (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL Assist system by the color of the indi- the color and shape of the MODE ON cator indicator/warning NOTE: – ProPILOT Assist status indicator – Speed control status indicator/ (white): ProPILOT Assist is on but in warning (gray): ICC standby ProPILOT Assist provides no approach standby. warnings, automatic braking, or steering – Speed control status indicator/ assist in the conventional (fixed speed) – ProPILOT Assist status indicator warning (solid green ): ICC (dis- cruise control mode. (blue): ProPILOT Assist active tance control mode) is active (ve- To choose the conventional (fixed speed) ᭺7 Steering Assist status hicle detected ahead). Your vehicle cruise control mode, push and hold the indicator/warning matches the speed of the vehicle ProPILOT Assist switch for longer than ap- ahead. proximately 1.5 seconds. For additional in- Displays the status of the Steering Assist – Speed control status indicator/ formation, refer to “Conventional (fixed by the color of the indicator/warning speed) cruise control mode” in this section. warning (green outline ): ICC – No Steering Assist status indicator (maintain speed control mode) is displayed: Steering Assist is turned active (no vehicle detected ahead). off Your vehicle maintains the driver- – Steering Assist indicator (gray): selected set speed. Steering Assist standby – Speed control status indicator/ – Steering Assist indicator (green): warning (orange): Indicates an ICC Steering Assist active malfunction – Steering Assist indicator (yellow): Steering Assist malfunction ᭺8 Set vehicle speed indicator Indicates the set vehicle speed

Starting and driving 5-95 LSD3311 LSD3228 LSD3074 1. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) OPERATING PROPILOT ASSIST – To change the status of the driving aids, use the ᭺1 or ᭺2 but- 2. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) when 1. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch ᭺A . ton to navigate the settings screen. shaded and Intelligent Lane Interven- This turns on the ProPILOT Assist sys- tion (I-LI) when solid For additional information, refer to tem. “How to use the vehicle information 3. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) 2. A screen is displayed for a period of display” in the “Instruments and con- time that indicates the status of the trols” section of this manual. driving aid functions. 3. The status of the ProPILOT Assist sys- – AEB, LDW, and BSW are enabled tem is displayed in the vehicle informa- ᭺B when the specified driving aid is tion display . shaded. 4. Accelerate or decelerate your vehicle to the desired speed. – I-LI is enabled when the driving aid is solid.

5-96 Starting and driving 5. Push the SET- switch ᭺C . The ProPILOT Assist system begins to automatically maintain the set speed. The ProPILOT Assist activation indicator ᭺D and Pro- PILOT Assist status indicator ᭺E illuminate (blue). When a vehicle ahead is traveling at a speed of 20 mph (32 km/h) or below and the SET- switch is pushed, the set speed of your vehicle is 20 mph (32 km/h).

LSD3229 LSD3230 NOTE: When the SET- switch is pushed under the When Lane Departure Prevention is en- following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist abled in the settings menu, turning the system cannot be set and the set vehicle ProPILOT Assist system (if so equipped) speed indicator ᭺1 blinks for approximately on will activate the I-LI system at the 2 seconds: same time. If Lane Departure Prevention ∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) is not enabled in the settings menu, I-LI and the vehicle ahead is not detected will automatically activate when the Pro- PILOT Assist system is “SET.” For addi- ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) tional information, refer to “Intelligent position or manual shift mode Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in this section. ∙ When the parking brake is applied ∙ When the brakes are operated by the driver

Starting and driving 5-97 ∙ When the VDC system is off. For addi- To change to a slower cruising speed: tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) system” in this sec- ∙ Push and hold the SET- switch. The set tion. vehicle speed decreases by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h). ∙ When the VDC system (including the traction control system) is operating ∙ Push, then quickly release, the SET- switch. Each time you do this, the set ∙ When a wheel is slipping speed decreases by approximately ∙ When any door is open 1 mph (1 km/h). ∙ When the driver’s seat belt is not fas- How to momentarily accelerate or tened decelerate ∙ Depress the accelerator pedal when LSD3113 acceleration is required. Release the ac- How to change the set vehicle celerator pedal to resume the previ- speed ously set vehicle speed. ∙ Depress the brake pedal when decel- The set vehicle speed can be adjusted. eration is required. Control by the ProPI- To change to a faster cruising speed: LOT Assist system is canceled. Push the RES+ switch to resume the previously ∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set set vehicle speed. vehicle speed increases by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h). ∙ Push, then quickly release, the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

5-98 Starting and driving WARNING When the accelerator pedal is depressed and you are approaching the vehicle ahead, the ICC system will neither control the brake nor warn the driver with the chime and display. The driver must manually control the vehicle speed to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead. Failure to do so could result in severe personal injury or death.

NOTE: When you accelerate by depressing the LSD3114 accelerator pedal or decelerate by push- How to change the set distance ing the SET- switch and the vehicle trav- to the vehicle ahead els faster than the speed set by the driver, the set speed vehicle indicator will The distance to the vehicle ahead can be blink. selected at any time. Each time the DISTANCE switch ᭺A is pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again in that sequence.

Starting and driving 5-99 Distance Approximate distance at 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)] 1. Long 200 (60) 2. Middle 150 (45) 3. Short 90 (30) ∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead changes automatically according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance. ∙ The distance setting will remain at the current setting even if the engine is restarted.

LSD2806 5-100 Starting and driving ᭺1 Steering-wheel-mounted control (left) ᭺2 Vehicle information display ᭺3 Steering Assist switch HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE STEERING ASSIST Use the following methods to enable or disable the Steering Assist. Steering Assist switch: To turn the Steering Assist on or off, push the Steering Assist switch ᭺3 on the instrument panel.

NOTE: ∙ When the Steering Assist switch is used to turn the system on or off, the system remembers the setting even if the ignition switch is cycled. The switch must be pushed again to change the setting to on or off. ∙ The Steering Assist switch changes the status of the “Steering Assist” selection made in the “Settings” screen in the vehicle information display.

LSD3231 Starting and driving 5-101 Setting in the vehicle information dis- How to cancel the ProPILOT Assist INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL play: system (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT 1. Press the button on the steering To cancel the ProPILOT Assist system, use Assist) wheel ᭺1 until “Settings” displays in the one of the following methods: vehicle information display ᭺2 . ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. WARNING 2. Use the button ᭺1 to select ∙ Tap the brake pedal (except at a stand- Failure to follow the warnings and in- “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK still). structions for proper use of the ICC sys- button ᭺1 . tem could result in serious injury or ∙ Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn death. 3. Use the button ᭺1 to select the system off. The ProPILOT Assist sta- “Steering Assist” and then press the OK tus indicator will go out. ∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist button ᭺1 to turn the system on or off. the driver and is not a collision warn- When the ProPILOT Assist system is can- ing or avoidance device. It is recom- NOTE: celed while the vehicle is stopped, the elec- mended for highway use only and it is tronic parking brake is automatically acti- not intended for city driving. It is the ∙ When the Cruise screen is displayed vated. driver’s responsibility to stay alert, on the vehicle information display, drive safely, and be in control of the press the OK button on the steering WARNING vehicle at all times. wheel to call up the “Driving Aids” setting display. To prevent the vehicle from moving or ∙ There are limitations to the ICC sys- rolling unexpectedly, which could result tem capability. The ICC system does ∙ When enabling/disabling the system in serious personal injury or property not function in all driving, traffic, through the vehicle information dis- damage, before exiting the vehicle weather, and road conditions. It is the play or when pushing the Steering make sure to push the ProPILOT Assist driver’s responsibility to stay alert, Assist switch, the system retains the switch to turn the system off, place the drive safely, keep the vehicle in the current settings even if the engine is shift lever in the P (Park) position, and traveling lane, and be in control of the restarted. turn the engine off. vehicle at all times. ∙ Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.

5-102 Starting and driving ∙ The ICC system does not react to sta- cause the ICC system cannot decelerate ∙ When your vehicle is at a standstill for tionary and slow moving vehicles. the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, more than 3 seconds and the vehicle the ICC system sounds a warning chime ahead begins to accelerate, push the ∙ Always drive carefully and attentively and blinks the system display to notify the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accel- when using the ICC system. Read and driver to take necessary action. erator pedal. The ICC system starts to understand the Owner’s Manual thor- follow the vehicle ahead. oughly before using the ICC system. The ICC system cancels and a warning To avoid serious injury or death, do chime sounds if the speed is below ap- ∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead not rely on the system to prevent ac- proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle moves to a different traveling lane, the cidents or to control the vehicle’s is not detected ahead. ICC system accelerates and maintains speed in emergency situations. Do vehicle speed up to the set speed. The ICC system operates as follows: not use the ICC system except in ap- The ICC system does not control vehicle propriate road and traffic conditions. ∙ When there are no vehicles traveling speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You ICC system operation ahead, the ICC system maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed must pay attention to vehicle operation to The ICC system is designed to maintain a range is between approximately 20 and maintain proper distance from vehicles selected distance from the vehicle in front 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h). ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion. of you and can reduce the speed to match ∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, a slower vehicle ahead. The system decel- the ICC system adjusts the speed to erates the vehicle as necessary and if the maintain the distance, selected by the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the ve- system can only apply up to 40% of the hicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle vehicle’s total braking power. This system decelerates to a standstill. Once your should only be used when traffic condi- vehicle stops, the ICC system keeps the tions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly vehicle stopped. constant or when vehicle speeds change ∙ When your vehicle is stopped for less gradually. If a vehicle moves into the travel- than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead ing lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling begins to move, your vehicle will start ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance be- moving again automatically. tween vehicles may become closer be- Starting and driving 5-103 Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, the system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

SSD0254 LSD3316 When driving on the freeway at a set speed System set display with no vehicle and approaching a slower traveling vehicle detected ahead ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to No vehicle detected ahead maintain the distance, selected by the The driver sets the desired vehicle speed driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle based on the road conditions. The ICC sys- ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, tem maintains the set vehicle speed, simi- the ICC system accelerates and maintains lar to standard cruise control, as long as no the speed up to the set speed. Pay atten- vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The tion to the driving operation to maintain ICC system displays the set speed. control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed. 5-104 Starting and driving NOTE: Vehicle ahead accelerates ∙ The stop lights of the vehicle come on When your vehicle is stopped and the ve- when braking is performed by the ICC hicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the system. RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow ∙ When the brake is applied by the sys- the vehicle ahead. tem, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction. Vehicle ahead not detected When the ICC system detects a vehicle When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the vehicle ahead detection indica- ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler- tor and the speed control status indicator ates your vehicle to resume the previously (distance control mode) illuminates (solid set vehicle speed. The ICC system then green ). maintains the set speed. LSD3233 Vehicle ahead stops When a vehicle is no longer detected, the System set display with vehicle ahead When the vehicle ahead decelerates to vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off Vehicle detected ahead stop, your vehicle decelerates to a stand- and speed control status indicator (main- still. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC sys- tain speed control mode) illuminates When a vehicle is detected in the lane tem automatically applies the brakes to (green outline ). ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve- keep the vehicle stopped. When your ve- The ICC system gradually accelerates to hicle by controlling the throttle and apply- hicle is at a standstill, the “(RES+) Press to the set speed, but you can depress the ing the brakes to match the speed of a start” message is displayed on the vehicle accelerator pedal to quickly accelerate. slower vehicle ahead. The ICC system then information display. When a vehicle is no longer detected and controls the vehicle speed based on the your vehicle is traveling under approxi- speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the NOTE: mately 15 mph (24 km/h), the ICC system driver selected distance. automatically cancels. When your vehicle stops for less than 3 seconds, your vehicle will automatically follow the vehicle as it accelerates from a stop.

Starting and driving 5-105 Cut-in detection ∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between ve- If a vehicle moves into your traveling lane hicles is increasing. near your vehicle, the ICC system may inform the driver by flashing the vehicle ∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. ahead detection indicator. The warning chime will not sound when: Approach warning ∙ Your vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly. If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve- ∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed, hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys- overriding the system. tem warns the driver with the chime and NOTE: ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve- The approach warning chime may sound LSD3234 hicle distance if: and the system display may flash when When passing another vehicle, the set the radar sensor detects objects on the speed indicator ᭺A flashes when the ve- ∙ The chime sounds. side of the vehicle or on the side of the hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve- ∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator road. This may cause the ICC system to hicle ahead detection indicator turns off and set distance indicator blink. decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. radar sensor may detect these objects When the pedal is released, the vehicle re- ∙ You judge it necessary to maintain a when the vehicle is driven on winding, nar- turns to the previously set speed. Even safe distance. row, or hilly roads or when the vehicle is though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC entering or exiting a curve. In these cases, The warning chime may not sound in system, you can depress the accelerator you will have to manually control the some cases when there is a short distance pedal when it is necessary to accelerate proper distance ahead of your vehicle. your vehicle rapidly. between vehicles. Some examples are: ∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.

5-106 Starting and driving Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af- WARNING ∙ The ICC system is primarily intended fected by vehicle operation (steering for use on straight, dry, open roads In order to reduce the risk of a collision maneuver or driving position in the lane) with light traffic. It is not advisable to that may result in serious injury or or traffic or vehicle conditions (for ex- use the ICC system in city traffic or death, please be aware of the following: ample, if a vehicle is being driven with congested areas. some damage). ∙ This function is only activated with ∙ The ICC system will not adapt auto- the left turn signal and will briefly ac- matically to road conditions. This sys- Acceleration when passing celerate the vehicle even if a lane tem should be used in evenly flowing change is not initiated. This can in- When the ICC system is engaged above traffic. Do not use the system on roads clude non-passing situations such as 37 mph and following a slower vehicle (be- with sharp curves or on icy roads, in left side exits. low ICC set speed), and the turn signal is heavy rain or in fog. activated to the left, the ICC system will ∙ Ensure that when passing another ve- ∙ As there is a performance limit to the automatically start to accelerate the vehicle, the adjacent lane is clear before distance control function, never rely hicle to help initiate passing on the left and initiating the pass. Sudden changes in solely on the ICC system. This system will begin to reduce the distance to vehicle traffic may occur while passing- al- does not correct careless, inattentive ways manually steer or brake as directly ahead. Only the left side turn signal or absentminded driving or overcome needed- never solely rely on the operates this feature. As the driver steers poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad system. the vehicle and moves into the passing weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed lane, if no vehicle is detected ahead the ICC ICC system limitations by depressing the brake pedal, de- system will continue to accelerate to the pending on the distance to the vehicle ICC system set speed. If another vehicle is WARNING ahead and the surrounding circum- detected ahead, then the vehicle will accel- stances in order to maintain a safe erate up to the following speed of that ve- Listed below are the system limitations distance between vehicles. hicle. If the vehicle is not steered into the for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these ∙ When the ICC system automatically left lane to pass, the acceleration will stop brings the car to a stop, your vehicle after a short time and regain the set follow- system limitations could result in serious injury or death: can automatically accelerate if the ve- ing distance. Acceleration can be stopped hicle is stopped for less than approxi- at any point by depressing the brake pedal mately 3 seconds. Be prepared to stop or the CANCEL switch on the steering your vehicle if necessary. wheel. Starting and driving 5-107 ∙ Always pay attention to the operation – On repeated uphill and downhill The following are some conditions in which of the vehicle and be ready to manu- roads the radar sensor cannot properly detect a ally control the proper following dis- vehicle ahead and the system may not op- – When traffic conditions make it dif- tance. The ICC system may not be able erate properly: ficult to keep a proper distance be- to maintain the selected distance between vehicles because of fre- ∙ When the sensor detection is reduced tween vehicles (following distance) or quent acceleration or deceleration (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust selected vehicle speed under some storms, sandstorms, and road spray circumstances. – Interference by other radar from other vehicles) sources. ∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or ∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are ∙ Driving on a steep downhill slope or weather conditions. To avoid acci- towing a trailer. The system may not roads with sharp curves dents, never use the ICC system under detect a vehicle ahead. ∙ Driving on a bumpy road surface, such the following conditions: ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a as an uneven dirt road – On roads with heavy, high-speed vehicle or object can unexpectedly ∙ If dirt, ice, snow or other material is cov- come into the sensor detection zone traffic or sharp curves ering the radar sensor area and cause automatic braking. Always – On slippery road surfaces such as stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys- ∙ A complicated-shaped vehicle such as on ice or snow, etc. tem where not recommended in this a car carrier trailer or flatbed – During bad weather (rain, fog, warning section. truck/trailer is near the vehicle ahead. snow, etc.) The ICC system will not detect the following ∙ Interference by other radar sources – When rain, snow or dirt adhere to objects: the bumper around the distance ∙ When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc. ∙ Stationary or slow moving vehicles sensor ∙ When excessively heavy baggage is – On steep downhill roads (the ve- ∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of hicle may go beyond the set ve- your vehicle. ∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane hicle speed and frequent braking The ICC system is designed to automati- may result in overheating the ∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel cally check the radar sensor’s operation brakes) lane within the limitations of the system. 5-108 Starting and driving The detection zone of the radar sensor is ∙ The camera area of the windshield is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de- fogged up or covered with dirt, water tection zone for the ICC system to maintain drops, ice, snow, etc. the selected distance from the vehicle ∙ Strong light (for example, sunlight or ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside high beams from oncoming vehicles) of the detection zone due to its position enters the front camera within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ∙ A sudden change in brightness occurs ahead if they are traveling offset from the (for example, when the vehicle enters or center line of the lane. A vehicle that is en- exits a tunnel or shaded area or lightning flashes) tering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead. The ICC system (with ProPILOT Assist) uses a multi-sensing front camera. The following are some conditions in which the camera may not properly detect a vehicle and detection of a vehicle ahead may be delayed: ∙ Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles)

Starting and driving 5-109 SSD0252

5-110 Starting and driving Condition A Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set: ∙ Any door is open. ∙ The driver’s seat belt is not fastened. ∙ The vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). ∙ Your vehicle has been stopped by the SSD0253 ICC system for approximately 3 minutes When driving on some roads, such as wind- If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you or longer. ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads by blinking the system indicator and ∙ The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) po- which are under construction, the radar sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will sition or manual shift mode. sensor may detect vehicles in a different have to manually control the proper dis- lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve- tance away from the vehicle traveling ∙ The electronic parking brake is applied. hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the ahead. radar system to decelerate or accelerate ∙ The VDC system is turned off. Automatic cancellation the vehicle. ∙ The AEB applies harder braking. The following are conditions in which the The detection of vehicles may also be af- ∙ VDC (including the traction control sys- ICC system may be temporarily unavail- fected by vehicle operation (steering ma- tem) operates. neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) able. In these instances, the ICC system or vehicle condition. may not cancel and may not be able to ∙ A wheel slips. maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. ∙ When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor. Starting and driving 5-111 ∙ When the radar signal is temporarily in- Condition B Action to take: terrupted. When the radar sensor of the front bumper When the above driving conditions no lon- Action to take: is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC ger exist, turn the system back on. system will automatically be canceled. When the conditions listed above are no lon- ICC system malfunction ger present, turn the system off using the The chime will sound and the “Not Avail- ProPILOT Assist switch. Turn the ProPILOT able: Front Radar Blocked” warning mes- If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be Assist system back on to use the system. sage will appear in the vehicle information turned off automatically, a chime will display. sound, and the speed control status warn- NOTE: ing (orange) will illuminate. Action to take: When the ICC system is canceled under Action to take: the following conditions at a standstill, If the warning message appears, stop the If the warning light comes on, stop the ve- the electronic parking brake is auto- vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever matically activated: in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, off. When the radar signal is temporarily restart the engine and set the ICC system ∙ Any door is open. interrupted, clean the sensor area of the again. If it is not possible to set the ICC ∙ The driver’s seat belt is not fastened. front bumper and restart the engine. If the system or the indicator stays on, it may be “Not Available: Front Radar Blocked” warn- a malfunction. Although the normal driving ∙ Your vehicle has been stopped by the ing message continues to be displayed, can be continued, the ICC system should ICC system for approximately 3 min- be inspected. It is recommended that you utes or longer. have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) this service. position or manual shift mode. ICC sensor maintenance Condition C ∙ The VDC system is turned off. The radar sensor is located on the front of When driving on roads with limited road the vehicle. ∙ When distance measurement be- structures or buildings (for example, long To keep the ICC system operating properly, comes impaired due to adhesion of bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to dirt or obstruction to the sensor. be sure to observe the following: long walls), the system may illuminate the ∙ When the radar signal is temporarily system warning light and display the “Not ∙ Always keep the sensor area clean. interrupted. Available: Front Radar Blocked” message. 5-112 Starting and driving ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas Do not place reflective materials, such as ∙ ∙ The Steering Assist is not a replace- around the sensor. white paper or a mirror, on the instrument for proper driving procedures ment panel. The reflection of sunlight ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans- and is not designed to correct care- may adversely affect the camera unit’s parent material) or install an accessory less, inattentive or absent-minded capability of detecting the lane markers. near the sensor. This could cause failure driving. The Steering Assist will not al- or malfunction. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas ways steer the vehicle to keep it in the around the camera unit. Do not touch lane. It is not designed to prevent loss ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the the camera lens or remove the screw of control. It is the driver’s responsibil- sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This ity to stay alert, drive safely, keep the located on the camera unit. could cause failure or malfunction. vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in If the camera unit is damaged due to an control of the vehicle at all times. ∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front accident, it is recommended that you visit a bumper. ∙ As there is a performance limit to the NISSAN dealer. Steering Assist’s capability, never rely Before customizing or restoring the front STEERING ASSIST solely on the system. The Steering As- bumper, it is recommended that you visit a sist does not function in all driving, NISSAN dealer. traffic, weather, and road conditions. WARNING The camera sensor is located above the Always drive safely, pay attention to Failure to follow the warnings and in- the operation of the vehicle, and inside mirror. structions for proper use of the Steer- manually control your vehicle To keep the proper operation of the sys- ing Assist could result in serious injury appropriately. tems and prevent a system malfunction, or death. ∙ The Steering Assist is intended for use be sure to observe the following: on well-developed freeways or high- ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. ways with gentle (moderate) curves. To avoid risk of an accident, do not use ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans- this system on local or non-highway parent material) or install an accessory roads. near the camera unit.

Starting and driving 5-113 ∙ The Steering Assist only steers the ve- Steering Assist operation hicle to maintain its position in the The Steering Assist controls the steering center of a lane. The vehicle will not system to help keep your vehicle near the steer to avoid objects in the road in center of the lane when driving. The Steer- front of the vehicle or to avoid a ve- ing Assist is combined with the Intelligent hicle moving into your lane. Cruise Control (ICC) system. For additional ∙ It is the driver’s responsibility to stay information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Con- alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in trol (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist)” the traveling lane, and be in control of in this section. the vehicle at all times. Never take The Steering Assist can be activated when your hands off the steering wheel the following conditions are met: when driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your ∙ The ICC system is activated. vehicle safely. ∙ Lane markers on both sides are clearly LSD3235 ∙ Always drive carefully and attentively detected. Steering Assist display and when using the Steering Assist. Read ∙ A vehicle ahead is detected (when the indicators and understand the Owner’s Manual vehicle is driven at speeds under ᭺1 thoroughly before using the Steering 37 mph [60 km/h]). Steering Assist status indicator/ Assist. To avoid serious injury or warning death, do not rely on the system to ∙ The driver grips the steering wheel. Displays the status of the Steering As- prevent accidents or to control the ve- ∙ The vehicle is driven at the center of the sist by the color of the hicle’s speed in emergency situations. lane. indicator/warning Do not use the Steering Assist except in appropriate road and traffic ∙ The turn signals are not operated. ∙ Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steer- conditions. ing Assist standby ∙ The windshield wiper is not operated in the high (HI) speed operation (the Steer- ∙ Steering Assist indicator (green): ing Assist function is disabled after the Steering Assist active wiper operates for approximately 10 seconds). ∙ Steering Assist indicator (yellow): Steering Assist malfunction 5-114 Starting and driving ᭺2 Steering Assist indicator When the Steering Assist deactivates, the Steering Assist status indicator ᭺1 , the Indicates the status of the Steering As- Steering Assist indicator ᭺2 , and the lane sist by the color of the indicator marker indicator ᭺3 on the vehicle infor- ∙ Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steer- mation display turn gray and a chime ing Assist standby sounds twice. ∙ Steering Assist indicator (green): Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) Steering Assist active When a curve or strong cross wind exceeds ᭺3 Lane marker indicator the capabilities of the Steering Assist and Indicates whether the system detects your vehicle approaches either the left or the lane marker the right side of the traveling lane, the I-LI indicator (orange) on the instrument panel ∙ Lane marker indicator (gray): Lane flashes to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI sys- markers not detected tem automatically applies the brakes for a ∙ Lane marker indicator (green): Lane short period of time to help assist the markers detected driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane. This action is in addition ∙ Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane to any Steering Assist actions. departure is detected When the Steering Assist is in operation, the Steering Assist status indicator ᭺1 , the Steering Assist indicator ᭺2 , and the lane marker indicator ᭺3 on the vehicle information display turn green. A chime sounds when the Steering Assist initially activates.

Starting and driving 5-115 Hands on detection When the Steering Assist is activated, it monitors the driver’s steering wheel operation. If the steering wheel is not operated or the driver takes his/her hands off the steering wheel for a period of time, the warning ᭺1 appears in the vehicle information display. If the driver does not operate the steering wheel after the warning has been displayed, an audible alert sounds and the warning flashes in the vehicle information display, followed by a quick brake application to request the driver to take control of the vehicle again. If the driver still does not respond, the Pro- PILOT Assist turns on the hazard flasher and slows the vehicle to a complete stop. The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by steering, braking, accelerating, or operating the ProPILOT Assist switch.

LSD3236 5-116 Starting and driving WARNING – When driving on roads where there ∙ Do not use the Steering Assist under are multiple parallel lane markers, the following conditions because the Steering Assist is not a system for lane markers that are faded or not system may not properly detect lane hands-free driving. Always keep your painted clearly, nonstandard lane markers. Doing so could cause a loss hands on the steering wheel and drive markers, or lane markers covered of vehicle control and result in an your vehicle safely. Failure to do so with water, dirt, snow, etc. accident. could cause a collision resulting in serious personal injury or death. – When driving on roads with dis- – During bad weather (rain, fog, continued lane markers snow, dust, etc.) NOTE: – When driving on roads with a wid- – When rain, snow, sand, etc., is If the driver lightly touches (instead of ening or narrowing lane width thrown up by the wheels of other vehicles firmly grips) the steering wheel, the – When driving on roads where there steering torque sensor may not detect are multiple lanes or unclear lane – When dirt, oil, ice, snow, water, or the driver’s hand(s) on the wheel and a markers due to road construction another object adheres to the sequence of warnings may occur. When camera unit – When driving on roads where there the driver holds and operates the steer- are sharply contrasting objects, – When the lens of the camera unit is ing wheel again, the warnings turn off. such as shadows, snow, water, foggy wheel ruts, seams, or lines remain- Steering Assist limitations – When strong light (for example, ing after road repairs (the Steering sunlight or high beams from on- Assist could detect these items as WARNING coming vehicles) shines on the lane markers) ∙ In the following situations, the cam- camera – When driving on roads where the era may not detect lane markers cor- – When the headlights are not bright traveling lane merges or separates rectly or may detect lane markers in- due to dirt on the lens or the head- correctly and the Steering Assist may lights are off in tunnels or darkness not operate properly: – When a sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or is under a bridge)

Starting and driving 5-117 – When driving on roads where the – When an object such as a sticker or Steering Assist temporary traveling lane merges or separates cargo obstructs the camera standby or where there are temporary lane – When excessively heavy baggage markers because of road Automatic standby due to driving opera- is loaded in the rear seat or lug- construction tion: gage area of your vehicle – When there is a lane closure due to When the driver activates the turn signal, – When the vehicle load capacity is road repairs the Steering Assist is temporarily placed in exceeded a standby mode. (The Steering Assist re- – When driving on a bumpy road sur- – When towing a trailer or other starts automatically when the operating face, such as an uneven dirt road vehicle conditions are met again.) – When driving on sharp curves or ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the winding roads Automatic standby: warning chime sound, and the beep – When driving on repeated uphill may not be heard. In the following cases, a warning message and downhill roads is displayed along with the chime, and the ∙ For the ProPILOT Assist system to op- Steering Assist is placed in a temporary ∙ Do not use the Steering Assist under erate properly, the windshield in front standby mode. (The Steering Assist re- the following conditions because the of the camera must be clean. Replace starts automatically when the operating system will not operate properly: worn wiper blades. The correct size conditions are met again.) wiper blades must be used to help – When driving with a tire that is not make sure the windshield is kept ∙ When lane markers on both sides are within normal tire conditions (for clean. Only use Genuine NISSAN wiper no longer detected example, tire wear, abnormal tire blades, or equivalent wiper blades, pressure, installation of a spare ∙ When a vehicle ahead is no longer de- that are specifically designed for use tire, tire chains, nonstandard tected under approximately 37 mph on your vehicle model and model wheels) (60 km/h) year. It is recommended that you visit – When the vehicle is equipped with your NISSAN dealer for the correct Steering Assist cancel non-original brake or suspension parts for your vehicle. parts Under the following conditions, the Steer- ing Assist cancels, and the Steering Assist status indicator and the Steering Assist indicator turn off: 5-118 Starting and driving ∙ When unusual lane markers appear in tem again. If the warning (orange) contin- If the camera unit is damaged due to an the traveling lane or when the lane ues to illuminate, the Steering Assist is mal- accident, it is recommended that you visit a marker cannot be correctly detected functioning. Although the vehicle is still NISSAN dealer. for some time due to certain conditions drivable under normal conditions, have the Radio frequency statement (for example, a snow rut, the reflection system checked. It is recommended that of light on a rainy day, the presence of you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For USA several unclear lane markers) Steering Assist maintenance FCC ID OAYARS4B ∙ When the windshield wiper operates in This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC the high (HI) speed operation (the Steer- The camera sensor is located above the Rules. Operation is subject to the following ing Assist is disabled when the wiper inside mirror. two conditions: operates for more than approximately To keep the proper operation of the system 10 seconds) and prevent a system malfunction, be sure 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and Action to take: to observe the following: Turn the ICC system off using the CANCEL ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. 2. This device must accept any interfer- switch. When the conditions listed above ence received, including interference ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans- that may cause undesired operation. are no longer present, turn the ICC system parent material) or install an accessory on again. near the camera unit. FCC Warning Steering Assist malfunction ∙ Do not place reflective materials, such Changes or modifications not expressly When the system malfunctions, it turns off as white paper or a mirror, on the instru- approved by the party responsible for automatically. The Steering Assist status ment panel. The reflection of sunlight compliance could void the user’s authority warning illuminates (orange). A chime may may adversely affect the camera unit’s to operate the equipment. sound depending on the situation. capability of detecting the lane mark- For Canada ers. Action to take: Model: ARS4–B ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the IC: 4135A-ARS4B vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- around the camera unit. Do not touch gine off, restart the engine, resume driving, the camera lens or remove the screw FCC ID: OAYARS4B and set the Intelligent Cruise Control sys- located on the camera unit. Starting and driving 5-119 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC This equipment should be installed and CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) Rules and with Industry Canada licence- operated with minimum distance of 30 cm CRUISE CONTROL MODE exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- between the radiator and your body. ject to the following two conditions: The transmitter must not be co-located or NOTE: 1. This device may not cause harmful in- operating in conjunction with any other an- ProPILOT Assist provides no approach terference, and tenna or transmitter. warnings, automatic braking, or steering 2. This device must accept any interfer- Cet equipement est conforme aux limites assist in the conventional (fixed speed) ence received, including interference d’exposition aux rayonnements IC etablies cruise control mode. that may cause undesired operation. pour un environnement non controle. Cet This mode allows driving at a speed be- equipement doit etre installe et utilise avec Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with- un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- out keeping your foot on the accelerator source de rayonnement et votre corps. eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation pedal. est autorisee aux deux conditions suiv- FCC Notice antes: WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de approved by the party responsible for ∙ In the conventional (fixed speed) brouillage, et compliance could void the user’s authority cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are to operate the equipment. 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter too close to the vehicle ahead, as nei- tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, ther the presence of the vehicle ahead meme si le brouillage est susceptible nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. detected. Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor- ∙ Pay special attention to the distance mation: between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur. This equipment complies with FCC radia- ∙ Always confirm the setting in the ICC tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- system display. trolled environment.

5-120 Starting and driving ᭺4 ∙ Do not use the conventional (fixed SET- switch: speed) cruise control mode when Sets desired cruise speed or reduces driving under the following speed incrementally conditions: – When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed – In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed – On winding or hilly roads – On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.) – In very windy areas LSD3120 ∙ Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control and result in an accident. control switches ᭺1 RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally ᭺2 CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed ᭺3 ProPILOT Assist switch: Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or off

Starting and driving 5-121 ∙ Cruise control ON indicator (gray): In- dicates that the ProPILOT Assist switch is on ∙ Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set ∙ Cruise control warning (yellow): Indi- cates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system

LSD3283 LSD3284 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Operating conventional (fixed control mode display and speed) cruise control mode indicators To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) The display is located in the vehicle infor- cruise control mode, push and hold the mation display. ProPILOT Assist switch ᭺A for longer than about 1.5 seconds. 1. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle When pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch speed. For Canadian models, the speed on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise is displayed in km/h. control mode display and indicators ᭺B are displayed in the vehicle information dis- 2. Cruise indicator: play. After you hold the ProPILOT Assist This indicator indicates the condition switch on for longer than about 1.5 sec- of the ICC system depending on a onds, the ICC system display turns off. The color. cruise indicator appears. You can now set 5-122 Starting and driving your desired cruising speed. Pushing the To cancel the preset speed, use any of the ProPILOT Assist switch again will turn the following methods: system completely off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the 1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle system is also automatically turned off. speed indicator will turn off. To use the ICC system again, quickly push 2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed and release the ProPILOT Assist switch indicator will turn off. (vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode) 3. Turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off. or push and hold it (conventional cruise Both the cruise indicator and vehicle control mode) again to turn it on. speed indicator will turn off. CAUTION To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one To avoid accidentally engaging cruise of the following three methods: control, make sure to turn the ProPILOT LSD3285 1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When Assist switch off when not using the ICC To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- the vehicle attains the desired speed, system. hicle to the desired speed, push the SET- ᭺C push and release the SET- switch. switch and release it. (The color of the 2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When cruise indicator changes to green and set the vehicle attains the desired speed, vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take release the switch. your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. 3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set ∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the speed will increase by about 1 mph accelerator pedal. When you release the (1.6 km/h). pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: ∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep 1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle attains the desired speed, push vehicle speed. the SET- switch and release it. Starting and driving 5-123 REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB) (if so equipped)

2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release WARNING the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB 3. Push, then quickly release the SET- system could result in serious injury or switch. Each time you do this, the set death. speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). ∙ The RAB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement To resume the preset speed, push and re- for proper driving procedures. Always lease the RES+ switch. The vehicle will re- use the side and rear mirrors and turn sume the last set cruising speed when the and look in the direction you will move vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). before and while backing up. Never rely solely on the RAB system. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the LSD3241 vehicle at all times. The RAB system detects obstacles behind 1 ∙ There is a limitation to the RAB system the vehicle using the parking sensors ᭺ capability. The RAB system is not ef- located on the rear bumper. fective in all situations. NOTE: The RAB system can assist the driver when You can temporarily cancel the sonar the vehicle is backing up and approaching function in the vehicle, but the RAB sys- objects directly behind the vehicle. tem will continue to operate. For additional information, please refer to “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” in this section.

5-124 Starting and driving ᭺1 RAB system warning light and RAB system warning indicator ᭺2 Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) ᭺3 Center display (if so equipped) RAB SYSTEM OPERATION When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB system operates. If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display, a red frame will appear in the center display (for vehicles with the Intelligent Around View Monitor system), and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.

NOTE: ∙ The brake lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the RAB system. ∙ When the brakes operate, a noise may LSD3279 be heard. This is not a malfunction. Starting and driving 5-125 TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system ON or OFF. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. To set the RAB system to on or off, use the OK button to check the box for “Rear.” When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE: The RAB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

LSD3237 5-126 Starting and driving RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ∙ Always check your surroundings and ∙ The RAB system may not operate in turn to check what is behind you be- the following conditions: WARNING fore and while backing up. The RAB – There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., at- system detects stationary objects be- Listed below are the system limitations tached to the sonar sensors. for the RAB system. Failure to follow the hind the vehicle. The RAB system does warnings and instructions for proper not detect the following objects: – A loud sound is heard in the area around the vehicle. use of the RAB system could result in – Moving objects serious injury or death. – The surface of the obstacle is di- – Low objects ∙ When the vehicle approaches an ob- agonal to the rear of the vehicle. – Narrow objects stacle while the accelerator or brake ∙ The RAB system may unintentionally pedal is depressed, the function may – Wedge-shaped objects operate in the following conditions: not operate or the start of operation may be delayed. The RAB system may – Objects close to the bumper (less – There is overgrown grass in the not operate or may not perform suffi- than approximately 1 ft [30 cm]) area around the vehicle. ciently due to vehicle conditions, driv- – Objects that suddenly appear – There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll ing conditions, the traffic environ- gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, a – Thin objects such as rope, wire, ment, the weather, road surface parking lot gate) near the side of chain, etc. conditions, etc. Do not wait for the the vehicle. system to operate. Operate the brake ∙ The RAB system may not operate for – There are bumps, protrusions, or pedal by yourself as soon as the following obstacles: manhole covers on the road necessary. – Obstacles located high off the surface. ∙ If it is necessary to override RAB op- ground – The vehicle drives through a eration, strongly press the accelerator – Obstacles in a position offset from draped flag or a curtain. pedal. your vehicle – There is an accumulation of snow – Obstacles, such as spongy materi- or ice behind the vehicle. als or snow, that have soft outer surfaces and can easily absorb a sound wave

Starting and driving 5-127 – An ultrasonic wave source, such as – The brakes are cold at low ambient ∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio system another vehicle’s sonar, is near the temperatures or immediately after volume, an open vehicle window) will vehicle. driving has started. interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. ∙ Once the automatic brake control oper- – The braking force becomes poor ates, it does not operate again if the due to wet brakes after driving SYSTEM MALFUNCTION vehicle approaches the same obstacle. through a puddle or washing the vehicle. If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be ∙ The automatic brake control can only turned off automatically, the RAB system operate for a short period of time. ∙ Turn the RAB system off in the follow- warning light will illuminate, and the “Sys- Therefore, the driver must depress ing conditions to prevent the occur- tem fault” warning message will appear in the brake pedal. rence of an unexpected accident re- the vehicle information display. sulting from sudden system ∙ In the following situations, the RAB operation: Action to take system may not operate properly or may not function sufficiently: – The vehicle is towed. If the warning light illuminates, park the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, – The vehicle is driven in bad – The vehicle is carried on a flatbed and restart the engine. If the warning light weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). truck. continues to illuminate, have the RAB sys- – The vehicle is driven on a steep hill. – The vehicle is on the chassis tem checked. It is recommended that you dynamometer. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. – The vehicle’s posture is changed (e.g., when driving over a bump). – The vehicle drives on an uneven NOTE: road surface. – The vehicle is driven on a slippery If the RAB system cannot be operated road. – Suspension parts other than those temporarily, the RAB system warning designated as Genuine NISSAN – The vehicle is turned sharply by light blinks. parts are used. (If the vehicle turning the steering wheel fully. height or the vehicle body inclina- – Snow chains are used. tion is changed, the system may – Wheels or tires other than NISSAN not detect an obstacle correctly.) recommended are used.

5-128 Starting and driving AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (if so equipped)

∙ Do not subject the area around the WARNING parking sensors ᭺1 to strong impact. Also, do not remove or disassemble the Failure to follow the warnings and in- parking sensors. If the parking sensors structions for proper use of the AEB and peripheral areas are deformed in system could result in serious injury or an accident, etc., have the sensors death. checked. It is recommended that you ∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. to the driver. It is not a replacement ∙ Do not install any stickers (including for the driver’s attention to traffic transparent stickers) or accessories on conditions or responsibility to drive the parking sensors ᭺1 and their sur- safely. It cannot prevent accidents rounding areas. This may cause a mal- due to carelessness or dangerous function or improper operation. driving techniques.

LSD3241 ∙ The AEB system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road SYSTEM MAINTENANCE conditions. Observe the following items to ensure The AEB system can assist the driver when proper operation of the system: there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane. ∙ Always keep the parking sensors ᭺1 clean. ∙ If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them.

Starting and driving 5-129 LSD3293 The AEB system uses a radar sensor ᭺1 located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

LSD3281 5-130 Starting and driving 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the AEB system applies harder braking au- the vehicle will remain at a standstill for 2. AEB emergency warning indicator tomatically. approximately 2 seconds before the 3. AEB system warning light brakes are released. NOTE: AEB SYSTEM OPERATION The vehicle’s brake lights come on when The AEB system will function when your braking is performed by the AEB system. vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and If a risk of a forward collision is detected, roadway conditions, the system may help the AEB system will provide an initial warn- the driver avoid a forward collision or may ing to the driver by both a visual and au- help mitigate the consequences of a colli- dible alert. sion, should one be unavoidable. If the If the driver applies the brakes quickly and driver is handling the steering wheel, accel- forcefully after the warning, and the AEB erating or braking, the AEB system will system detects that there is still the possi- function later or will not function. bility of a forward collision, the system will The automatic braking will cease under the automatically increase the braking force. If following conditions: the driver does not take action, the AEB system issues the second visual warning ∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far and audible warning and also applies par- as necessary to avoid a collision. tial braking. ∙ When the accelerator pedal is depressed. ∙ When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead.

Starting and driving 5-131 TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the AEB system ON or OFF. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE: ∙ The AEB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. ∙ The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB system There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off. LSD3237 5-132 Starting and driving AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – Dirt, ice, snow or other material ∙ The system is designed to automati- covering the radar sensor. cally check the sensor’s functionality, WARNING within certain limitations. The system – Interference by other radar may not detect some forms of ob- Listed below are the system limitations sources. for the AEB system. Failure to operate structions of the sensor area such as the vehicle in accordance with these – Snow or road spray from traveling ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, system limitations could result in seri- vehicles. the system may not be able to worn ous injury or death. – If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g. the driver properly. Be sure that you motorcycle). check, clean and clear the sensor area ∙ The AEB system cannot detect all ve- regularly. hicles under all conditions. – When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves. ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the ∙ The radar sensor does not detect the warning chime sound, and the chime following objects: ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, the may not be heard. – Pedestrians, animals or obstacles AEB system may unexpectedly apply in the roadway. partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, continue to depress the – Oncoming vehicles. accelerator pedal to override the – Crossing vehicles. system. ∙ The radar sensor has some perfor- ∙ Braking distances increase on slip- mance limitations. If a stationary ve- pery surfaces. hicle is in the vehicles’s path, the AEB system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h). ∙ The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:

Starting and driving 5-133 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB system will resume automatically. Condition B When the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Not Available: Front Ra- dar Blocked” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to LSD3238 long walls), the system may illuminate the 5-134 Starting and driving system warning light (orange) and display Action to take the “Not Available: Front Radar Blocked” If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop message. the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- Action to take gine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop AEB system checked. It is recommended the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- lever in the P (Park) position and turn the vice. engine off. Clean the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LSD3293 NOTE: SYSTEM MAINTENANCE If the AEB system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working. The sensor ᭺1 for the AEB is located on the front of the vehicle. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION To keep the system operating properly, be If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be sure to observe the following: turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will ∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front illuminate and the warning message [Mal- bumper clean. function] will appear in the vehicle informa- ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas tion display. around the sensor. ∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction. Starting and driving 5-135 ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the This equipment has been tested and found For Canada sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This to comply with the limits for a Class A digi- Model: ARS4–B could cause failure or malfunction. tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide IC: 4135A-ARS4B ∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front reasonable protection against harmful in- bumper. Before customizing or restor- FCC ID: OAYARS4B terference when the equipment is oper- ing the front bumper, it is recom- ated in a commercial environment. This This device complies with Industry Canada mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. equipment generates, uses, and can radi- licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation Radio frequency statement ate radio frequency energy and, if not in- is subject to the following two conditions: stalled and used in accordance with the For USA 1. This device may not cause interference, instruction manual, may cause harmful in- FCC ID OAYARS4B terference to radio communications. Op- 2. This device must accept any interfer- eration of this equipment in a residential ence, including interference that may This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC area is likely to cause harmful interference cause undesired operation of the de- Rules. in which case the user will be required to vice. Operation is subject to the following two correct the interference at his own ex- Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR conditions: pense. d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- 1. This device may not cause harmful in- Radio frequency radiation exposure infor- eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation terference, and mation: est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 2. This device must accept any interfer- This equipment complies with FCC radia- ence received, including interference tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de that may cause undesired operation. trolled environment. brouillage, et FCC Warning This equipment should be installed and 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter operated with minimum distance of 20 cm tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, Changes or modifications not expressly between the radiator and your body. même si le brouillage est susceptible approved by the party responsible for d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. compliance could void the user’s authority The transmitter must not be co-located or to operate the equipment. operating in conjunction with any other an- Radio frequency radiation exposure infor- tenna or transmitter. mation: 5-136 Starting and driving AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION (if so equipped) This equipment complies with FCC and IC WARNING radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB This equipment should be installed and with Pedestrian Detection system operated with minimum distance of 30 cm could result in serious injury or death. between the radiator and your body. ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection This transmitter must not be co-located or system is a supplemental aid to the operating in conjunction with any other an- driver. It is not a replacement for the tenna or transmitter. driver’s attention to traffic conditions Cet équipement est conforme aux limites or responsibility to drive safely. It can- d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies not prevent accidents due to care- pour un environnement non contrôlé. lessness or dangerous driving techniques. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé LSD3223 ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system entre la source de rayonnement et votre system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road uses a radar sensor located on the front of corps. B conditions. the vehicle ᭺ to measure the distance to FCC Notice the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian De- Changes or modifications not expressly can assist the driver when there is a risk of tection system uses a camera installed be- approved by the party responsible for a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in hind the windshield ᭺A in addition to the compliance could void the user’s authority the traveling lane or with a pedestrian radar sensor. to operate the equipment. ahead in the traveling lane.

Starting and driving 5-137 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator 2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator 3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION The AEB system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function, the system operates at speeds between6–37mph(10 – 60 km/h). If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.

LSD3281 5-138 Starting and driving If the driver does not take action, the AEB The automatic braking will cease under the with Pedestrian Detection system issues following conditions: the second visual (flashing) (red and white) ∙ When the steering wheel is turned to and audible warning. If the driver releases avoid a collision. the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision ∙ When the accelerator pedal is de- becomes imminent, the AEB with Pedes- pressed. trian Detection system applies harder ∙ When there is no longer a vehicle or a braking automatically. pedestrian detected ahead. While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- system is operating, you may hear the tem has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle sound of brake operation. This is normal will remain at a standstill for approximately and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian 2 seconds before the brakes are released. Detection system is operating properly.

NOTE: The vehicle’s brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences if a collision should be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will function later or will not function. Starting and driving 5-139 TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to enable or disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the AEB with Pedes- trian Detection system warning light illuminates.

LSD3237 5-140 Starting and driving NOTE: – Small pedestrians (including small – For pedestrian detection, the AEB ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection children), animals and cyclists. with Pedestrian Detection system system will be automatically turned will not function when the vehicle – Pedestrians in wheelchairs or us- on when the engine is restarted. is driven at speeds over approxi- ing mobile transport such as mately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below scooters, child-operated toys, or ∙ The I-FCW system is integrated into approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). the AEB with Pedestrian Detection skateboards. ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selec- – Pedestrians who are seated or oth- system will not function for pedestri- tion in the vehicle information display erwise not in a full upright stand- ans in darkness or in tunnels, even if for the I-FCW system. When the AEB ing or walking position. system is turned off, the I-FCW sys- there is street lighting in the area. – Oncoming vehicles tem is also turned off. ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection – Crossing vehicles system may not function if the vehicle AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN – Obstacles on the roadside ahead is narrow (for example, a DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS motorcycle). ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection WARNING system has some performance limitations. system may not function if the speed Listed below are the system limitations difference between the two vehicles is for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection – If a stationary vehicle is in the vehi- too small. cle’s path, the AEB with Pedestrian system. Failure to operate the vehicle in ∙ The radar sensor AEB with Pedestrian accordance with these system limita- Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at Detection system may not function tions could result in serious injury or properly or detect a vehicle ahead in death. speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h). the following conditions: ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection – Poor visibility (conditions such as system cannot detect all vehicles or rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand- pedestrians under all conditions. storms, and road spray from other ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection vehicles) system does not detect the following objects:

Starting and driving 5-141 – Driving on a steep downhill slope – The pedestrian’s profile is partially ∙ In some road and traffic conditions, or roads with sharp curves. obscured or unidentifiable due to the AEB with Pedestrian Detection the pedestrian transporting lug- system may unexpectedly apply par- – Driving on a bumpy road surface, gage, wearing bulky or very loose- tial braking. When acceleration is nec- such as an uneven dirt road. fitting clothing or accessories. essary, depress the accelerator pedal – If dirt, ice, snow or other material is to override the system. ∙ The system performance may de- covering the radar sensor area. grade in the following conditions: ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the – Interference by other radar warning chime sound, and the chime – The vehicle is driven on a slippery sources. may not be heard. road. – The camera area of the windshield – The vehicle is driven on a slope. is fogged up, or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc. – Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the trunk – Strong light (for example, sunlight room of your vehicle. or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera. ∙ The system is designed to automati- Strong light causes the area cally check the sensor’s (radar and around the pedestrian to be cast in camera) functionality, within certain a shadow, making it difficult to see. limitations. The system may not detect blockage of sensor areas covered – A sudden change in brightness oc- by ice, snow or stickers, for example. curs. (For example, when the ve- In these cases, the system may not be hicle enters or exits a tunnel or a able to warn the driver properly. Be shaded area or lightning flashes.) sure that you check, clean and clear – The poor contrast of a person to sensor areas regularly. the background, such as having clothing color or pattern which is similar to the background.

5-142 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A: In the following conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically: ∙ The radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source. ∙ The camera area of the windshield is misted or frozen. ∙ Strong light is shining from the front. ∙ The cabin temperature is over approximately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight. ∙ The camera area of the windshield glass is continuously covered with dirt, etc. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically.

LSD3238 Starting and driving 5-143 NOTE: Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for When the inside of the windshield on the this service. camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after NOTE: the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a If the AEB system stops working, the NISSAN dealer. I-FCW system will also stop working. Condition B: SYSTEM MALFUNCTION In the following conditions, the AEB with If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- Pedestrian Detection system warning light tem malfunctions, it will be turned off auto- will illuminate and the system will be matically, a chime will sound, the AEB with turned off automatically and the “Not Avail- Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning able: Front Radar Blocked” warning mes- LSD3223 message [Malfunction] will appear in the sage will appear in the vehicle information vehicle information display. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE display: Action to take The radar sensor is located on the front of ∙ The sensor area of the front bumper is the vehicle ᭺B . The camera is located on covered with dirt or is obstructed. If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- the upper side of the windshield ᭺A . Action to take gine off and restart the engine. If the warn- To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop ing light continues to illuminate, have the system operating properly, be sure to ob- the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift AEB with Pedestrian Detection system serve the following: lever in the P (Park) position and turn the checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Always keep the sensor areas of the engine off. Clean the radar sensor area of front bumper and windshield clean. the front bumper or the camera area of the windshield with a soft cloth, and restart the ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas engine. If the warning light continues to around the sensors (e.g., bumper, wind- illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian shield).

5-144 Starting and driving ∙ Do not cover or attach stickers, or install 2. This device must accept any interfer- L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux any accessory near the sensors. This ence received, including interference conditions suivantes: could block sensor signals and/or that may cause undesired operation. 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de cause failure or malfunction. FCC Warning brouillage, et ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the Changes or modifications not expressly 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit ac- radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This approved by the party responsible for cepter tout brouillage radioélec- could cause failure or malfunction. compliance could void the user’s author- trique subi, même si le brouillage est ∙ Do not place reflective materials, such ity to operate the equipment. susceptible d’en compromettre le as white paper or a mirror, on the instru- For Canada fonctionnement. ment panel. The reflection of sunlight Radio frequency radiation exposure in- may adversely affect the camera unit’s Model: ARS4–B formation: detection capability. IC: 4135A-ARS4B This equipment complies with FCC and IC ∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front FCC ID: OAYARS4B radiation exposure limits set forth for an bumper. Before customizing or restor- uncontrolled environment. ing the front bumper, it is recom- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. This equipment should be installed and licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera- operated with minimum distance of Radio frequency statement tion is subject to the following two conditions: 30 cm between the radiator and your For USA body. 1. This device may not cause interfer- FCC ID OAYARS4B ence, and This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any This device complies with Part 15 of the 2. This device must accept any interfer- other antenna or transmitter. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- ence received, including interference lowing two conditions: that may cause undesired operation Cet équipement est conforme aux lim- of the device. ites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC 1. This device may not cause harmful établies pour un environnement non Le présent appareil est conforme aux interference, and contrôlé. CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Starting and driving 5-145 INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW)

Cet équipement doit être installé et WARNING utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement Failure to follow the warnings and in- et votre corps. structions for proper use of the I-FCW system could result in serious injury or FCC Notice death. Changes or modifications not expressly ∙ The I-FCW system can help warn the approved by the party responsible for driver before a collision occurs but will compliance could void the user’s author- not avoid a collision. It is the driver’s ity to operate the equipment. responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second LSD3293 vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor ᭺1 ahead in the same lane. located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

5-146 Starting and driving 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator 2. AEB system warning light

LSD3282 Starting and driving 5-147 LSD2263 I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.

5-148 Starting and driving TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the I-FCW system ON or OFF. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. When the I-FCW system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE: ∙ The I-FCW system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. ∙ The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off. LSD3237 Starting and driving 5-149 LSD2312 Illustration A I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

5-150 Starting and driving LSD2265 Illustration B WARNING – Oncoming vehicles – Interference by other radar sources. Listed below are the system limitations – Crossing vehicles for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate – Snow or road spray from traveling ∙ (Illustration A) The I-FCW system does the vehicle in accordance with these vehicles. not function when a vehicle ahead is a system limitations could result in seri- narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle. – Driving in a tunnel ous injury or death. ∙ The radar sensor may not detect a ve- – (Illustration B) When the vehicle ∙ The I-FCW system cannot detect all hicle ahead in the following ahead is being towed. vehicles under all conditions. conditions: – (Illustration C) When the distance ∙ The radar sensor does not detect the – Snow or heavy rain to the vehicle ahead is too close, following objects: the beam of the radar sensor is – Dirt, ice, snow or other material – Pedestrians, animals or obstacles obstructed. covering the radar sensor. in the roadway

Starting and driving 5-151 – (Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves. ∙ The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly. ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

5-152 Starting and driving LSD2266 Illustration C

Starting and driving 5-153 LSD2313 Illustration D

5-154 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-FCW system will resume automatically. Condition B When the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Not Available: Front Ra- dar Blocked” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long LSD3238 bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to Starting and driving 5-155 long walls), the system may illuminate the Action to take system warning light (orange) and display If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the “Not Available: Front Radar Blocked” the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- message. gine off and restart the engine. If the warn- Action to take ing light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift vice. lever in the P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LSD3293

NOTE: SYSTEM MAINTENANCE If the AEB system stops working, the The sensor ᭺1 is located on the front of the I-FCW system will also stop working. vehicle. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will ∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front sound, the AEB system warning light (or- bumper clean. ange) will illuminate and the warning mes- ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas sage [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle around the sensor. information display. ∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction. 5-156 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA)

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the This device complies with Industry WARNING sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). could cause failure or malfunction. Operation is subject to the following two Failure to follow the warnings and in- conditions: structions for proper use of the I-DA ∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front system could result in serious injury or bumper. Before customizing or restor- 1. This device may not cause interfer- death. ing the front bumper, it is recom- ence, ∙ The I–DA system is only a warning to mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. 2. This device must accept any interfer- inform the driver of a potential lack of FCC Notice ence, including interference that driver attention or drowsiness. It will may cause undesired operation of not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of For USA the device. control. This device complies with Part 15 of the ∙ The I–DA system does not detect and FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- provide an alert of the driver’s lack of lowing two conditions: attention or fatigue in every situation. 1. This device may not cause harmful ∙ It is the driver’s responsibility to: interference, and ∙ stay alert, 2. This device must accept any interfer- ∙ drive safely, ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ∙ keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, FCC Warning ∙ be in control of the vehicle at all Changes or modifications not expressly times, approved by the party responsible for ∙ avoid driving when tired, compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ∙ avoid distractions (texting, etc). For Canada The I–DA system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driving fatigue.

Starting and driving 5-157 The system monitors driving style and The system resets and starts reassessing steering behavior over a period of time, driving style and steering behavior when and it detects changes from the normal the ignition switch is cycled from the ON to pattern. If the system detects that driver the OFF position and back to the ON posi- attention is decreasing over a period of tion. time, the system uses audible and visual warnings to suggest that the driver take a break.

LSD3239 INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM OPERATION If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the message “Take a break?” appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h). The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warnings per trip.

5-158 Starting and driving HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I–DA system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Driver Attention Alert” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE: The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted. INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the I–DA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- LSD3218 ous injury or death. Starting and driving 5-159 BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

∙ The I-DA system may not operate CAUTION properly and may not provide an alert During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), in the following conditions: follow these recommendations to ob- – Poor road conditions such as an tain maximum engine performance uneven road surface or pot holes. and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to – Strong side wind. follow these recommendations may re- – If you have adopted a sporty driv- sult in shortened engine life and re- ing style with higher cornering duced engine performance. speeds or higher rates of acceleration. ∙ Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do – Frequent lane changes or changes not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. to vehicle speed. LIC3125 ∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any ∙ The I–DA system will not provide an gear. alert in the following conditions: System malfunction If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system ∙ Avoid quick starts. – Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph malfunctions, the system warning mes- (60 km/h). ∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos- sage will appear in the vehicle information sible. – Short lapses of attention. display and the function will be stopped – Instantaneous distractions such automatically. as dropping an object. Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the system warning message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-160 Starting and driving FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient ∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more ∙ Cruise control is particularly effective Driving Tips to help you achieve the most efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle in providing fuel savings when driving fuel economy from your vehicle. due to increased aerodynamic drag. on flat terrains. 1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake ∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin 6. Plan for the Shortest Route Pedal Application when the A/C is on reduces cooling ∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to load. ∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops. determine the best route to save 4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis- time. ∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and tances brake application whenever possible. 7. Avoid Idling ∙ Observing the speed limit and not ∙ Maintain constant speed while com- ∙ Shutting off your engine when safe exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds muting and coast whenever pos- legally allowed) can improve fuel effi- saves fuel and reduces emissions. sible. ciency due to reduced aerodynamic 8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll 2. Maintain Constant Speed drag. Roads ∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and ∙ Maintaining a safe following distance ∙ Automated passes permit drivers to minimize stops. behind other vehicles reduces un- use special lanes to maintain cruis- necessary braking. ∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic ing speed through the toll and avoid lights allows you to reduce your num- ∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate stopping and starting. ber of stops. changes in speed permits reduced 9. Winter Warm Up braking and smooth acceleration ∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini- changes. ∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact mize red light stops and improve fuel to fuel economy. efficiency. ∙ Select a gear range suitable to road ∙ Vehicles typically need no more than conditions. 3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher 30 seconds of idling at start-up to Vehicle Speeds 5. Use Cruise Control effectively circulate the engine oil before driving. ∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more ∙ Using cruise control during highway efficient to open windows to cool the driving helps maintain a steady vehicle due to reduced engine load. speed. Starting and driving 5-161 INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper- ∙ Keep your engine tuned up. If any malfunction occurs in the AWD sys- ating temperature more quickly tem while the engine is running, messages ∙ Follow the recommended scheduled while driving versus idling. are displayed in the meter. maintenance. 10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool ∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct ∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking pressure. Low tire pressure increases area or in the shade whenever pos- tire wear and lowers fuel economy. sible. ∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment. ∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening Improper alignment increases tire wear the windows will help to reduce the and lowers fuel economy. inside temperature faster, resulting in ∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine reduced demand on your A/C sys- oil. For additional information, refer to tem. “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

5-162 Starting and driving LSD3252 LSD3253 LSD3254 If the AWD error warning message is dis- The AWD high temperature message may The tire size message may be displayed if played, there may be a malfunction in the be displayed while trying to free a stuck there is a large difference between the di- AWD system. Reduce vehicle speed and vehicle due to increased oil temperature. ameters of front and rear wheels. Pull off have your vehicle checked. It is recom- The driving mode may change to 2-wheel the road in a safe area, with the engine mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as drive. If this message is displayed, stop the idling. Check that all tire sizes are the same, soon as possible. vehicle with the engine idling, as soon as it that the tire pressure is correct and that is safe to do so. Then if the message turns the tires are not excessively worn. off, you can continue driving. If any warning messages continue to be displayed, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Starting and driving 5-163 WARNING ∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD ∙ If an AWD warning message is dis- equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna- played while driving there may be a ∙ Do not drive beyond the performance mometer (such as the dynamometers malfunction in the AWD system. Re- capability of the tires. Accelerating used by some states for emissions duce the vehicle speed immediately quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or testing) or similar equipment even if and have your vehicle checked. It is sudden braking may cause loss of the other two wheels are raised off the recommended that you visit a NISSAN control, even with AWD engaged. ground. Make sure that you inform dealer as soon as possible. ∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at- the test facility personnel that your ∙ The powertrain may be damaged if tempt to raise two wheels off the vehicle is equipped with AWD before it you continue driving when the AWD ground and shift the transmission to is placed on a dynamometer. Using temperature or tire size incorrect any drive or reverse position with the the wrong test equipment may result messages are displayed engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result ∙ If the AWD high temperature message vehicle movement which could result in serious personal injury or vehicle is displayed while you are driving, pull in serious personal injury or vehicle damage. off the road in a safe area, and idle the damage. engine. The driving mode will change CAUTION to 2WD to prevent the AWD system from malfunctioning. If the warning ∙ Do not operate the engine on a free message turns off, you can drive roller when any of the wheels are again. raised. ∙ If the tire size incorrect message is ∙ If you use the free roller, rotate four displayed while you are driving, pull wheels with the same speed without off the road in a safe area with the raising any wheels. engine idling. Check that all tire sizes are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not excessively worn.

5-164 Starting and driving PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

∙ If a warning message continues to be displayed after the above operations, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WSD0050 WARNING ∙ Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the ∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over transmission placed into P (Park). Fail- flammable materials such as dry ure to do so could cause the vehicle to grass, waste paper or rags. They may move unexpectedly or roll away and ignite and cause a fire. result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal. ∙ Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.

Starting and driving 5-165 POWER STEERING

∙ Do not leave children unattended in- 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. WARNING side the vehicle. They could unknow- 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- ∙ If the engine is not running or is ingly activate switches or controls or sition. turned off while driving, the power as- make the vehicle move. Unattended sist for the steering will not work. children could become involved in se- 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling Steering will be harder to operate. rious accidents. into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as ∙ When the power steering warning ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death illustrated. light illuminates with the engine run- through unintended operation of the ning, there will be no power assist for vehicle and/or its systems, do not ∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB ᭺A : the steering. You will still have control leave children, people who require the Turn the wheels into the curb and of the vehicle, but the steering will be assistance of others or pets unat- move the vehicle forward until the curb much harder to operate. Have the tended in your vehicle. Additionally, side wheel gently touches the curb. power steering system checked. It is the temperature inside a closed ve- recommended that you visit a NISSAN hicle on a warm day can quickly be- ∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB ᭺B : dealer for this service. come high enough to cause a signifi- Turn the wheels away from the curb cant risk of injury or death to people and move the vehicle back until the The power steering system is designed to and pets. curb side wheel gently touches the provide power assistance while driving to curb. operate the steering wheel with light force. ∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO When the steering wheel is operated re- CURB ᭺C : peatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power as- Turn the wheels toward the side of the sist for the steering wheel will be reduced. road so the vehicle will move away This is to prevent overheating of the power from the center of the road if it moves. steering system and protect it from getting 4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK damaged. While the power assist is reposition. duced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. If the steering wheel operation is still performed, the power steering may stop and the power steering warning light will illuminate. In a safe location, stop 5-166 Starting and driving BRAKE SYSTEM

the engine and place the ignition switch in The brake system has two separate hy- WARNING the OFF position. The temperature of the draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, power steering system will go down after a you will still have braking at two wheels. ∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be period of time and the power assist level careful when braking, accelerating or will return to normal after starting the en- BRAKE PRECAUTIONS downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac- gine. The power steering warning light will celerating could cause the wheels to go off. Avoid repeating such steering wheel Vacuum assisted brakes skid and result in an accident. operations that could cause the power The brake booster aids braking by using ∙ If the engine is not running or is steering system to overheat. engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you turned off while driving, the power as- You may hear a noise from the front of the can stop the vehicle by depressing the sist for the brakes will not work. Brak- vehicle when the steering wheel is oper- brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- ing will be harder. ated. This is a normal operational noise sure on the brake pedal will be required to and is not a malfunction. stop the vehicle and stopping distance will Wet brakes be longer. If the power steering warning light illumi- When the vehicle is washed or driven nates while the engine is running, it may Using the brakes through water, the brakes may get wet. As indicate the power steering system is not a result, your braking distance will be lon- functioning properly and may need servic- Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal ger and the vehicle may pull to one side ing. Have the power steering system while driving. This will overheat the brakes, during braking. checked. It is recommended that you visit a wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe NISSAN dealer for this service. gas mileage. speed while lightly pressing the brake When the power steering warning light illu- To help reduce brake wear and to prevent pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until minates with the engine running, the the brakes from overheating, reduce speed the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving power assist for the steering will cease op- and downshift to a lower gear before going the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes eration but you will still have control of the down a slope or long grade. Overheated function correctly. vehicle. At this time, greater steering efforts brakes may reduce braking performance are required to operate the steering wheel, and could result in loss of vehicle control. Parking brake break-in especially in sharp turns and at low speeds. Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake Starting and driving 5-167 shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, Anti-lock Braking System will operate to – When replacing tires, install the in order to assure the best braking perfor- specified size of tires on all four prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer mance. wheels. the vehicle to avoid obstacles. This procedure is described in the vehicle – When installing a spare tire, make WARNING service manual. It is recommended that sure that it is the proper size and you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. type as specified on the Tire and Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so Loading Information label. For ad- may result in increased stopping ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) ditional information, refer to “Tire distances. and Loading Information label” in Self-test feature WARNING the “Technical and consumer infor- ∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but mation” section of this manual. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, it cannot prevent accidents resulting – For additional information, refer to hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The from careless or dangerous driving “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it- computer has a built-in diagnostic feature techniques. It can help maintain ve- yourself” section of this manual. hicle control during braking on slip- that tests the system each time you start pery surfaces. Remember that stop- The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels the engine and move the vehicle at a low ping distances on slippery surfaces do not lock during hard braking or when speed in forward or reverse. When the self- will be longer than on normal sur- braking on slippery surfaces. The system test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise faces even with ABS. Stopping dis- detects the rotation speed at each wheel and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. tances may also be longer on rough, and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- This is normal and does not indicate a mal- gravel or snow covered roads, or if you vent each wheel from locking and sliding. function. If the computer senses a mal- are using tire chains. Always maintain By preventing each wheel from locking, the function, it switches the ABS off and illumi- a safe distance from the vehicle in system helps the driver maintain steering nates the ABS warning light on the front of you. Ultimately, the driver is control and helps to minimize swerving instrument panel. The brake system then responsible for safety. and spinning on slippery surfaces. operates normally but without anti-lock assistance. ∙ Tire type and condition may also af- Using the system fect braking effectiveness. If the ABS warning light illuminates during Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. the self-test or while driving, have the ve- Depress the brake pedal with firm steady hicle checked. It is recommended that you pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 5-168 Starting and driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

Normal operation WARNING The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper- The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist Under certain driving conditions, the VDC ates at speeds above3-6mph(5- braking operation and is not a collision system helps to perform the following 10 km/h). The speed varies according to warning or avoidance device. It is the functions: road conditions. driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at ∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce When the ABS senses that one or more all times. wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel wheels are close to locking up, the actuator so power is transferred to a non- rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres- slipping drive wheel on the same axle. sure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa- ∙ Controls brake pressure and engine tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise output to reduce drive wheel slip based from under the hood or feel a vibration on vehicle speed (traction control func- from the actuator when it is operating. This tion). is normal and indicates that the ABS is op- ∙ Controls brake pressure at individual erating properly. However, the pulsation wheels and engine output to help the may indicate that road conditions are haz- driver maintain control of the vehicle in ardous and extra care is required while the following conditions: driving. – Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol- BRAKE ASSIST low the steered path despite in- When the force applied to the brake pedal creased steering input) exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is – Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due activated generating greater braking force to certain road or driving conditions) than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force. The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.

Starting and driving 5-169 When the VDC system operates, the When the VDC system is turned off in the WARNING indicator light in the instrument panel vehicle information display, the VDC sys- flashes to note the following: tem still operates to prevent one drive ∙ The VDC system is designed to help wheel from slipping by transferring power the driver maintain stability but does ∙ The road may be slippery or the system not prevent accidents due to abrupt to a non-slipping drive wheel. The in- may determine some action is required steering operation at high speeds or dicator light flashes if this occurs. All other to help keep the vehicle on the steered by careless or dangerous driving path. VDC functions are off and the indica- techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and tor light will not flash. be especially careful when driving and ∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake The VDC system is automatically reset to cornering on slippery surfaces and al- pedal and hear a noise or vibration from ON when the ignition switch is placed in the ways drive carefully. under the hood. This is normal and indi- OFF position then back to the ON position. cates that the VDC system is working ∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen- properly. The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea- sion. If suspension parts such as ture that tests the system each time you shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- ∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the start the engine and move the vehicle for- bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are road conditions. ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When not NISSAN recommended for your For additional information, refer to “Slip in- the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake the VDC system may not operate (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instru- pedal. This is normal and is not an indica- properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and ments and controls” section of this manual. tion of a malfunction. the indicator light may flash or If a malfunction occurs in the system, the indicator light may the indicator light comes on in the illuminate. instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when the indicator light is on. The vehicle information display is used to turn off the VDC system. The indicator light illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off. 5-170 Starting and driving ∙ If brake related parts such as brake ∙ If wheels or tires other than the ∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen- pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended ones are used, sion. If suspension parts such as NISSAN recommended or are ex- the VDC system may not operate shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- tremely deteriorated, the VDC system properly and the indicator light bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are may not operate properly and both may flash or the indicator light not NISSAN recommended for your the and indicator lights may illuminate. vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, may illuminate. the VDC system may not operate ∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for properly. This could adversely affect ∙ If engine control related parts are not winter tires or tire chains on a snow vehicle handling performance, and NISSAN recommended or are ex- covered road. the indicator light may flash or tremely deteriorated, both the BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION the indicator light may and the indicator lights may illuminate. illuminate. During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of ∙ If brake related parts such as brake ∙ When driving on extremely inclined force to each of the front and rear wheels pads, rotors and calipers are not surfaces such as higher banked cor- depending on the radius of the turn. NISSAN recommended or are ex- ners, the VDC system may not operate tremely deteriorated, the VDC system properly and the indicator light WARNING may not operate properly and both may flash or the indicator light ∙ The VDC system is designed to help the and indicator light may may illuminate. Do not drive on these illuminate. types of roads. the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt ∙ If engine control related parts are not ∙ When driving on an unstable surface steering operation at high speeds or NISSAN recommended or are ex- such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or by careless or dangerous driving tremely deteriorated, both the ramp, the indicator light may techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and and the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may be especially careful when driving and illuminate. illuminate. This is not a malfunction. cornering on slippery surfaces and al- Restart the engine after driving onto ways drive carefully. a stable surface.

Starting and driving 5-171 CHASSIS CONTROL

∙ When driving on extremely inclined The chassis control is an electric control When the I-TC is operating, you may feel a surfaces such as higher banked cor- module that includes the following func- pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a ners, the VDC system may not operate tions: noise. This is normal and indicates that the I-TC is operating properly. properly and the indicator light ∙ Intelligent Trace Control Even if the I-TC is turned off, some functions may flash or the indicator light ∙ Active Ride Control may illuminate. Do not drive on these will remain on to assist the driver (for ex- types of roads. INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL ample, avoidance scenes). ∙ When driving on an unstable surface (I-TC) ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC) such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or This system senses driving based on the This system senses upper body motion ramp, the indicator light may driver’s steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at (based on wheel speed information) and flash or the indicator light may controls engine torque and four wheel illuminate. This is not a malfunction. individual wheels to aid tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle response. brake pressure. This will enhance ride com- Restart the engine after driving onto fort in effort to restrain uncomfortable up- a stable surface. The I-TC can be set to on (enabled) or off per body movement when passing over ∙ If wheels or tires other than the (disabled) through the vehicle information undulated road surfaces. This system NISSAN recommended ones are used, display “Settings” page. For additional infor- comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h). the VDC system may not operate mation, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” sec- When the VDC system is turned off, the ARC properly and the indicator light tion of this manual. is also turned off. may flash or the indicator light When the ARC is operating, you may hear may illuminate. When the VDC system is turned off, the I-TC is also turned off. noise and sense slight deceleration. This is ∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for normal and indicates that the ARC is oper- winter tires or tire chains on a snow WARNING ating properly. covered road. The I-TC may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively.

5-172 Starting and driving HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so equipped)

WARNING When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill start assist system automatically keeps ∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist the brakes applied to help prevent the ve- system to prevent the vehicle from hicle from rolling backward in the time it moving backward on a hill. Always takes the driver to release the brake pedal drive carefully and attentively. De- and apply the accelerator. press the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be es- The hill start assist system will operate au- pecially careful when stopped on a hill tomatically under the following conditions: on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to ∙ The transmission is shifted to a forward prevent the vehicle from rolling back- or reverse gear. wards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury ∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a or death. hill by applying the brake. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After ∙ The hill start assist system is not de- 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll LSD3247 signed to hold the vehicle at a stand- back and the hill start assist system will The RSS sounds a tone to inform the driver still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal stop operating completely. of obstacles near the bumper. when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause The hill start assist system will not operate When the “DISPLAY” key is on, the sonar the vehicle to roll backwards and may when the shift lever is placed in the N (Neu- view will automatically appear in the result in a collision or serious personal tral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level touch-screen display. An additional view of injury. road. the sonar status will appear in the vehicle information display for reference. ∙ The hill start assist system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Fail- ure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-173 WARNING ∙ The system is not designed to prevent ∙ Keep the sonar sensors (located on contact with small or moving objects. the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice ∙ The RSS is a convenience but it is not a Always move slowly. The system will and large accumulations of dirt. Do substitute for proper parking. not detect small objects below the not clean the sensors with sharp ob- ∙ The driver is always responsible for bumper, and may not detect objects jects. If the sensors are covered, the safety during parking and other ma- close to the bumper or on the ground. accuracy of the sonar function will be neuvers. Always look around and diminished. ∙ The system may not detect the fol- check that it is safe to do so before lowing objects: fluffy objects such as parking. SYSTEM OPERATION snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.; ∙ Read and understand the limitations thin objects such as rope, wire and The system informs with a visual and au- of the RSS as contained in this section. chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects. dible alert of rear obstacles when the shift The colors of the corner sonar indica- lever is in the R (Reverse) position. If your vehicle sustains damage to the tor and the distance guide lines in the Sonar Operation Table rear view indicate different distances bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or to the object. bent, the sensing zone may be altered RR Sensor causing inaccurate measurement of ob- ∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic Range Sound Display stacles or false alarms. sources such as an automatic car Roo wash, a truck’s compressed-air CAUTION o – Display/Beep when detect brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may ∙ Excessive noise (such as audio system † – Display on camera view include reduced performance or a volume or an open vehicle window) x – No Display and Beep false activation. will interfere with the tone and it may The system is deactivated at speeds above not be heard. ∙ This function is designed as an aid to 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower the driver in detecting large station- speeds. ary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the obstacle gets away from the vehicle. 5-174 Starting and driving When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

LSD3246 LSD2137 When the corner of the vehicle moves The system indicators ᭺A will appear when closer to an object, the corner sonar indi- the vehicle moves closer to an object. cator ᭺A appears. When the center of the vehicle moves close to an object, the center sonar indicator ᭺B appears.

Starting and driving 5-175 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE SONAR SYSTEM The system is automatically activated when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system: 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Rear” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. – Select “Auto Show Sonar” to display the parking sensor in the vehicle information display when the sonar system activates. – Select “Distance” to change the sonar system distance to “Long,” “Me- dium” or “Short.”

LSD3240 5-176 Starting and driving Action to take: SONAR LIMITATIONS ∙ The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. When the above conditions no longer exist, WARNING Always move slowly. The system will the system will resume automatically. Listed below are the system limitations not detect small objects below the for the sonar system. Failure to operate bumper or on the ground. the vehicle in accordance with these ∙ The system may not detect the fol- system limitations could result in seri- lowing objects: fluffy objects such as ous injury or death. snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; ∙ Read and understand the limitations thin objects such as rope, wire and of the sonar system as contained in chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects. this section. Inclement weather may ∙ The system may not detect objects at affect the function of the sonar sys- speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and tem; this may include reduced perfor- may not detect certain angular or mance or a false activation. moving objects. ∙ The system is deactivated at speeds SYSTEM TEMPORARILY above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. UNAVAILABLE When sonar blockage is detected, the sys- ∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic tem will be deactivated automatically. sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s compressed-air The system is not available until the condi- brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect tions no longer exist. the function of the system; this may The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem- include reduced performance or a porary ambient conditions such as splash- false activation. ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.

Starting and driving 5-177 COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Do not attach stickers (including transpar- FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK ent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the sonar sensors. To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock Do not strike or damage the area around becomes frozen, heat the key before in- the sonar sensors. It is recommended that serting it into the key hole or use the re- you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around mote keyless entry function on the Intelli- the sonar sensors is damaged due to a gent Key. collision. ANTIFREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, LSD3241 refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do- it-yourself” section of this manual. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE BATTERY The sonar sensors ᭺1 are located on the rear bumper. Always keep the area near If the battery is not fully charged during the sonar sensors clean. extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem- battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, porary ambient conditions such as splash- the battery should be checked regularly. ing water, mist or fog. For additional information, refer to “Battery” The blocked condition may also be caused in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.

5-178 Starting and driving DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER Skid and traction capabilities of studded DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be If the vehicle is to be left outside without poorer than that of non-studded snow WARNING antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ- tires. ing the engine block. Refill before operating ∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), the vehicle. For additional information, refer 3. Tire chains may be used. For additional very cold snow or ice can be slick and information, refer to “Tire chains” in the to “Changing engine coolant” in the “Do-it- very hard to drive on. The vehicle will “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. yourself” section of this manual. have much less traction or “grip” un- SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT der these conditions. Try to avoid driv- TIRE EQUIPMENT ing on wet ice until the road is salted It is recommended that the following items or sanded. 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to be carried in the vehicle during winter: provide superior performance on dry ∙ Whatever the condition, drive with pavement. However, the performance ∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re- caution. Accelerate and slow down of these tires will be substantially remove ice and snow from the windows with care. If accelerating or down- duced in snowy and icy conditions. If and wiper blades. shifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. you operate your vehicle on snowy or ∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use the jack to give it firm support. ∙ Allow more stopping distance under of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES these conditions. Braking should be ∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow- on all four wheels. It is recommended started sooner than on dry pavement. drifts. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire ∙ Allow greater following distances on type, size, speed rating and availability ∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the slippery roads. information. windshield-washer fluid reservoir. ∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). 2. For additional traction on icy roads, These may appear on an otherwise studded tires may be used. However, clear road in shaded areas. If a patch some U.S. states and Canadian prov- of ice is seen ahead, brake before inces prohibit their use. Check local, reaching it. Try not to brake while on state and provincial laws before install- the ice, and avoid any sudden steering ing studded tires. maneuvers.

Starting and driving 5-179 ∙ Do not use the cruise control on slip- ∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and pery roads. extension cord rated for at least 10 A. properly store the cord to keep it away Plug the extension cord into a Ground from moving parts. ∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, gases under your vehicle. Keep snow grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to clear of the exhaust pipe and from use the proper extension cord or a around your vehicle. grounded outlet can result in a fire or ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so electrical shock and cause serious equipped) personal injury. To use the engine block heater: Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting. 1. Turn the engine off. The engine block heater should be used 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) block heater cord. or lower. 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten- WARNING sion cord. ∙ Do not use your engine block heater 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground with an ungrounded electrical system Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet. seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded 5. The engine block heater must be connection. plugged in for at least 2–4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to ∙ Disconnect and properly store the en- properly warm the engine coolant. Use gine block heater cord before starting an appropriate timer to turn the engine the engine. Damage to the cord could block heater on. result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.

5-180 Starting and driving ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION/ ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT (if so equipped) ∙ Do not make any modification including sound deadening or modifications around the microphones or speakers. ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT Active sound enhancement enhances existing engine sounds according to the engine speed and driving modes through the speakers and woofer (if so equipped).

LSD3242 LSD3261 Front Microphone Rear Microphones ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION NOTE: This system uses microphones ᭺1 located To operate the active noise cancellation inside the vehicle to detect engine boom- system properly: ing noise. The system then automatically ∙ Do not cover the speakers or woofer generates a noise canceling sound (if so equipped). through the speakers and woofer (if so equipped) to reduce engine booming ∙ Do not cover the microphones. noise. ∙ Do not change or modify speakers including the woofer (if so equipped) and any audio related components such as the amplifier.

Starting and driving 5-181 MEMO

5-182 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 6-2 Towing recommended by NISSAN ...... 6-12 Emergency engine shut off ...... 6-2 Two-Wheel Drive models with Flat tire ...... 6-3 Continuously Variable Transmission Tire Pressure Monitoring System (CVT) ...... 6-13 (TPMS)...... 6-3 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models with Changing a flat tire ...... 6-4 Continuously Variable Transmission Jump starting ...... 6-9 (CVT) ...... 6-14 Push starting ...... 6-11 Vehicle recovery If your vehicle overheats...... 6-11 (freeing a stuck vehicle)...... 6-14 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-12 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

WARNING To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the follow- ∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure ing procedure: to move the vehicle well off the road. – Rapidly push the push-button ignition ∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash- switch three consecutive times in less ers while moving on the highway un- than 1.5 seconds, or less unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle – Push and hold the push-button ignition might become a hazard to other switch for more than 2 seconds. traffic. ∙ Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on. The flashers will operate with the ignition LIC0394 switch placed in any position. Push the switch on to warn other drivers Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use when you must stop or park under emer- of the hazard warning flasher switch gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash. while driving.

6-2 In case of emergency FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING WARNING you have a flat tire, replace it with a SYSTEM (TPMS) spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect is flat and all tires are properly in- electric medical equipment. Those This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pres- flated, have the vehicle checked. It is who use a pacemaker should contact sure Monitoring system (TPMS). It monitors recommended that you visit a NISSAN the electric medical equipment tire pressure of all tires except the spare. dealer for this service. When the low tire pressure warning light is manufacturer for the possible influ- lit, and the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” ences before use. ∙ When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will warning appears in the vehicle information ∙ If the low tire pressure warning light not function and the low tire pressure display, one or more of your tires is signifi- illuminates while driving, avoid sud- warning light will flash for approxi- cantly under-inflated. If equipped, the sys- den steering maneuvers or abrupt mately one minute. Have your tires re- tem also displays pressure of all tires (ex- braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off placed and/or TPMS system reset as the road to a safe location and stop cept the spare tire) on the display screen by soon as possible. It is recommended the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- sending a signal from a sensor that is in- that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ing with under-inflated tires may per- stalled in each wheel. If the vehicle is being these services. driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will manently damage the tires and in- activate and warn you of it by the low tire crease the likelihood of tire failure. ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- pressure warning light. This system will ac- Serious vehicle damage could occur nally specified by NISSAN could affect and may lead to an accident and could tivate only when the vehicle is driven at the proper operation of the TPMS. result in serious personal injury. speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi- ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol Check the tire pressure for all four tire sealant into the tires, as this may tional information, refer to “Warning lights, tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the cause a malfunction of the tire pres- indicator lights and audible reminders” in recommended COLD tire pressure sure sensors. the “Instruments and controls” section and shown on the Tire and Loading Infor- “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in mation label to turn the low tire pres- the “Starting and driving” section of this sure warning light OFF. If the light still manual. illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

In case of emergency 6-3 CHANGING A FLAT TIRE WARNING If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions ∙ Make sure the parking brake is se- below: curely applied and the Continuously Stopping the vehicle Variable Transmission (CVT) is shifted into P (Park). 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and ∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is away from traffic. on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. hazardous. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the ∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic parking brake. Move the shift lever to P is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro- (Park). fessional road assistance. 4. Turn off the engine. LCE2142 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assis- A. Blocks tance personnel that you need assis- B. Flat tire tance. Blocking wheels 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away Place suitable blocks at both the front and from traffic and clear of the vehicle. back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency LCE2434 WCE0067 SCE0630 Getting the spare tire and tools Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire. Removing wheel cover (if so Remove the spare tire. Open the trunk. Lift the luggage floor. Re- equipped) move the wheel nut wrench ᭺1 and the jack ᭺2 from the storage cover ᭺3 . Then CAUTION remove the tool storage cover ᭺3 to access Do not use your hands to pry off wheel the spare tire. caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury. To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod ᭺1 as illustrated. Apply cloth ᭺2 between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover. Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface. In case of emergency 6-5 ∙ Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change. ∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. ∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. ∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack. LCE2435 ∙ Do not start or run the engine while Jack-up point vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the Jacking up vehicle and removing vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip the damaged tire differentials. WARNING ∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack. ∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is nec- ∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s) essary to work under the vehicle, sup- off the ground. It may cause the ve- port it with safety stands. hicle to move.

6-6 In case of emergency 3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

LCE0020 Always refer to the illustration for the cor- 2. Place the jack directly under the rect placement and jack-up points for your jack-up point as illustrated so the top specific vehicle model and jack type. of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head be- Carefully read the caution label attached tween the two notches in the front or to the jack body and the following in- the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of structions. the jack head between the notches as 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two shown. turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove NOTE: the wheel nuts until the tire is off the Do not place jack on the notches be- ground. tween the front most and rear most jacking points. The jack should be used on firm and level ground. In case of emergency 6-7 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire The wheel nuts must be kept tightened touches the ground. Then, with the to specification at all times. It is recom- wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel mended that wheel nuts be tightened to nuts securely in the sequence illus- specifications at each lubrication inter- trated (᭺A , ᭺B , ᭺C , ᭺D , ᭺E ). Lower the ve- val. hicle completely. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres- WARNING sure. ∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly COLD pressure: After vehicle has been tightened wheel nuts can cause the parked for 3 hours or more or driven less wheel to become loose or come off. than 1 mile (1.6 km). This could cause an accident. COLD tire pressures are shown on the ∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel Tire Load and Information label affixed WCE0056 studs or nuts. This could cause the to the driver side center pillar. nuts to become loose. Installing the spare tire 5. Securely store the flat tire in the tire well ∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the and jacking equipment in the vehicle. The spare tire is designed for emergency vehicle has been driven for 600 miles use. For additional information, refer to (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, NOTE: “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” etc.) section of this manual. Remove the center wheel cap before As soon as possible, tighten the wheel storing the flat tire. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface nuts to the specified torque with a between the wheel and hub. torque wrench. 6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire. 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and Wheel nut tightening torque: tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 83 ft-lb (113 N·m) 7. Close the trunk. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated (᭺A , ᭺B , ᭺C , ᭺D , ᭺E ) until they are tight. 6-8 In case of emergency JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, WARNING ∙ Whenever working on or near a bat- the instructions and precautions below tery, always wear suitable eye protec- ∙ Always make sure that the spare tire must be followed. tors (for example, goggles or indus- and jacking equipment are properly trial safety spectacles) and remove secured after use. Such items can be- WARNING rings, metal bands, or any other jew- come dangerous projectiles in an ac- elry. Do not lean over the battery cident or sudden stop. ∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting when jump starting. ∙ The spare tire is designed for emer- in severe injury or death. It could also ∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen gency use. For additional information, damage your vehicle. battery. It could explode and cause refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do- serious injury. it-yourself” section of this manual. ∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. ∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine Keep all sparks and flames away from cooling fan. It could come on at any the battery. time. Keep hands and other objects ∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into away from it. contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the con- tacted area with water. ∙ Keep battery out of the reach of children. ∙ The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-9 CAUTION ∙ Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive (ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery. ∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle LCE2223 and let it run for a few minutes. WARNING 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift 6. Keep the engine speed of the booster lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces- vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start Always follow the instructions below. sary electrical systems (lights, heater, the engine of the vehicle being jump Failure to do so could result in damage air conditioner, etc.). started. to the charging system and cause personal injury. 3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK CAUTION position. 1. If the booster battery is in another ve- Do not keep the starter motor engaged hicle, position the two vehicles to bring 4. Connect the jumper cables in the se- for more than 10 seconds. If the engine their batteries near each other. quence illustrated (᭺A , ᭺B , ᭺C , ᭺D ). does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and Do not allow the two vehicles to wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. touch. 7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

6-10 In case of emergency PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen an extremely high temperature gauge for steam or coolant escaping from the ∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The reading), or if you feel a lack of engine radiator before opening the hood. (If three-way catalyst may be damaged. power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the steam or coolant is escaping, turn off ∙ Continuously Variable Transmission following steps. the engine.) Do not open the hood fur- (CVT) models cannot be push-started ther until no steam or coolant can be or tow-started. Attempting to do so WARNING seen. may cause transmission damage. ∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle 4. Open the engine hood. overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire. WARNING ∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded, If steam or water is coming from the never remove the radiator cap while engine, stand clear to prevent getting the engine is still hot. When the radia- burned. tor cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing 5. Visually check drive belts for damage serious injury. or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and ∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com- radiator should not leak water. If cooling out. ant is leaking, the water pump belt is 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap- missing or loose, or the cooling fan ply the parking brake and move the does not run, stop the engine. shift lever to P (Park). WARNING Do not stop the engine. Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, 2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the jewelry or clothing to come into contact windows, move the heater or air condi- with, or get caught in, engine belts or tioner temperature control to maxi- the engine cooling fan. The engine cool- mum hot and fan control to high ing fan can start at any time. speed.

In case of emergency 6-11 TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6. After the engine cools down, check the When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin- CAUTION coolant level in the engine coolant res- cial in Canada) and local regulations for ervoir tank with the engine running. towing must be followed. Incorrect towing ∙ When towing, make sure that the Add coolant to the engine coolant res- equipment could damage your vehicle. transmission, axles, steering system ervoir tank if necessary. It is recom- Towing instructions are available from a and powertrain are in working condi- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are tion. If any of these conditions apply, for this service. generally familiar with the applicable laws dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be and procedures for towing. To assure used. proper towing and to prevent accidental ∙ Always attach safety chains before damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom- towing. mends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service For additional information, refer to “Flat operator carefully read the following pre- towing” in the “Technical and consumer in- cautions: formation” section of this manual.

WARNING TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN ∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi- ∙ Never get under your vehicle after it tional information, refer to the diagrams in has been lifted by a tow truck. this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.

6-12 In case of emergency ∙ When towing Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: – Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock LCE2369 mechanism). TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS WITH CAUTION CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE ∙ Never tow Continuously Variable TRANSMISSION (CVT) Transmission (CVT) models with the NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or towed with the driving (front) wheels off the backward), as this may cause serious ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed and expensive damage to the trans- truck as illustrated. mission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.

In case of emergency 6-13 VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

WARNING To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle: ∙ Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure. ∙ Tow chains or cables must be at- LCE2433 tached only to main structural mem- bers of the vehicle. ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS CAUTION ∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to WITH CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE Never tow All-Wheel Drive (AWD) mod- tow or free a stuck vehicle. TRANSMISSION (CVT) els equipped with a Continuously Vari- ∙ Only use devices specifically designed able Transmission (CVT) with any of the NISSAN recommends that towing dollies for vehicle recovery and follow the wheels on the ground as this may cause be used when towing your vehicle or place manufacturer’s instructions. serious and expensive damage to the the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated. transfer case and transmission. ∙ Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle. ∙ Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.

6-14 In case of emergency If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, ∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos- etc., use a tow strap or other device de- sible to maintain the rocking motion. signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al- ∙ Release the accelerator pedal before ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc- shifting between R (Reverse) and D tions for the recovery device. (Drive). Rocking a stuck vehicle ∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55 km/h). WARNING 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a ∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. few tries, contact a professional towing ∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed. service to remove the vehicle. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure: 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. 2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions. 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires. 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. ∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re- verse) and D (Drive). In case of emergency 6-15 MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency 7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ...... 7-2 Air fresheners ...... 7-5 Washing...... 7-2 Power moonroof (if so equipped) ...... 7-5 Waxing ...... 7-2 Floor mats (if so equipped) ...... 7-6 Removing spots ...... 7-3 Seatbelts...... 7-7 Underbody ...... 7-3 Corrosion protection ...... 7-7 Glass ...... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) ...... 7-4 vehicle corrosion ...... 7-7 Chromeparts...... 7-4 Environmental factors influence the Tire dressings ...... 7-4 rate of corrosion...... 7-7 Cleaning interior...... 7-4 Protect your vehicle from corrosion ...... 7-8 CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of WASHING ∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough your vehicle, it is important to take proper cloths, such as washing mitts. Care care of it. Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us- must be taken when removing To protect the paint surfaces, wash your ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not vehicle as soon as you can: general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed scratched or damaged. ∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam- with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. age from acid rain. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of CAUTION ∙ After driving on coastal roads. clean water. ∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in ∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird Inside edges, seams and folds on the the detergent. Some car washes, es- doors, hatches and hood are particularly droppings, tree sap, metal particles or pecially brushless ones, use some bugs get on the paint surface. vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There- acid for cleaning. The acid may react fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. ∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur- with some plastic vehicle compo- Take care that the drain holes in the lower nents, causing them to crack. This face. edge of the door are open. Spray water could affect their appearance, and under the body and in the wheel wells to Whenever possible, store or park your ve- also could cause them not to function hicle inside a garage or in a covered area. properly. Always check with your car loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. When it is necessary to park outside, park in wash to confirm that acid is not used. A damp chamois can be used to dry the a shady area or protect the vehicle with a ∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong vehicle to avoid water spots. body cover. household soap, strong chemical de- WAXING Be careful not to scratch the paint sur- tergents, gasoline or solvents. Regular waxing protects the paint surface face when putting on or removing the ∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- body cover. and helps retain new vehicle appearance. light or while the vehicle body is hot, Polishing is recommended to remove as the surface may become built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath- water-spotted. ered appearance before re-applying wax. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to assist you in choosing the proper product. 7-2 Appearance and care ∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough 2. Once it is released from the shelf, gently washing. Follow the instructions sup- pull the stop light towards the rear plied with the wax. seatback ᭺3 . ∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra- The high-mounted stop light must be sives, cutting compounds or cleaners properly reinstalled before driving your ve- that may damage the vehicle finish. hicle. Machine compounding or aggressive pol- Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin- dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor- ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. mal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. REMOVING SPOTS Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, remove this film. insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible To reinstall the high-mounted stop light, from the surface of the paint to avoid last- LAI2116 reverse steps ᭺3 , then ᭺2 . ing damage or staining. Special cleaning GLASS products are available at a NISSAN dealer CAUTION or any automotive accessory store. It is When cleaning the rear window, it may be recommended that you visit a NISSAN easier to clean if the high-mounted stop When cleaning the inside of the win- dealer for these products. light is removed first. dows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based UNDERBODY Be careful when removing the high- disinfectant cleaners. They could dam- mounted stop light to reduce the risk of In areas where road salt is used in winter, it age the electrical conductors, radio an- damaging the high-mounted stop light is necessary to clean the underbody regu- tenna elements or rear window defog- larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from wires. ger elements. building up and causing the acceleration of To remove the high-mounted stop light: corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in 1. Push downward on the plastic shelf the spring, the underseal must be checked around the stop light ᭺1 ,liftupwardson and, if necessary, re-treated. the stop light, releasing it from the shelf ᭺2 . Appearance and care 7-3 CLEANING INTERIOR

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so TIRE DRESSINGS Occasionally remove loose dust from the equipped) interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a NISSAN does not recommend the use of vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur- dampened in a mild soap solution, espe- coating to the tires to help reduce discolor- faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in cially during winter months in areas where ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap- mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a road salt is used. If not removed, road salt plied to the tires, it may react with the coat- dry, soft cloth. can discolor the wheels. ing and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the CAUTION stain the vehicle paint. leather (if so equipped). Follow the directions below to avoid If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the staining or discoloring the wheels: following precautions: Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some ∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong ∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The fabric protectors contain chemicals that acid or alkali contents to clean the coating on the tire dissolves more easily may stain or bleach the seat material. wheels. than with an oil-based tire dressing. Use a cloth dampened only with water to ∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the ∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help clean the meter and gauge lens. wheels when they are hot. The wheel prevent it from entering the tire temperature should be the same as tread/grooves (where it would be diffi- WARNING ambient temperature. cult to remove). Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot ∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove ∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry steam cleaners) on the seat. This can the cleaner within 15 minutes after towel. Make sure the tire dressing is damage the seat or occupant classifi- the cleaner is applied. completely removed from the tire cation sensor. This can also affect the tread/grooves. CHROME PARTS operation of the air bag system and re- ∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- sult in serious personal injury. Clean all chrome parts regularly with a mended by the tire dressing manufac- non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain turer. the finish.

7-4 Appearance and care CAUTION ∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip ∙ Clean water based stains by patting on the vents. These products can cause the surface with a clean soft cloth ∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any immediate damage and discoloration dampened in warm water. Press a similar material. when spilled on interior surfaces. clean dry cloth onto the surface to re- ∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive Carefully read and follow the manufactur- move as much dampness as possible and damaging to leather surfaces er’s instructions before using the air fresh- and then let air dry. and should be removed promptly. Do eners. ∙ Clean oil based stains by patting the not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol- surface with a clean soft cloth damp- ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, POWER MOONROOF (if so ened in warm water. Press a clean dry detergents or ammonia-based clean- equipped) cloth onto the surface to remove as ers as they may damage the leather’s much dampness as possible and then natural finish. The sunshade is made from a tricot mate- let air dry. ∙ Never use fabric protectors unless rial. recommended by the manufacturer. CAUTION ∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may To help prevent damaging the moon- damage the lens cover. roof while cleaning: ∙ Do not rub the material with a cloth. AIR FRESHENERS Doing so can damage the surface of Most air fresheners use a solvent that the material or cause a stain to could affect the vehicle interior. If you use spread. an air freshener, take the following precau- ∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any tions: similar chemical to clean the sun- ∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause shade. This may discolor the moon- permanent discoloration when they roof and damage the surface. contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface. Appearance and care 7-5 When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, ∙ Properly position the mats in the follow the installation instructions provided floorwell using the floor mat position- with the mat and the following: ing aid. For additional information, refer to "Floor mat installation" in this 1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the section. shift lever in P (Park) position and with ∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in- the parking brake fully applied, position terfere with pedal operation. the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned ∙ Periodically check the floor mats to with the positioning aids. make sure they are properly installed. 2. Secure the grommet holes into the po- ∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior, sitioning aids and ensure that the floor check the floor mats to make sure mat is properly positioned. they are properly installed. 3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter- LAI2094 The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can fere with pedal operation. With the igni- FLOOR MATS (if so equipped) extend the life of your vehicle carpet and tion still in the OFF position, the shift make it easier to clean the interior. Mats lever in the P (Park) position and with WARNING should be maintained with regular clean- the parking brake applied, fully apply ing and replaced if they become exces- and release all pedals. The floor mat To avoid potential pedal interference sively worn. must not interfere with pedal opera- that may result in a collision, injury or Floor mat installation tion or prevent the pedal from return- death: ing to its normal position. ∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an- Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po- It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN other floor mat in the driver front positioning aids. The number and shape of sition or install them upside down or dealer for details about installing the floor the floor mat positioning aid for each seat- mats in your vehicle. backwards. ing position varies depending on the ve- ∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, hicle. or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.

7-6 Appearance and care CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or CORROSION chemical solvents to clean the seat Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing. ∙ The accumulation of moisture- retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. ∙ Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS LAI2046 INFLUENCE THE RATE OF Positioning aids CORROSION The illustration shows the location of the Moisture floor mat positioning aids. Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on SEAT BELTS the vehicle body underside can accelerate The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry them with a sponge dampened in a mild completely inside the vehicle and should soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com- be removed for drying to avoid floor panel pletely in the shade before using them. For corrosion. additional information, refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

Appearance and care 7-7 Relative humidity ∙ Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of water as soon as possible. high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above CAUTION freezing and where atmospheric pollution ∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de- exists and road salt is used. bris from the passenger compart- Temperature ment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or High temperatures accelerate the rate of broom. corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated. ∙ Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic com- Air pollution ponents inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt Chemicals used for road surface de-icing use accelerates the corrosion process. are extremely corrosive. They accelerate Road salt also accelerates the disintegra- corrosion and deterioration of underbody tion of paint surfaces. components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM and fenders. CORROSION In winter, the underbody must be ∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to cleaned periodically. keep the vehicle clean. For additional protection against rust and ∙ Always check for minor damage to the corrosion, which may be required in some paint and repair it as soon as possible. areas, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. ∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. 7-8 Appearance and care 8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 In-cabin microfilter ...... 8-19 Engine compartment check locations...... 8-4 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-20 Engine cooling system ...... 8-6 Cleaning ...... 8-20 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-7 Replacing ...... 8-20 Changing engine coolant...... 8-7 Brakes...... 8-21 Engine oil...... 8-8 Fuses...... 8-22 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-8 Engine compartment ...... 8-22 Changing engine oil ...... 8-9 Passenger compartment...... 8-23 Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-11 Battery replacement ...... 8-24 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 8-25 fluid ...... 8-12 Lights ...... 8-26 Brake fluid ...... 8-13 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-13 Headlights...... 8-26 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir...... 8-13 Fog lights (if so equipped) ...... 8-27 Battery...... 8-15 Exterior and interior lights ...... 8-27 Jump starting ...... 8-16 Wheels and tires...... 8-30 Variable voltage control system ...... 8-17 Tire pressure ...... 8-30 Drive belt ...... 8-17 Tire labeling ...... 8-34 Spark plugs ...... 8-18 Types of tires ...... 8-36 Replacing spark plugs ...... 8-18 Tire chains ...... 8-37 Air cleaner...... 8-19 Changing wheels and tires ...... 8-39 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or main- ∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- CAUTION tenance work on your vehicle, always take matic engine cooling fan. It may come ∙ Do not work under the hood while the care to prevent serious accidental injury to on at any time without warning, even engine is hot. Turn the engine off and yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol- if the ignition key is in the OFF position wait until it cools down. lowing are general precautions which and the engine is not running. To should be closely observed. avoid injury, always disconnect the ∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil negative battery cable before work- and coolant. Improperly disposed en- WARNING ing near the fan. gine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the envi- ∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- ∙ If you must run the engine in an en- ronment. Always conform to local ply the parking brake securely and closed space such as a garage, be sure regulations for disposal of vehicle block the wheels to prevent the ve- there is proper ventilation for exhaust fluid. hicle from moving. Move the shift le- gases to escape. ver to P (Park). ∙ Never leave the engine or the trans- ∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is mission related component harness ∙ Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or supported only by a jack. If it is neces- connector disconnected while the ig- LOCK position when performing any sary to work under the vehicle, sup- nition switch is in the ON position. parts replacement or repairs. port it with safety stands. ∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat- ∙ If you must work with the engine run- ∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and tery or any transistorized component ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair sparks away from the fuel tank and while the ignition switch is in the ON and tools away from moving fans, battery. belts and any other moving parts. position. ∙ On gasoline engine models, the fuel ∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any filter or fuel lines should be serviced. It This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc- loose clothing and remove any jew- is recommended that you visit a tions regarding only those items which are elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be- NISSAN dealer for this service because relatively easy for an owner to perform. fore working on your vehicle. the fuel lines are under high pressure A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also ∙ Always wear eye protection whenever even when the engine is off. available. For additional information, refer you work on your vehicle. to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

8-2 Do-it-yourself You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself 8-3 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

KR20DDET engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Drive belt location 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Battery 6. Fuse/Fusible link box 7. Air filter 8. Radiator cap 9. Engine oil dipstick 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI3260 8-4 Do-it-yourself PR25DD engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Drive belt location 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Engine oil dipstick 5. Brake fluid reservoir 6. Battery 7. Fuse/Fusible link box 8. Air cleaner 9. Radiator cap 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI3261 Do-it-yourself 8-5 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the CAUTION ∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) ∙ Never use any cooling system addi- Genuine NISSAN Long Life or 7 years. Mixing any other type of tives such as radiator sealer. Additives Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to coolant other than Genuine NISSAN may clog the cooling system and provide year-round antifreeze and coolant Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), cause damage to the engine, trans- protection. The antifreeze solution con- including Genuine NISSAN Long Life mission and/or cooling system. tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi- Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use tional engine cooling system additives are ∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be of non-distilled water will reduce the not necessary. sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long life expectancy of the factory-fill cool- Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or ant. For additional information, refer WARNING equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life to the "Maintenance and schedules" Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre- section of this manual. ∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant diluted to provide antifreeze protec- reservoir cap when the engine is hot. tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional Wait until the engine and radiator cool freeze protection is needed due to down. Serious burns could be caused weather where you operate your ve- by high pressure fluid escaping from hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life the radiator. For additional informa- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen- tion on precautions, refer to “If your trate following the directions on the vehicle overheats” in the “In case of container. If an equivalent coolant emergency” section of this manual. other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life ∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol- sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- low the coolant manufacturer’s in- gine damage, use only a Genuine structions to maintain minimum anti- NISSAN radiator cap. freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant solu- tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

8-6 Do-it-yourself mal operating temperature. For additional CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT information, refer to “Engine coolant temperature gauge” in the “Instruments and A NISSAN dealer can change the engine controls” section of this manual. Turn off coolant. The service procedure can be the engine once the engine coolant tem- found in the NISSAN Service Manual. perature has reached normal operating Improper servicing can result in reduced range. Allow the engine coolant to cool to heater performance and engine over- ambient temperature. Recheck the cool- heating. ant level in the reservoir and add coolant to the MAX level if necessary. WARNING This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long ∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded, Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex- never change the coolant when the pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is engine is hot. 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing LDI3262 any other type of coolant or the use of ∙ Never remove the radiator cap when CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT non-distilled water will reduce the life ex- the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid es- LEVEL pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Mainte- caping from the radiator. Check the coolant level in the reservoir nance and schedules" section of this ∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used when the engine is cold. If the coolant manual. coolant. If skin contact is made, wash level is below the MIN level ᭺B , add coolant For additional information on the location thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner to the MAX level ᭺A . of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En- as soon as possible. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant gine compartment check locations” in this ∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- level in the radiator when the engine is section. dren and pets. cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the If the cooling system frequently requires Engine coolant must be disposed of prop- radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to coolant, have it checked. It is recom- erly. Check your local regulations. the filler opening and also add it to the mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer reservoir up to the MAX level ᭺A . Start the for this service. engine and allow the engine coolant temperature gauge to rise until it reaches nor- Do-it-yourself 8-7 ENGINE OIL

LDI3263 LDI3264 LDI0371 KR20DDET engine PR25DD engine 5. Remove the dipstick again and check CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and L (Low) marks ᭺B . This is the 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and normal operating oil level range. If the apply the parking brake. oil level is below the L (Low) mark ᭺A , 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it remove the oil filler cap and pour rec- reaches operating temperature. ommended oil through the opening. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than Do not fill oil level above H (High) 10 minutes for the oil to drain back mark ᭺C . into the oil pan. 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. It is normal to add some oil between oil Reinsert it all the way. maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions. 8-8 Do-it-yourself CAUTION ∙ Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty. ∙ It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

LDI2866 LDI3265 CHANGING ENGINE OIL 4. Remove the pins ᭺B from the undercover. Gently pull the undercover to 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and gain access to the drain plug. apply the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature, then turn it off. 3. Remove the oil filler cap ᭺A by turning it counterclockwise.

Do-it-yourself 8-9 CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. 7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug ᭺C and a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. Drain plug tightening torque: 25 ft-lb (34 N·m) 8. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening, then in- LDI3178 LDI3266 stall the oil filler cap securely. KR20DDET PR25DD For additional information on drain 5. Place a large drain pan under the drain WARNING and refill capacity, refer to “Recom- plug ᭺C . mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- ∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with ties” in the “Technical and consumer 6. Remove the drain plug ᭺C with a used engine oil may cause skin information” section of this manual. wrench by turning it counterclockwise cancer. and completely drain the oil. ∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with The drain and refill capacity depends If the oil filter is to be changed, remove used oil. If skin contact is made, wash on the oil temperature and drain time. and replace it at this time. For addi- thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner Use these specifications for reference tional information, refer to “Changing as soon as possible. only. Always use the dipstick to deter- engine oil filter” in this section. mine when the proper amount of oil is ∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of in the engine. ∙ Waste oil must be disposed of prop- children. erly. 9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter. Cor- ∙ Check your local regulations. rect as required. 8-10 Do-it-yourself 10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

LDI3267 LDI3195 CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER KR20DDET 4. Place a large drain pan under the oil 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and filter ᭺B . apply the parking brake. 5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter 2. Turn the engine off. wrench by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Remove clips ᭺A and under-engine Then remove the oil filter by turning it protector. by hand.

CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. 6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag.

Do-it-yourself 8-11 CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis- CAUTION tance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. ∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) 9. Start the engine and check for leakage ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with around the oil filter. Correct as required. other fluids. 10. Turn the engine off and wait more than ∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en- Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission gine oil if necessary. fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. LDI3269 ∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to PR25DD Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may CAUTION also damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as rec- ∙ Be sure to remove any old gasket ma- ommended is not covered under terial remaining on the sealing sur- NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited face of the engine. Failure to do so Warranty. could lead to engine damage. ∙ The dipstick must be inserted in place When checking or replacement of CVT fluid to prevent oil spillage from the dip- is required, it is recommended that you visit stick hole when filling the engine with a NISSAN dealer for this service. oil. 7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.

8-12 Do-it-yourself BRAKE FLUID WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake fluid is below the MIN line ᭺B , the brake warning light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX line ᭺A . For addi- LDI3270 tional information on recommended type LDI3271 For additional information on brake fluid of brake fluid, refer to “Recommended WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID specification, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the “ RESERVOIR fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the Technical and consumer information” sec- “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid tion of this manual. If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the brake system should be thoroughly when the “Low Washer Fluid” warning (if so WARNING checked. It is recommended that you visit a equipped) appears in the vehicle information display. ∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con- NISSAN dealer for this service. tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated To check the fluid level with the dip tube, fluid may damage the brake system. use your finger to plug the center hole ᭺A of The use of improper fluids can dam- the cap/tube assembly, then remove it age the brake system and affect the from the reservoir. If there is no fluid in the vehicle’s stopping ability. dip tube, add fluid. ∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

Do-it-yourself 8-13 To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, CAUTION lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir ∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze opening. coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This may result in damage to the Add a washer solvent to the washer for paint. better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the ∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid manufacturer’s instructions for the mix- reservoir with washer fluid concen- ture ratio. trates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concen- Refill the reservoir more frequently when trates may permanently stain the driving conditions require an increased grille if spilled while filling the amount of windshield-washer fluid. windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN ∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & with water to the manufacturer’s rec- Antifreeze or equivalent. ommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid WARNING reservoir. Do not use the windshield- Antifreeze is poisonous and should be washer fluid reservoir to mix the stored carefully in marked containers washer fluid concentrate and water. out of the reach of children.

8-14 Do-it-yourself BATTERY

Caution symbols for battery WARNING No smoking, No exposed flames, No Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the ᭺1 Sparks battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or ᭺2 Shield eyes battery acid.

᭺3 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your ᭺4 Battery acid eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

᭺5 Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or ᭺6 Explosive gas injury.

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water. ∙ Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. ∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

Do-it-yourself 8-15 NOTE: WARNING Care should be taken to avoid situations ∙ Do not expose the battery to flames, that can lead to potential battery dis- an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy- charge and potential no-start conditions drogen gas generated by the battery such as: is explosive. Explosive gases can 1. Installation or extended use of elec- cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, tronic accessories that consume bat- eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul- tery power when the engine is not furic acid can cause blindness or in- running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD jury. After touching a battery or bat- players, etc.) tery cap, do not touch or rub your 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If only driven short distances. the acid contacts your eyes, skin or In these cases, the battery may need to clothing, immediately flush with wa- LDI3302 ter for at least 15 minutes and seek be charged to maintain battery health. medical attention. NOTE: ∙ When working on or near a battery, Do not try to open the top of the battery. always wear suitable eye protection This battery is not equipped with remov- and remove all jewelry. able vent caps. ∙ Battery posts, terminals and related JUMP STARTING accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump handling. starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not ∙ Keep battery out of the reach of start by jump starting, the battery may children. have to be replaced. It is recommended ∙ Do not tip the battery. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-16 Do-it-yourself VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL DRIVE BELT SYSTEM

The current sensor is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

LDI3272 WDI0638 CAUTION 1. Automatic tensioner pulley 2. Generator pulley ∙ Do not ground accessories directly to 3. Water pump pulley the battery terminal. Doing so will by- 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley pass the variable voltage control sys- 5. Crankshaft pulley tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. WARNING ∙ Use electrical accessories with the en- Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF gine running to avoid discharging the or LOCK position before servicing drive vehicle battery. belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system mea- sures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator. Do-it-yourself 8-17 SPARK PLUGS

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un- WARNING usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor condition, have it replaced. It is Be sure the engine and ignition switch recommended that you visit a NISSAN are off and that the parking brake is dealer for this service. engaged securely. 2. Have the belt checked regularly for CAUTION condition. Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. SDI1895 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Iridium-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace iridium- tipped ᭺A spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. ∙ Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

8-18 Do-it-yourself AIR CLEANER

∙ Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter ∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body housing and the cover with a damp or attempt to start the engine with cloth. the air cleaner removed. Doing so The viscous paper type filter element (if so could result in serious injury. equipped) should not be cleaned and re- IN-CABIN MICROFILTER used. The dry paper type filter element (if so equipped) may be cleaned and reused. Re- The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry place the air filter according to the mainte- of airborne dust and pollen particles and nance log shown in the “Maintenance and reduces some objectionable outside schedules” section of this manual. odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information, refer to the NOTE: "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual for change intervals. After installing a new air cleaner filter, LDI3273 make sure the air cleaner cover is seated If replacement is required, it is recom- NOTE: in the housing and latch the clips. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. WARNING ∙ Operating the engine with the air Replace the air cleaner filter according to cleaner removed can cause you or the maintenance log shown in the ”Mainte- others to be burned. The air cleaner nance and schedules” section of this not only cleans the air, it stops the manual. flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t To remove the air cleaner filter: there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the ∙ Unlatch the clips and move the air air cleaner removed, and be careful cleaner cover upward. when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. ∙ Remove the air cleaner filter.

Do-it-yourself 8-19 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING CAUTION If your windshield is not clear after using ∙ After wiper blade replacement, return the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade the wiper arm to its original position; chatters when running, wax or other mate- otherwise it may be damaged when rial may be on the blade or windshield. the hood is opened. Clean the outside of the windshield with a ∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your wind- the glass; otherwise the arms may be shield is clean if beads do not form when damaged from wind pressure. rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after LDI2757 cleaning the blades and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades. REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. CAUTION To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol- Worn windshield wiper blades can low the procedure below: damage the windshield and impair driver vision. 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. 2. Push the release tab ᭺B . 3. Move the wiper blade ᭺A down and remove. 4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place. 5. Push wiper on to windshield. 8-20 Do-it-yourself BRAKES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have Under some driving or climate conditions, the brakes checked. It is recommended occasional brake squeak, squeal or other that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- noise may be heard. Occasional brake vice. noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or Self-adjusting brakes performance of the brake system. Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting Proper brake inspection intervals should brakes. be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the ap- The front and rear disc-type brakes self- propriate maintenance schedule informa- adjust every time the brake pedal is ap- tion in the "Maintenance and schedules" plied. section of this manual. WARNING Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad LDI2731 requires replacement, a high pitched If you wax the surface of the hood, be care- scraping or screeching sound will be heard ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will ᭺D . This may cause clogging or improper be heard whether or not the brake pedal is windshield-washer operation. If wax gets depressed. Have the brakes checked as into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or soon as possible if the wear indicator small pin ᭺C . sound is heard.

Do-it-yourself 8-21 FUSES

If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. 3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

LDI2997 LDI3274 If any electrical equipment does not oper- ENGINE COMPARTMENT ate, check for an open fuse. Fuses are used in the passenger and en- WARNING gine compartment. Spare fuses are pro- Never use a fuse of a higher or lower vided and can be found in the passenger amperage rating than that specified on compartment fuse box. the fuse box cover. This could damage When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is the electrical system or electronic con- installed in the fuse box securely. trol units or cause a fire.

8-22 Do-it-yourself If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are in the OFF position. 2. Remove the fuse box cover ᭺A with a suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.

LDI3200 LDI3275 5. If the fuse is open ᭺A , replace it with a PASSENGER COMPARTMENT new fuse ᭺B . 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec- WARNING trical system checked and repaired. It is Never use a fuse of higher or lower am- recommended that you visit a NISSAN perage rating than that specified on the dealer for this service. fuse box cover. This could damage the Fusible links electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire. If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

Do-it-yourself 8-23 BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swal- low the battery or removed parts.

LDI3276 LDI3203 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 4. If the fuse is open ᭺C , replace it with an ᭺B . equivalent good fuse ᭺D . 5. Push the fuse box cover to install. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-24 Do-it-yourself NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows: 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Insert a small screwdriver ᭺A into the slit ᭺B of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the casing. 3. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent. WDI0568 ∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and 4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with electric terminals as doing so could ᭺C and ᭺D . cause a malfunction. 5. Operate the buttons to check the op- ∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold- eration. ing the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the stor- It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN age capacity. dealer for this service if you need assistance for replacement. ∙ Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the case.

LDI2001 Do-it-yourself 8-25 LIGHTS

FCC Notice: HEADLIGHTS ∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly For USA: For additional information on headlight open without a bulb installed for a This device complies with Part 15 of the bulb replacement, refer to the instructions long period of time. Dust, moisture, FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- outlined in this section. smoke, etc. entering the headlight lowing two conditions: (1) This device body may affect bulb performance. may not cause harmful interference, and Replacing the halogen headlight Remove the bulb from the headlight (2) this device must accept any interfer- bulb (if so equipped) assembly just before a replacement ence received, including interference bulb is installed. that may cause undesired operation. The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type ∙ Only touch the base when handling which uses a replaceable headlight (halo- Note: Changes or modifications not ex- the bulb. Never touch the glass enve- pressly approved by the party respon- gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside lope. Touching the glass could signifi- sible for compliance could void the user’s the engine compartment without remov- cantly affect bulb life and/or head- authority to operate the equipment. ing the headlight assembly. light performance. For Canada: If headlight bulb replacement is required, it ∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed This device complies with Industry is recommended that you visit a NISSAN inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). dealer for this service. break if the glass envelope is Operation is subject to the following two scratched or the bulb is dropped. conditions: (1) this device may not cause CAUTION ∙ Use the same number and wattage as interference, and (2) this device must ac- ∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac- shown in the chart. cept any interference, including interfering the bulb. When aiming adjustment Fog may temporarily form inside the lens ence that may cause undesired opera- is necessary, it is recommended that of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car tion of the device. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this wash. A temperature difference between service. the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-26 Do-it-yourself Replacing the LED headlight bulb EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS (if so equipped) Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.* If LED headlight bulb replacement is re- Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)* quired, it is recommended that you visit a Low (Halogen) 55 H11 NISSAN dealer for this service. High (Halogen)/Daytime running (if so equipped) 60 HB3 Side marker 5 W5W FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped) Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)* Low/High — — For additional information on fog light bulb Park/Daytime running — — replacement, refer to the instructions out- Side marker — — Fog light (if so equipped)* — — lined in this section. Turn signal/park (if so equipped) light* 28/8 7444NA Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — — Replacing the LED fog light bulb Step light (if so equipped) 3.8 194 If LED fog light bulb replacement is re- Map light* 8 — Vanity mirror light* 1.8 — quired, it is recommended that you visit a Courtesy light (if so equipped)* — — NISSAN dealer for this service. Glove box light* 1 — Personal light* 8 — Trunk light 3.4 158 High-mounted stop light* — — Rear combination light* Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W Turn 21 W21W Side marker 5 W5W Backup (reversing) assembly* Backup 16 921 Tail 5 W5W License plate light* — — * Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information. * It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

Do-it-yourself 8-27 1. Headlight assembly 2. Map light 3. Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped) 4. Step light (if so equipped) 5. Turn signal/park (if so equipped) light 6. Fog light (if so equipped) 7. Personal light 8. High-mount stop light 9. Trunk light 10. License plate light 11. Backup (reversing) assembly 12. Rear combination light

LDI3277 8-28 Do-it-yourself LDI0341 LDI2135 Step light (if so equipped) Trunk light Use a cloth ᭺1 to protect the housing. Rear combination light Bulb replacement requires the removal of the rear combination light assembly. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- WDI0306 vice. Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, light and/or cover. Indicates bulb removal Indicates bulb installation Do-it-yourself 8-29 WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system ∙ Most tires naturally lose air over the “In case of emergency” section of may not detect a sudden drop in tire time. this manual. pressure (for example a flat tire while ∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when TIRE PRESSURE driving). driven over potholes or other ob- Tire Pressure Monitoring System For additional information, refer to jects or if the vehicle strikes a (TPMS) “Low tire pressure warning light” in curb while parking. the “Instruments and controls” sec- WARNING The tire pressures should be tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- checked when the tires are cold. The Radio waves could adversely af- tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv- tires are considered COLD after the fect electric medical equipment. ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In Those who use a pacemaker vehicle has been parked for 3 or case of emergency” section of this more hours, or driven less than 1 mile should contact the electric medi- manual. cal equipment manufacturer for (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. the possible influences before Tire inflation pressure The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert use. Check the tire pressures (including provides visual and audible signals This vehicle is equipped with the Tire the spare) often and always prior to outside the vehicle for inflating the Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). long distance trips. The recom- tires to the recommended COLD tire It monitors tire pressure of all tires mended tire pressure specifications pressure. For additional information, except the spare. When the low tire are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire pressure warning light is lit and the certification label or the Tire and Alert” in the “Starting and driving” “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning Loading Information label under the section of this manual. appears in the vehicle information "Cold Tire Pressure" heading. The If the tires are used at speeds above display, one or more of your tires is Tire and Loading Information label is 100 mph (162 km/h) where it is legal significantly under-inflated. affixed to the driver side center pillar. to do so (on a race track for ex- The TPMS will activate only when the Tire pressures should be checked ample), the cold tire inflation pres- vehicle is driven at speeds above regularly because: sure must be increased. For addi- 8-30 Do-it-yourself tional information, refer to “Checking ∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ∙ Increase the cold tire inflation tire pressure” in this section. (GVWR) is located on the pressure as indicated in "Check- Set the tire pressure to the normal F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- ing tire pressure" in this section tion label. The vehicle weight when using the tires specified cold tire inflation pressure when the capacity is indicated on the Tire by NISSAN above 100 mph vehicle speed or load is reduced. and Loading Information label. (162 km/h) where it is legal to do Incorrect tire pressure, including Do not load your vehicle beyond so (on a race track for example). this capacity. Overloading your Failure to increase the cold tire under inflation, may adversely af- vehicle may result in reduced inflation pressure may result in fect tire life and vehicle handling. tire life, unsafe operating condi- tire failure, loss of control and tions due to premature tire fail- possible injury. After such use, WARNING ure, or unfavorable handling readjust tire pressure. ∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail characteristics and could also ∙ For additional information re- suddenly and cause an lead to a serious accident. Load- garding tires, refer to “Impor- accident. ing beyond the specified capac- tant Tire Safety Information” ity may also result in failure of (US) or “Tire Safety Information” other vehicle components. (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- ∙ Before taking a long trip, or mation Booklet. whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

Do-it-yourself 8-31 ᭺4 Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory. ᭺5 Spare tire size. ᭺6 Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve- hicle loading information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

LDI2737 Tire and Loading Information ᭺3 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the label tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are consid- ᭺1 Seating capacity: The maximum ered COLD after the vehicle has number of occupants that can been parked for 3 or more hours, be seated in the vehicle. or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) ᭺2 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in at moderate speeds. The rec- this section. ommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR. 8-32 Do-it-yourself 3. Remove the gauge. Size Cold Tire 4. Read the tire pressure on the Inflation gauge stem and compare to the Pressure specification shown on the Tire 220 kPa, 215/60R16 and Loading Information label. Front and 32 PSI Rear 230 kPa, 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If 215/55R17 too much air is added, press the Original 33 PSI Tire 230 kPa, core of the valve stem briefly 235/40R19 with the tip of the gauge stem to 33 PSI release pressure. Recheck the 420 kPa, T135/90D16 pressure and add or release air 60 PSI Spare Tire LDI0393 as needed. 420 kPa, Checking tire pressure T135/70D16 6. Install the valve stem cap. 60 PSI 1. Remove the valve stem cap from 7. Check the pressure of all other the tire. tires, including the spare. 2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage. Do-it-yourself 8-33 WDI0394 WDI0395 Example Example TIRE LABELING ᭺1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 3. Two-digit number (65): This Federal law requires tire manufac- 95H) number, known as the aspect turers to place standardized infor- ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de- height to width. mation on the sidewall of all tires. signed for passenger vehicles This information identifies and de- (not all tires have this informa- 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. scribes the fundamental character- tion). 5. Two-digit number (15): This num- istics of the tire and also provides the ber is the wheel or rim diameter Tire Identification Number (TIN) for 2. Three-digit number (215): This in inches. safety standard certification. The TIN number gives the width in milli- can be used to identify the tire in meters of the tire from sidewall case of a recall. edge to sidewall edge.

8-34 Do-it-yourself 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law. 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

LDI2786 Example ᭺2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 3. Two-digit code: Tire size. for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code XXX XXXX) (Optional). 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De- 5. Four numbers represent the partment Of Transportation”. week and year the tire was built. The symbol can be placed For example, the numbers 3103 above, below or to the left or means the 31st week of 2003. If right of the Tire Identification these numbers are missing then Number. look on the other sidewall of the 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s tire. identification mark.

Do-it-yourself 8-35 ᭺3 Tire ply composition and material ᭺6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” TYPES OF TIRES The number of layers or plies of Indicates whether the tire requires WARNING rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire an inner tube (“tube type”) or not manufacturers also must indicate (“tubeless”). ∙ When changing or replacing tires, be the materials in the tire, which in- sure all four tires are of the same type ᭺7 The word “radial” (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth- construction. A NISSAN dealer may be ers. The word “radial” is shown if the tire able to help you with information ᭺4 Maximum permissible inflation has radial structure. about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. pressure ᭺8 Manufacturer or brand name ∙ Replacement tires may have a lower This number is the greatest amount Manufacturer or brand name is speed rating than the factory of air pressure that should be put in shown. equipped tires, and may not match the tire. Do not exceed the maximum the potential maximum vehicle Other Tire-related Terminology permissible inflation pressure. speed. Never exceed the maximum In addition to the many terms that speed rating of the tire. ᭺5 Maximum load rating are defined throughout this section, ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- This number indicates the maxi- Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the nally specified by NISSAN could affect mum load in kilograms and pounds sidewall that contains a whitewall, the proper operation of the low tire that can be carried by the tire. When bears white lettering or bears pressure warning system. replacing the tires on the vehicle, al- manufacturer, brand, and/or model ways use a tire that has the same name molding that is higher or load rating as the factory installed deeper than the same molding on tire. the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. 8-36 Do-it-yourself ∙ Always use tires of the same type, and corrected as necessary. It is recom- not, it can adversely affect the safety and size, brand, construction and tread mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for handling of your vehicle. pattern on all four wheels. Failure to this service. Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat- do so may result in a circumference All season tires ings than factory equipped tires and may difference between tires on the front not match the potential maximum vehicle and rear axles which can cause the NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some speed. Never exceed the maximum speed Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system models to provide good performance all rating of the tire. to malfunction resulting in personal year, including snowy and icy road condi- injury or death, excessive tire wear tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL If you install snow tires, they must be the and may damage the transmission SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. same size, brand, construction and tread and differential gears. Snow tires have better snow traction than pattern on all four wheels. All Season tires and may be more appropri- ∙ For additional information regarding For additional traction on icy roads, stud- ate in some areas. tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety ded tires may be used. However, some U.S. Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- Summer tires states and Canadian provinces prohibit mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In- their use. Check local, state and provincial formation Booklet. NISSAN specifies summer tires on some laws before installing studded tires. Skid models to provide superior performance and traction capabilities of studded snow All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models on dry roads. Summer tire performance is tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer substantially reduced in snow and ice. than that of non-studded snow tires. CAUTION Summer tires do not have the tire traction TIRE CHAINS ∙ ONLY use spare tires specified for the rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall. AWD model. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy CAUTION or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom- use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains can mended that all four tires be replaced with four wheels. be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong tires of the same size, brand, construction Class “S” chains on this vehicle will and tread pattern. The tire pressure and Snow tires cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan wheel alignment should also be checked to use tire chains/cables, you should If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to use a tire chain that meets the mini- select tires equivalent in size and load rat- mum clearances for your vehicle. ing to the original equipment tires. If you do Do-it-yourself 8-37 NOTE: Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains are not permitted for use with 19 in wheels. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with tire chains in such conditions can Wheel size Minimum space re- cause damage to the various mechanisms quired of the vehicle due to some overstress. 16 in .7 in (17 mm) 17 in .2 in (4 mm) A tire chain that provides the specified amount of space will provide the necessary clearance between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component. The minimum clearances are de- LDI0574 termined using the factory-equipped tires. Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac- Other types may damage your vehicle. Use cording to location. Check the local laws chain tensioners when recommended by before installing tire chains. When installing the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tire chains, make sure they are the proper tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain size for the tires on your vehicle and are must be secured or removed to prevent installed according to the chain manufac- the possibility of whipping action damage turer’s suggestions. Use a tire chain that is to the fenders or underbody. If possible, designed to provide the specified space ᭺A avoid fully loading your vehicle when using between the installed tire chain ᭺1 and tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced where the tire meets the rim ᭺2 as shown speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be on the chart. damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

8-38 Do-it-yourself As soon as possible, tighten the ∙ For additional information re- wheel nuts to the specified torque garding tires, refer to “Impor- with a torque wrench. tant Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” Wheel nut tightening torque: (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- 83 ft-lb (113 N·m) mation Booklet. The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

WDI0258 WARNING CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES ∙ After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure. Tire rotation ∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when NISSAN recommends rotating the the vehicle has been driven for tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in vehicles equipped with the PR25DD cases of a flat tire, etc.). engine and 7,500 miles (12,000 km) ∙ Do not include the spare tire in for vehicles equipped with the the tire rotation. KR20DDET engine. For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. Do-it-yourself 8-39 ∙ The original tires have built-in ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad- tread wear indicators. When the ditional information, refer to “Wheels and wear indicators are visible, the tires” in the “Technical and consumer infor- tire(s) should be replaced. mation” section of this manual. ∙ Tires degrade with age and use. WARNING Have tires, including the spare, ∙ The use of tires other than those recover 6 years old checked by a ommended or the mixed use of tires qualified technician because of different brands, construction some tire damage may not be (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread obvious. Replace the tires as patterns can adversely affect the ride, necessary to prevent tire failure braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic and possible personal injury. Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire WDI0259 ∙ Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious per- chain clearance, speedometer cali- Tire wear and damage bration, headlight aim and bumper sonal injury. If it is necessary to height. Some of these effects may 1. Wear indicator repair the spare tire, it is recom- lead to accidents and could result in mended that you visit a NISSAN serious personal injury. 2. Location mark dealer for this service. ∙ If your vehicle was originally WARNING ∙ For additional information re- equipped with four tires that were the garding tires, refer to “Impor- same size and you are only replacing ∙ Tires should be periodically in- tant Tire Safety Information” two of the four tires, install the new spected for wear, cracking, (US) or “Tire Safety Information” tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires bulging or objects caught in the (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- on the front axle may cause loss of tread. If excessive wear, cracks, mation Booklet. vehicle control in some driving condi- bulging or deep cuts are found, tions and cause an accident and per- the tire(s) should be replaced. Replacing wheels and tires sonal injury. When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carry- 8-40 Do-it-yourself ∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea- ∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if Wheel balance son, always replace with wheels it is not handled correctly. Be careful Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle which have the same off-set dimen- when handling the TPMS sensor. handling and tire life. Even with regular use, sion. Wheels of a different off-set ∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, could cause premature tire wear, de- ID registration may be required. It is they should be balanced as required. grade vehicle handling characteris- recommended that you visit a NISSAN tics, affect the VDC system and/or in- dealer for ID registration. Wheel balance service should be per- terference with the brake discs. Such formed with the wheels off the vehicle. interference can lead to decreased ∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle braking efficiency and/or early brake specified by NISSAN. The valve stem could lead to mechanical damage. pad wear. For additional information cap may become stuck. on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to ∙ For additional information regarding ∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- and consumer information” section of may be clogged up with dirt and formation” (Canada) in the Warranty this manual. cause a malfunction or loss of ∙ When replacing a wheel without the pressure. Information Booklet. TPMS, such as the spare tire, the TPMS ∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed Care of wheels will not function and the low tire pres- wheel or tire even if it has been re- ∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve- sure warning light will flash for ap- paired. Such wheels or tires could hicle to maintain their appearance. proximately 1 minute. The light will re- have structural damage and could fail main on after 1 minute. Have your without warning. ∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when tires replaced and/or TPMS system the wheel is changed or the underside reset as soon as possible. It is recom- ∙ The use of retread tires is not of the vehicle is washed. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer recommended. for this service. ∙ For additional information regarding ∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety nally specified by NISSAN could affect Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- ∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents the proper operation of the TPMS. mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In- or corrosion. Such damage may cause formation Booklet. loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. Do-it-yourself 8-41 ∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road ∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare CAUTION wheels to protect against road salt in tire installed do not drive the vehicle ∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO- areas where it is used during winter. at speeds faster than 50 mph RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains (80 km/h). Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY will not fit properly and may cause spare tire) ∙ When driving on roads covered with damage to the vehicle. snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY When replacing a wheel without the TPMS ONLY spare tire should be used on the spare tire is smaller than the original such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not rear wheels and the original tire used tire, ground clearance is reduced. To function. on the front wheels (drive wheels). avoid damage to the vehicle, do not Observe the following precautions if the ∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster the vehicle through an automatic car used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be rate than the standard tire. Replace wash since it may get caught. damaged or involved in an accident: the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. WARNING ∙ Do not use the spare tire on other ∙ The spare tire should be used for vehicles. emergency use only. It should be re- ∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at placed with the standard tire at the the same time. first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage. ∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. ∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. ∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi). 8-42 Do-it-yourself 9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements...... 9-2 Emission control system maintenance ...... 9-10 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Chassis & body maintenance...... 9-13 Scheduled maintenance ...... 9-2 Maintenance under severe operating Where to go for service ...... 9-2 conditions...... 9-15 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Severe driving conditions ...... 9-15 Explanation of general maintenance Standard maintenance...... 9-16 items...... 9-2 KR20DDET Engine model ...... 9-16 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 Emission control system maintenance ...... 9-16 Emission control system maintenance:...... 9-5 Chassis & body maintenance...... 9-18 Chassis and body maintenance:...... 9-6 Maintenance under severe operating Maintenance schedules ...... 9-7 conditions...... 9-20 Additional maintenance items for Severe driving conditions ...... 9-20 severe operating conditions ...... 9-7 Maintenance log ...... 9-21 Oil control system ...... 9-7 Standard maintenance...... 9-10 PR25DD Engine model...... 9-21 PR25DD Engine model...... 9-10 KR20DDET Engine model ...... 9-24 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular mainte- SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation of nance is essential to maintain your vehicle the vehicle, general maintenance should good mechanical condition, as well as its The maintenance items listed in this sec- be performed regularly as prescribed in emissions and engine performance. tion are required to be serviced at regular this section. If you detect any unusual intervals. However under severe driving sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure conditions, additional or more frequent check for the cause or have it checked that the scheduled maintenance, as well as maintenance will be required. general maintenance, is performed. promptly. In addition, it is recommended WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think As the vehicle owner, you are the only one that repairs are required. who can ensure that your vehicle receives If maintenance service is required or your proper maintenance. You are a vital link in vehicle appears to malfunction, have the When performing any checks or mainte- the maintenance chain. systems checked and serviced. It is recom- nance work, closely observe the “Mainte- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself” GENERAL MAINTENANCE this service. section of this manual. General maintenance includes those items NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe- EXPLANATION OF GENERAL which should be checked during normal cialists and are kept up-to-date with the day-to-day operation. They are essential latest service information through techni- MAINTENANCE ITEMS for proper vehicle operation. It is your re- cal bulletins, service tips and training pro- Additional information on the following sponsibility to perform these procedures grams. They are completely qualified to items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it- regularly as prescribed. work on NISSAN vehicles before work be- yourself” section of this manual. gins. Performing general maintenance checks Outside the vehicle requires minimal mechanical skill and only You can be confident that a NISSAN deal- a few general automotive tools. er’s service department can perform the The maintenance items listed here should These checks or inspections can be done service needed to meet the maintenance be performed from time to time, unless by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you requirements on your vehicle. otherwise specified. prefer, a NISSAN dealer. Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the 9-2 Maintenance and schedules secondary latch keeps the hood from TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for opening when the primary latch is re- and cap when the tires are replaced due to smooth operation and make sure the leased. wear or age. pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the When driving in areas using road salt or Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve- pedal. other corrosive materials, check lubrica- hicle should pull to either side while driving tion frequently. on a straight and level road, or if you detect Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer- down further than normal, the pedal feels basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high- spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer lights are all operating properly and in- way speeds, wheel balancing may be to stop, have your vehicle checked imme- stalled securely. Also check headlight aim. needed. diately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the For additional information regarding tires, Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- floor mat away from the pedal. ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” missing, and check for any loose wheel (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull nuts. Tighten if necessary. the Warranty Information Booklet. the vehicle to one side when applied. Tire rotation*: PR25DD Engine model; Tires Windshield: Clean the windshield on a Continuously Variable Transmission should be rotated every 5,000 miles regular basis. Check the windshield at least (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a (8,000 km). every six months for cracks or other dam- fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held KR25DDET Engine Model; Tires should be age. Have a damaged windshield repaired securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). by a qualified repair facility. position without applying any brakes. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge Windshield wiper blades*: Check for Parking brake: Check the parking brake often and always prior to long distance cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. operation regularly. The vehicle should be trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all securely held on a fairly steep hill with only tires, including the spare, to the pressure Inside the vehicle the parking brake applied. If the parking specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts The maintenance items listed here should brake needs adjustment, it is recom- or excessive wear. be checked on a regular basis, such as mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when performing scheduled maintenance, this service. transmitter components: Replace the cleaning the vehicle, etc. Maintenance and schedules 9-3 Seats: Check seat position controls such Under the hood and vehicle Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to level when the engine is cold. ensure they operate smoothly and all The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive latches lock securely in every position. belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Check that the head restraints/headrests time you check the engine oil or refuel). move up and down smoothly and the locks Battery*: This vehicle is equipped with a Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level spot and (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched sealed maintenance free battery. It is rec- turning off the engine. Wait more than positions. ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat for service. oil pan. belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, Exhaust system: Make sure there are no adjusters and retractors) operate properly NOTE: loose supports, cracks or holes. If the and smoothly, and are installed securely. Care should be taken to avoid situations sound of the exhaust seems unusual or Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, that can lead to potential battery dis- there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi- wear or damage. charge and potential no-start conditions ately have the exhaust system inspected. It Steering wheel: Check for changes in the such as: is recommended that you visit a NISSAN steering system, such as excessive free 1. Installation or extended use of elec- dealer for this service. For additional infor- play, hard steering or strange noises. tronic accessories that consume bat- mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section tery power when the engine is not Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all of this manual. warning lights and chimes are operating running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for properly. players, etc.). fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the Windshield defroster: Check that the air 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or vehicle has been parked for a while. Water comes out of the defroster outlets properly only driven short distances. dripping from the air conditioner after use and in sufficient quantity when operating In these cases, the battery may need to is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if the heater or air conditioner. be charged to maintain battery health. fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake that the wipers and washer operate prop- fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines erly and that the wipers do not streak. on the reservoir. 9-4 Maintenance and schedules EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the The following descriptions are provided to NOTE: radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, give you a better understanding of the NISSAN does not advocate the use of leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. scheduled maintenance items that should non-OEM approved aftermarket flush- Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor- be regularly checked or replaced. The ing systems and strongly advises mation, rot or loose connections. maintenance schedule indicates at which against performing these services on a Underbody: The underbody is frequently mileage/time intervals each item requires NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar- exposed to corrosive substances such as service. ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap- those used on icy roads or to control dust. It In addition to scheduled maintenance, proved chemicals or solvents, the use of is very important to remove these sub- your vehicle requires that some items be which has not been validated by NISSAN. stances, otherwise rust may form on the checked during normal day-to-day opera- For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the tion. For additional information, refer to grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom- exhaust system. At the end of winter, the mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- underbody should be thoroughly flushed “General maintenance” in this section. ties” in the “Technical and consumer in- with plain water, being careful to clean Items marked with “*” are recommended formation” section of this manual. those areas where mud and dirt may accu- by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. mulate. For additional information, refer to You are not required to perform mainte- EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM the “Appearance and care” section of this nance on these items in order to maintain MAINTENANCE: manual. the warranties which come with your Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in- wear, fraying or cracking and for proper there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. tervals are required. tension. Replace any damaged drive belts. When applicable, additional information Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter- can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section vals. When driving for prolonged periods in of this manual. dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5 Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified specified interval. When adding or replac- and connections for leaks, looseness, or intervals. When driving for prolonged peri- ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine deterioration. Tighten connections or re- ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) place parts as necessary. more frequently. or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus- additional information on the proper mix- Install new plugs of the type as originally pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling equipped. for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of or grease. Under severe driving conditions, this manual.) CHASSIS AND BODY inspect more frequently. NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant MAINTENANCE: Tire rotation: PR25DD Engine model; Tires or the use of non-distilled water may re- Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the instructions duce the recommended service interval proper installation. Check for chafing, under “Explanation of general mainte- of the coolant. cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. nance items” in this section. When rotating Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil Replace any deteriorated or damaged tires, check for damage and uneven wear. and oil filter at the specified intervals. For parts immediately. Replace if necessary. recommended oil grade and viscosity refer Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, KR20DDET Engine model; Tires should be to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any capacities” in the “Technical and consumer rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) ac- deteriorated or damaged parts immedi- information” section of this manual. cording to the instructions under “Explana- ately. tion of general maintenance items” in this Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex- section. When rotating tires, check for valve noise increases. Adjust valve clear- damage and uneven wear. Replace if nec- haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, ance if necessary. essary. cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten Evaporative emissions control vapor connections or replace parts as necessary. Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil, lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose- and transfer case oil: Visually inspect for ness. Tighten connections or replace parts Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage, signs of leakage at specified intervals. as necessary. looseness, and grease leakage. (AWD) Replace at specified intervals. Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not required. (in-tank type filter) 9-6 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi- ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS NOTE: cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte- FOR SEVERE OPERATING For vehicles operated in Canada, both nance schedules that may be used, de- standard and severe maintenance items pending upon the conditions in which you CONDITIONS should be performed at every interval. usually drive. These schedules contain Additional maintenance items for severe both distance and time intervals, up to operating conditions should be per- OIL CONTROL SYSTEM 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For formed on vehicles that are driven under most people, the odometer reading will in- Your vehicle is equipped with oil control especially demanding conditions. Addi- dicate when service is needed. However, if system. It calculates engine oil and filter tional maintenance items should be per- you drive very little, your vehicle should be change intervals based on driving condi- serviced at the regular time intervals formed if you primarily operate your vehicle tions. Driving in the following severe condi- shown in the schedule. under the following conditions: tions will shorten the engine oil and filter change interval. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/ ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles 144 months, continue maintenance at (8 km). the same mileage/time intervals. ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. ∙ Operating in hot weather in stop- and-go “rush hour” traffic. ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. ∙ Driving in dusty conditions. ∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads. ∙ Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7 How driving conditions affect OCS display timing PR25DD Engine model:

Conditions Driving Scene Display timing ∙ Freeway driving ∙ City driving (flat/moderate hills) Light Normal ∙ No towing or heavy loads ∙ No extended engine idling ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. ∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic. Extreme ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door- Early to-door delivery use. ∙ Using a car-top carrier. ∙ Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas. ∙ Sustained high speed driving.

CAUTION ∙ If your oil replacement indicator resets prematurely or becomes inop- ∙ If the oil replacement indicator is dis- erative, please change the oil within played, change the engine oil within six months or 5,000 miles (8,000 km) two weeks or less than 500 miles from your last oil change. (800 km). ∙ Operating your vehicle with deteriorated oil can damage the engine.

9-8 Maintenance and schedules KR20DDET Engine model: Conditions Driving Scene Display timing ∙ Freeway driving ∙ City driving (flat/moderate hills) Light Normal ∙ No towing or heavy loads ∙ No extended engine idling ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. ∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic. Extreme ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door- Early to-door delivery use. ∙ Using a car-top carrier. ∙ Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas. ∙ Sustained high speed driving.

CAUTION ∙ If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km). ∙ Operating your vehicle with deteriorated oil can damage the engine. ∙ If your oil replacement indicator resets prematurely or becomes inop- erative, please change the oil within six months or 3,750 miles (6,000 km) from your last oil change.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9 STANDARD MAINTENANCE

PR25DD ENGINE MODEL The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I* Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R Engine oil See NOTE (3) R R R R R R Engine oil filter See NOTE (3) R R R R R R Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5) EVAP vapor lines I* I* I* Fuel lines I* I* I* Fuel filter See NOTE (6) Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) See NOTE (7) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (8)

9-10 Maintenance and schedules Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192) Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I* Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R Engine oil See NOTE (3) R R R R R R Engine oil filter See NOTE (3) R R R R R R Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5) EVAP vapor lines I* I* I* Fuel lines I* I* I* Fuel filter See NOTE (6) Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) See NOTE (7) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (8)

Maintenance and schedules 9-11 NOTE: (1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter as soon as possible. After replacing the engine oil reset the display. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant. (6) Periodic maintenance is not required. (7) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 1.35 mm (0.053 in) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage. (8) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-12 Maintenance and schedules CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, which- miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 ever comes first. (km x 1,000) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 Brake lines and cables I I I I I I Brake pads and rotors ૽ IIIIII Brake fluid ૽ RRR CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts ૽ III Tire rotation See NOTE (3) Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD model)૽ IIIIII Exhaust system ૽ III In-cabin microfilter RRRR NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery I R R R

Maintenance and schedules 9-13 Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, miles x 1,000 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192) Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Brake lines and cables I I I I I I Brake pads and rotors ૽ II I II I Brake fluid ૽ RRR CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts III ૽ Tire rotation See NOTE (3) Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD model)૽ II I II I Exhaust system ૽ III In-cabin microfilter RRRR NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE: Maintenance items with “૽” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”. (1) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. (2) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months. (3) For additional information, refer to “Explanation of general maintenance items” in this section.

9-14 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

The maintenance intervals shown on the SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv- preceding pages are for normal operating ing for long distance, such as police, taxi conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles or door-to-door delivery use. under severe driving conditions as shown (8 km). ∙ Driving in dusty conditions. below, more frequent maintenance must ∙ Repeated short trips of less than be performed on the following items as 10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera- ∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread shown in the table. tures remaining below freezing. roads. ∙ Operating in hot weather in stop- ∙ Using a car-top carrier. and-go “rush hour” traffic. Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months Brake pads and rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD model) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Maintenance and schedules 9-15 STANDARD MAINTENANCE

KR20DDET ENGINE MODEL The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required. After 90,000 miles (144,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Miles x 1,000 3.75 7. 5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I* Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R EVAP vapor lines I* I* I* Fuel lines I* I* I* Fuel filter See NOTE (3) Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5) Engine oil See NOTE (6) R R R R R R Engine oil filter See NOTE (6) R R R R R R Spark plugs See NOTE (7) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (8)

9-16 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Miles x 1,000 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (78) (84) (90) (96) (102) (108) (114) (120) (126) (132) (138) (144) Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I* Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R EVAP vapor lines I* I* I* Fuel lines I* I* I* Fuel filter See NOTE (3) Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5) Engine oil See NOTE (6) R R R R R R Engine oil filter See NOTE (6) R R R R R R Spark plugs See NOTE (7) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (8)

NOTE: (1) After 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) Periodic maintenance is not required. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant. (6) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km) (7) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.049 in (1.25 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage. (8) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. Maintenance and schedules 9-17 CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Miles x 1,000 3.75 7. 5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 Brakelines&cables IIIIII Brake pads & rotors૽ IIIIII Brake fluid૽ RRR CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension III parts૽ Tire rotation See NOTE (2) Front drive shaft boots૽ IIIIII Exhaust system૽ III In-cabin microfilter RRRR NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery I R R R

9-18 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Miles x 1,000 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (78) (84) (90) (96) (102) (108) (114) (120) (126) (132) (138) (144) Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Brakelines&cables IIIIII Brake pads & rotors૽ IIIIII Brake fluid૽ RRR CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension III parts૽ Tire rotation See NOTE (2) Front drive shaft boots૽ IIIIII Exhaust system૽ III In-cabin microfilter RRRR NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE: Maintenance items with “૽” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”. (1) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. (2) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “Explanation of general maintenance items” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-19 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

The maintenance intervals shown on the SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv- preceding pages are for normal operating ing for long distances, such as police, conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles taxi or door-to-door delivery use. (8 km). under severe driving conditions as shown ∙ Driving in dusty conditions. below, more frequent maintenance must ∙ Repeated short trips of less than be performed on the following items as 10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera- ∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread shown in the table. tures remaining below freezing. roads. ∙ Using a car-top carrier. ∙ Operating in hot weather in stop- and-go “rush hour” traffic. Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary. Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval Brake fluid Replace Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months Front drive shaft boots Inspect Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months Exhaust system Inspect Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months

9-20 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE LOG

PR25DD ENGINE MODEL

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24 25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30 30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42 40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48 45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-21 50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60 55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66 60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78 70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84 75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96 85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102 90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

9-22 Maintenance and schedules 95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114 100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126 Months 120 Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132 115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138 120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-23 KR20DDET ENGINE MODEL

3,750 Miles (6,000 km) or 6 7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 12 11,250 Miles (18,000 km) or 18 Months Months Months Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Retailer Retailer Retailer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 24 18,750 Miles (30,000 km) or 30 22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 36 Months Months Months Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Retailer Retailer Retailer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 26,250 Miles (42,000 km) or 42 30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 48 33,750 Miles (54,000 km) or 54 Months Months Months Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Retailer Retailer Retailer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

9-24 Maintenance and schedules 37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or 60 41,250 Miles (66,000 km) or 66 45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 72 Months Months Months Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Retailer Retailer Retailer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 48,750 Miles (78,000 km) or 78 52,500 Miles (84,000 km) or 84 56,250 Miles (90,000 km) or 90 Months Months Months Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Retailer Retailer Retailer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 96 63,750 Miles (102,000 km) or 102 67,500 Miles (108,000 km) or 108 Months Months Months Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Retailer Retailer Retailer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-25 71,250 Miles (114,000 km) or 114 75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 120 78,750 Miles (126,000 km) or 126 Months Months Months Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Retailer Retailer Retailer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 82,500 Miles (132,000 km) or 132 86,250 Miles (138,000 km) or 138 90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 144 Months Months Months Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Retailer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Retailer Retailer Retailer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

9-26 Maintenance and schedules 10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and Tire and Loading Information label ...... 10-13 capacities ...... 10-2 Air conditioner specification label...... 10-13 Fuel recommendation...... 10-4 Installing front license plate...... 10-14 Engine oil and oil filter Vehicle loading information ...... 10-14 recommendations ...... 10-7 Terms ...... 10-14 Air conditioner system refrigerant and Vehicle load capacity ...... 10-15 oil recommendations ...... 10-8 Loading tips ...... 10-17 Specifications ...... 10-9 Measurement of weights ...... 10-17 Engine ...... 10-9 Towing a trailer ...... 10-18 Wheels and tires...... 10-10 Flat towing ...... 10-18 Dimensions and weights ...... 10-10 Uniform tire quality grading...... 10-18 When traveling or registering in another Emission control system warranty...... 10-19 country...... 10-11 Reporting safety defects ...... 10-20 Vehicle identification ...... 10-11 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) test...... 10-21 plate ...... 10-11 Event Data Recorders (EDR)...... 10-21 Vehicle identification number Additional Data Recording (on vehicles (chassis number) ...... 10-11 equipped with optional ProPILOT Engine serial number...... 10-12 Assist) ...... 10-22 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order Emission control information label ...... 10-13 information ...... 10-23 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure FWD: 61.3 L 16 1/4 gal 13 1/2 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in Fuel AWD: 60.6 L 16 gal 13 3/8 gal this section. • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is With oil filter recommended. 5.1 L 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt change • If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage PR25DD Engine oil*1 caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as rec- Drain and refill Without oil ommended is not covered under NISSAN’s/INFINITI’s New Ve- 4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt *1: For additional filter change hicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to “En- information, refer gine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section. to “Engine oil” in • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN” (or equivalent) is the “Do-it-yourself” With oil filter recommended. 4.7 L 5 qt 4-1/8 qt section of this change • If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic manual. SAE 5W-30 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Dam- KR20DDET age caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other then as Without oil recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s/INFINITI’s New Ve- 4.6 L 4-7/8 qt 4 qt filter change hicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to “En- gine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section. Engine coolant PR25DD 8.3 L 2-1/4 gal 1-7/8 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) with reservoir KR20DDET 7.7 L 2 gal 1-3/4 gal or equivalent

10-2 Technical and consumer information Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure • Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 • NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Differential gear oil — — — • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or Transfer oil — — — equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil. Refill to the proper level according to the • Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent Brake fluid instructions in the “Do-it-yourself” section DOT 3. of this manual. • Available in mainland U.S.A through a NISSAN dealer Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) • HF0-1234yf (R-1234yf) Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section. • Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG (VC100YF oil) or equivalent Air conditioning system oil — — — • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section. • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An- Windshield-washer fluid 3.8 L 1 gal 7/8 gal tifreeze fluid or equivalent.

Technical and consumer information 10-3 FUEL RECOMMENDATION ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more ∙ U.S. government regulations require Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel tified by a small, square, orange and Index) number (Research octane number containing more than 15% ethanol. black label with the common abbre- Using a fuel containing more than 15% viation or the appropriate percentage 91). ethanol in a vehicle not specifically for that region. designed for a fuel containing more CAUTION than 15% ethanol can adversely affect Gasoline specifications ∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door the emission control devices and sys- NISSAN recommends using gasoline that label can operate on E-85. Fuel system tems of the vehicle. Damage caused meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) or other damage can occur if E-85 is by such fuel is not covered by the specifications where it is available. Many of used in vehicles that are not designed NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. the automobile manufacturers developed to run on E-85. ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc- this specification to improve emission con- ∙ Using a fuel other than that specified tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl trol system and vehicle performance. Ask could adversely affect the emission manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using your service station manager if the gaso- control system, and may also affect fuel containing MMT may adversely line meets the WWFC specifications. the warranty coverage. affect vehicle performance and ve- Reformulated gasoline hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens- ∙ Under no circumstances should a ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- Some fuel suppliers are now producing re- leaded gasoline be used, because this tent, so you may have to consult your formulated gasolines. These gasolines are will damage the three-way catalyst. gasoline retailer for more details. specially designed to reduce vehicle emis- Note that Federal and California laws sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards prohibit the use of MMT in reformu- cleaner air and suggests that you use related gasoline. formulated gasoline when available.

10-4 Technical and consumer information Gasoline containing oxygenates ∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should orange and black label with the common contain no more than 5% methanol abbreviation or the appropriate percent- Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It age for that region. ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl should also contain a suitable E–85 fuel Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with amount of appropriate cosolvents or without advertising their presence. and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop- E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% NISSAN does not recommend the use of erly formulated with appropriate co- fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. fuels of which the oxygenate content and solvents and corrosion inhibitors, E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can- such methanol blends may cause fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve- not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask system damage and/or vehicle per- hicle. U.S. government regulations require your service station manager. formance problems. At this time, suf- fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- ficient data is not available to ensure tified by a small, square, orange and black If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, that all methanol blends are suitable label with the common abbreviation or the please take the following precautions as for use in NISSAN vehicles. appropriate percentage for that region. the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system If any driveability problems such as engine Fuel containing MMT damage. stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe- rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga- ∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have immediately change to a non-oxygenate nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad- an octane rating no lower than that fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the recommended for unleaded gasoline. use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may Take care not to spill gasoline during re- adversely affect vehicle performance, in- ∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cluding the emissions control system. Note methanol blend is used, it should can cause paint damage. that while some fuel pumps label MMT contain no more than 15% oxygenate. E–15 fuel content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more de- E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% tails. fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, Technical and consumer information 10-5 Aftermarket fuel additives Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, NISSAN does not recommend the use of which may cause excessive fuel consump- any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex- tion or engine damage. If any of the above ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane symptoms are encountered, have your ve- booster, intake valve deposit removers, hicle checked. It is recommended that you etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active sol- However, now and then you may notice vents or similar ingredients that can be light spark knock for a short time while harmful to the fuel system and engine. accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the Octane rating tips greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy Using unleaded gasoline with an octane engine load. rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

10-6 Technical and consumer information Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil LTI2303 viscosity based on the temperatures at ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER Select only engine oils that meet the which the vehicle will be operated before RECOMMENDATIONS American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi- the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos- cation or International Lubricant Standard- ity other than that recommended could Selecting the correct oil ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) cause serious engine damage. certification and SAE viscosity standard. It is essential to choose the correct grade, These oils have the API certification mark Selecting the correct oil filter quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure on the front of the container. Oils which do Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a satisfactory engine life and performance. not have the specified quality label should For additional information, refer to “Recom- high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When not be used as they could cause engine replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” damage. in this section. NISSAN recommends the its equivalent for the reason described in use of an energy conserving oil in order to “Change intervals.” improve fuel economy.

Technical and consumer information 10-7 Change intervals For additional information, refer to the safe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN dealer “Maintenance and schedules” section of has the trained technicians and equip- The oil and oil filter change intervals for this manual. ment needed to recover and recycle your your engine are based on the use of the air conditioner system refrigerant. Only specified quality oils and filters. Using en- AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM new and SAEJ2842 certified evaporator(s) gine oil and filters that are not of the speci- REFRIGERANT AND OIL shall be used as replacement parts. fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil RECOMMENDATIONS A damaged or leaking air conditioning and filter change intervals could reduce evaporator shall never be repaired or re- The air conditioner system in your engine life. Damage to the engine caused placed with one removed from a used or NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the by improper maintenance or use of incor- salvaged vehicle. To replace a damaged or rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and leaking evaporator, use only new and SAE not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG J2842 certified evaporator(s). It is recom- Limited Warranty. (VC100YF oil) or the exact equivalents. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner sys- Your engine was filled with a high-quality CAUTION engine oil when it was built.You do not have tem. to change the oil before the first recom- The use of any other refrigerant or oil mended change interval. Oil and filter will cause severe damage to the air con- change intervals depend upon how you ditioning system and will require the re- use your vehicle. placement of all air conditioner system components. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in changes: your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Although this refriger- ∙ repeated short distance driving at cold ant does not affect the earth’s atmo- outside temperatures sphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any ∙ driving in dusty conditions refrigerant during automotive air condi- ∙ extensive idling tioner system service. Air conditioner system should only be serviced by trained and ∙ stop and go commuting certified technicians to ensure proper and 10-8 Technical and consumer information SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model PR25DD KR20DDET Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline 4-cylinder, inline Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.504 x 3.937 (89.0 x 100.0) when compression ratio = 8 in (mm) 3.307 x 3.547 (84.0 x 90.1) when compression ratio = 14 in (mm) 3.307 x 3.500 (84.0 x 88.9) Displacement cu in (cm3) 151.85 (2,488) when compression ratio = 8 cu in (cm3) 121.86 (1,997) when compression ratio = 14 cu in (cm3) 120.22 (1,970) Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–3–4–2 Idle speed CVT in N (Neutral) position No adjustment is necessary. Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO%atidle Spark plug DXE22H11C DILKAR7N9HG Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.43 (1.1) 0.035 (0.9) Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Technical and consumer information 10-9 WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheel type Size Offset in Unit: in (mm) (mm) Overall length without license plate bracket 192.9 (4,900) Overall width without mirrors 72.9 (1,852) Steel 16 x 7.0J 1.77 (45) Overall height at Base Curb Weight to Roof Metal Aluminum 17 x 7.5J 1.97 (50) 2.5 L with front wheel drive Aluminum 19 x 8.0J 2.17 (55) USA S model 56.7 (1,440) Canada S model 56.7 (1,441) T-type (Steel spare) 16 x 4T 1.18 (30) USA SV 56.9 (1,444) Canada SV 56.9 (1,445) Tire size USA / Canada SL models 56.9 (1,444) 2.5 S model P215/60R16 USA Platinum model 56.9 (1,445) Canada Platinum model 56.9 (1,446) 2.5 SV/SL models P215/55R17 USA SR model 56.9 (1,444) 2.5 and 2.0 SR/Platinum models P235/40R19 Canada SR model 56.9 (1,445) with All-wheel drive Spare tire USA / Canada S model 57.2 (1,452) USA / Canada SV and SL models 57.3 (1,456) T135/70D16 USA / Canada Platinum model 57.4 (1,459) T135/90D16 USA SR model 57.4 (1,458) Canada SR model 57.4 (1,459) 2.0 L USA Platinum model 56.9 (1,445) Canada Platinum model 56.9 (1,446) USA SR 56.8 (1,443) Canada SR 56.9 (1,444) Front and Rear track 16 inch wheel 63.6 (1,615) 17 inch wheel 63.2 (1,605) 19 inch wheel 62.8 (1,595) Wheelbase 111.2 (2,825) Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. Gross axle weight rating certification label” on the center pillar between the driver’s side Front lbs. (kg) front and rear doors. Rear lbs. (kg)

10-10 Technical and consumer information WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws LTI2050 LTI2387 and regulations. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The laws and regulations for motor vehicle (VIN) PLATE (chassis number) emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, prov- The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The vehicle identification number is lo- ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica- plate is attached as shown. This number is cated as shown. tions may differ. the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

Technical and consumer information 10-11 LTI2381 LTI2328 WTI0172 PR25DD KR20DDET F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER LABEL The number is stamped on the engine as The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle shown. Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

10-12 Technical and consumer information WTI0173 WTI0174 LTI2271 EMISSION CONTROL TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION INFORMATION LABEL LABEL LABEL The emission control information label is The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire The air conditioner specification label is af- attached to the underside of the hood as and Loading Information label. The label is fixed to the underside of the hood as shown. located as shown. shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-13 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING ∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight ∙ It is extremely dangerous to of passengers and cargo. ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding ∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- in these areas are more likely to ing) - maximum total combined be seriously injured or killed. weight of the unloaded vehicle, ∙ Do not allow people to ride in passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer any area of your vehicle that is tongue load and any other op- not equipped with seats and tional equipment. This informa- seat belts. tion is located on the ∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification is in a seat and using a seat belt label. LTI2380 properly. To mount the front license plate, attach the ∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - license plate bracket to the bumper fascia TERMS maximum weight (load) limit at the location marks (small dimples) using the two provided screws ᭺A . It is important to familiarize yourself specified for the front or rear axle. with the following terms before This information is located on the loading your vehicle: F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight in- ∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight cluding: standard and optional rating) - The maximum total equipment, fluids, emergency weight rating of the vehicle, pas- tools, and spare tire assembly. sengers, cargo, and trailer. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.

10-14 Technical and consumer information ∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY limit, Total load capacity - maxi- Do not exceed the load limit of your mum total weight limit specified vehicle shown as “The combined of the load (passengers and weight of occupants and cargo” on cargo) for the vehicle. This is the the Tire and Loading Information la- maximum combined weight of bel. Do not exceed the number of occupants and cargo that can be occupants shown as “Seating Ca- loaded into the vehicle. If the ve- pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor- hicle is used to tow a trailer, the mation label. trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. To get “the combined weight of oc- This information is located on the cupants and cargo”, add the weight Tire and Loading Information la- of all occupants, then add the total bel. luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration. ∙ Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.

Technical and consumer information 10-15 Steps for determining correct load limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or XXX kg. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = LTI2335 650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = Example 300 kg.) 10-16 Technical and consumer information 5. Determine the combined weight WARNING MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS of luggage and cargo being Secure loose items to prevent loaded on the vehicle. That ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent weight shifts that could affect the weight may not safely exceed the it from sliding or shifting. Do not balance of your vehicle. When the ve- available cargo and luggage load place cargo higher than the hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and capacity calculated in step 4. seatbacks. In a sudden stop or weigh the front and the rear wheels Before driving a loaded vehicle, con- collision, unsecured cargo could separately to determine axle loads. firm that you do not exceed the cause personal injury. Individual axle loads should not ex- Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ∙ Do not load your vehicle any ceed either of the gross axle weight or the Gross Axle Weight Rating heavier than the GVWR or the ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle (GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi- maximum front and rear loads should not exceed the gross tional information, refer to “Measure- GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ment of weights” in this section. vehicle can break, tire damage ratings are given on the vehicle cer- could occur, or it can change the Also check tires for proper inflation way your vehicle handles. This tification label. If weight ratings are pressures. For additional informa- could result in loss of control exceeded, move or remove items to tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor- and cause personal injury. bring all weights below the ratings. mation label” in this section. ∙ Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle LOADING TIPS and the tire, but can also cause ∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR unsafe vehicle handling and or GAWR as specified on the longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire fail- F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification ure which could result in a seri- label. ous accident and personal in- ∙ Do not load the front and rear jury. Failures caused by axle to the GAWR. Doing so will overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty. exceed the GVWR. Technical and consumer information 10-17 TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. Continuously Variable DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual- Transmission (CVT) ity Grades: All passenger car tires must FLAT TOWING conform to federal safety requirements in Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on To tow a vehicle equipped with a CVT, an addition to these grades. appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed the ground is sometimes called flat towing. under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Al- Quality grades can be found where appli- This method is sometimes used when ways follow the dolly manufacturer’s rec- cable on the tire sidewall between tread towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve- ommendations when using their product. shoulder and maximum section width. For hicle, such as a motor home. example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A CAUTION Treadwear ∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when ∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al- tested under controlled conditions on a ways tow forward, never backward. specified government test course. For ex- ∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve- ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one hicle with the front tires on the ground. and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the Doing so may cause serious and expen- government course as a tire graded 100. sive damage to the powertrain. The relative performance of tires depends ∙ DO NOT tow any continuously variable upon the actual conditions of their use, transmission vehicle with all four however, and may depart significantly from wheels on the ground (flat towing). the norm due to variations in driving habits, Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal trans- service practices and differences in road mission parts due to lack of transmis- characteristics and climate. sion lubrication. ∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. 10-18 Technical and consumer information EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Traction AA, A, B and C tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol- B and A represent higher levels of perfor- lowing emission warranties: The traction grades, from highest to low- mance on the laboratory test wheel than For USA est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre- the minimum required by law. sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave- 1. Emission Defects Warranty ment as measured under controlled WARNING conditions on specified government test 2. Emissions Performance Warranty The temperature grade for this tire is surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Details of this warranty may be found with established for a tire that is properly in- marked C may have poor traction perfor- other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- flated and not overloaded. Excessive mance. formation Booklet which comes with your speed, under-inflation, or excessive NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War- loading, either separately or in combi- WARNING ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you nation, can cause heat build-up and may obtain a replacement by writing to: The traction grade assigned to this tire possible tire failure. is based on straight-ahead braking ∙ Nissan North America, Inc. traction tests, and does not include ac- Consumer Affairs Department celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or P.O. Box 685003 peak traction characteristics. Franklin, TN 37068-5003 Temperature A, B and C For Canada The temperature grades are A (the high- Emission Control System Warranty est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- tance to the generation of heat, and its Details of this warranty may be found with ability to dissipate heat when tested under other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- controlled conditions on a specified indoor formation Booklet which comes with your laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War- perature can cause the material of the tire ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- may obtain a replacement by writing to: cessive temperature can lead to sudden ∙ Nissan Canada Inc. tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a 5290 Orbitor Drive level of performance which all passenger Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5 car tires must meet under the Federal Mo- Technical and consumer information 10-19 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

For USA You may notify NISSAN by contact- fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers) or If you believe that your vehicle has a ing our Consumer Affairs Depart- ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/ defect which could cause a crash or Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/ could cause injury or death, you For Canada fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speak- should immediately inform the Na- If you believe that your vehicle has a ers) tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- defect which could cause a crash or Additional information concerning istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- could cause injury or death, you fying NISSAN. motor vehicle safety may be ob- should immediately inform Trans- tained from Transport Canada’s If NHTSA receives similar complaints, port Canada in addition to notifying Road Safety Information Centre at it may open an investigation, and if it NISSAN. 1-800-333-0371 or online at finds that a safety defect exists in a If Transport Canada receives com- www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English group of vehicles, it may order a re- plaints, it may open an investigation, speakers) or call and remedy campaign. However, and if it finds that a safety defect www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere NHTSA cannot become involved in exists in a group of vehicles, it may (French speakers). individual problems between you, request that NISSAN conduct a recall To notify NISSAN of any safety con- your dealer, or NISSAN. campaign. However, Transport cerns please contact our Consumer To contact NHTSA, you may call the Canada cannot become involved in Information Centre toll free at 1-800- Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at individual problems between you, 387-0122. 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); your dealer, or NISSAN. go to http://www.safercar.gov; or You may contact Transport Canada’s write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi- Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You 20590. You can also obtain other in- may also report safety defects online formation about motor vehicle safety at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/ from http://www.safercar.gov. Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/ 10-20 Technical and consumer information READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

WARNING If a powertrain system component is re- This vehicle is equipped with an EDR. The paired or the battery is disconnected, the main purpose of an EDR is to record, in A vehicle equipped with All -Wheel Drive vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi- certain collision or near collision-like situa- (AWD) should never be tested using a tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the tions, such as an air bag deployment or two wheel dynamometer (such as the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist dynamometers used by some states for readiness condition. Place the ignition in understanding how a vehicle’s systems emissions testing), or similar equip- switch in the ON position without starting performed. The EDR is designed to record ment. Make sure you inform the test fa- the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator data related to vehicle dynamics and cility personnel that your vehicle is Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds safety systems for a short period of time, equipped with AWD before it is placed and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this on a dynamometer. Using the wrong condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not vehicle is designed to record such data as: test equipment may result in drivetrain blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi- damage or unexpected vehicle move- tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you ∙ How various systems in your vehicle ment which could result in serious ve- visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con- were operating; hicle damage or personal injury. dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing. ∙ Whether or not the driver and passen- Due to legal requirements in some states ger safety belts were buckled/fastened; and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may ∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress- be required to be in what is called the ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; “ready condition” for an and, Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. ∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling. The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” ∙ Sounds are not recorded. when it is driven through certain driving These data can help provide a better un- patterns. Usually, the ready condition can derstanding of the circumstances in which be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve- collisions and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR hicle. data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial collision situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and collision location) Technical and consumer information 10-21 are recorded. However, other parties, such ∙ Driver operational status of the accel- NISSAN and third parties entrusted by as law enforcement, could combine the erator, brakes, steering, etc. NISSAN will not disclose/provide the re- EDR data with the type of personally iden- corded data to a third party except: ∙ Detection status of a vehicle ahead and tifying data routinely acquired during a col- lane markers - With the consent of the vehicle owner or lision investigation. with the consent of the lessee ∙ Vehicle information including distance To read data recorded by an EDR, special to vehicle ahead and lateral position - In response to an official request from law equipment is required and access to the enforcement, court order, governmental vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to ∙ Information on the operation of the agency, or other legally enforceable re- the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN ProPILOT Assist and other crash avoid- quest dealer, other parties, such as law enforce- ance features - For research purposes after the data is ment, that have the special equipment, can ∙ ProPILOT Assist malfunction diagnosis modified such that it is no longer tied to a read the information if they have access to information specific vehicle or vehicle owner (anony- the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be mized) accessed with the consent of the vehicle ∙ External images from the multi-sensing owner or lessee or as otherwise required or front camera (Available only when the permitted by law. SRS air bag or IEB system is activated) ADDITIONAL DATA RECORDING (on The ProPILOT Assist does not record con- vehicles equipped with optional versations, sounds or images of the inside ProPILOT Assist) of the vehicle. To read this supplemental data, special If your vehicle is equipped with the optional equipment is required and access to the ProPILOT Assist, it will also be equipped vehicle or the recording unit is needed. This with supplemental data recording function supplemental data will only be accessed intended to assist in understanding how with the consent of the vehicle owner or ProPILOT Assist performs in certain non- lessee or as otherwise required or permit- trivial crash or near-crash scenarios. Spe- ted by law. If downloaded, NISSAN and third cifically, supplemental recording is de- parties entrusted by NISSAN may use the signed to capture the following: data recorded for the purpose of improv- ing NISSAN’s vehicle safety performance. 10-22 Technical and consumer information OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased. For USA For current pricing and availability of Genu- ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact: www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of Genu- ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact: 1-800-247-5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep- resentative will assist you.

Technical and consumer information 10-23 MEMO

10-24 Technical and consumer information 11 Index

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .....5-168 Brakelight(Seestoplight)...... 8-27 A Armrests...... 1-7 Brakesystem...... 5-167 Audible reminders ...... 2-18 Brakewarninglight...... 2-11 Active noise cancellation Autolightswitch...... 2-44 Brakewearindicators...... 2-18,8-21 Active sound enhancement . .5-181, 5-181 Automatic Parking brake operation ...... 5-25 ActiveRideControl(ARC)...... 5-172 Automatic drive Self-adjustingbrakes...... 8-21 Air bag (See supplemental restraint positioner ...... 3-33,3-34,3-35 Brake Assist ...... 5-169 system) ...... 1-46 Automatic power window switch. . .2-62 Brakefluid...... 8-13 Air bag system Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-32 Brakes...... 8-21 Front (See supplemental front impact Automaticbrakehold...... 5-28 Brakesystem...... 5-167 airbagsystem)...... 1-54 Automatic door locks ...... 3-7 Break-in schedule...... 5-160 Airbagwarninglight...... 1-67, 2-15 Automatic drive positioner . .3-33, 3-34, 3-35 Brightness control Air bag warning light, Automatic Emergency Braking Instrument panel...... 2-49 supplemental ...... 1-67, 2-15 (AEB) ...... 2-10,2-14,5-129 Bulb check/instrument panel ...... 2-10 Air cleaner housing filter ...... 8-19 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Bulb replacement ...... 8-27 Air conditioner Pedestrian Detection ...... 5-137 Air conditioner operation.....4-32,4-37 AWD...... 5-162,6-14 Air conditioner specification label . .10-13 C Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations ...... 10-8 B Capacities and recommended fuel/ Air conditioner system refrigerant lubricants...... 10-2 recommendations ...... 10-8 Battery...... 5-178, 8-15 Cargo Heater and air conditioner Charge warning light ...... 2-11 (See vehicle loading information) . . . .10-14 controls...... 4-29,4-37 Battery replacement ...... 8-24 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-41 Servicing air conditioner ...... 4-40 Keyfob...... 8-24 Chassis control ...... 5-172 Air flow charts...... 4-33 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 8-25 Check tire pressure ...... 2-34 Alarm system Before starting the engine ...... 5-17 Childrestraints...... 1-21, 1-22, 1-23, 1-26 (See vehicle security system) ...... 2-39 Belt(Seedrivebelt)...... 8-17 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for All-Wheel Drive...... 5-162,6-14 Blind Spot Warning (BSW)...... 5-45 CHildren)System...... 1-26 Anchor point locations ...... 1-28 Booster seats ...... 1-42 Precautions on child Antenna ...... 4-41 Brake restraints...... 1-23, 1-31, 1-38, 1-43 Antifreeze ...... 5-178 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . .5-168 Top tether strap anchor point Anti-lock brake warning light...... 2-10 Brakefluid...... 8-13 locations...... 1-28 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 Drive positioner, Automatic. . .3-33, 3-34, 3-35 Engine specifications ...... 10-9 Chimes, audible reminders ...... 2-18 Driving Starting the engine ...... 5-17 Cleaningexteriorandinterior...... 7-2,7-4 Cold weather driving...... 5-178 Engine Block Heater ...... 5-180 C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 Driving with Continuously Variable Engine coolant temperature gauge ....2-6 Coldweatherdriving...... 5-178 Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-18 EventDatarecorders...... 10-21,10-22 Console box ...... 2-58 Precautions when starting and Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)...... 5-4 Continuously Variable Transmission driving...... 5-4,5-11 Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2 (CVT) ...... 5-18 Drivingthevehicle...... 5-18 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items...... 9-5 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Extended storage switch ...... 2-55 fluid...... 8-12 Eyeglasscase...... 2-58 Driving with Continuously Variable E Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-18 E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH ...... 2-53 Controls F Heater and air conditioner Economy - fuel ...... 5-162 Emergency engine shutoff ...... 5-15,6-2 controls...... 4-29,4-37 Flashers Emission control information label . . . .10-13 Coolant (Seehazardwarningflasherswitch)....6-2 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-19 Capacities and recommended Flattire...... 6-3,6-4 Engine fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Floormatpositioningaid...... 7-6 Before starting the engine ...... 5-17 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-7 Fluid Capacities and recommended Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-7 Brakefluid...... 8-13 fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Capacities and recommended Changing engine coolant ...... 8-7 Corrosionprotection...... 7-7 fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Changing engine oil ...... 8-9 Cruisecontrol...... 5-63 Continuously Variable Transmission Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-11 Cupholders...... 2-59 (CVT) fluid ...... 8-12 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-7 Engine coolant ...... 8-6 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-8 Engine oil ...... 8-8 D Engine compartment check Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-13 locations...... 8-4 F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 Daytime Running Light System ...... 2-48 Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Foglightswitch...... 2-50 Defroster switch Engine cooling system ...... 8-6 Front air bag system Rear window and outside mirror Engine oil ...... 8-8 (See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-54 defrosterswitch...... 2-43 Engine oil and oil filter Front-door pocket ...... 2-56 Dimensions and weights ...... 10-10 recommendation ...... 10-7 Front power seat adjustment ...... 1-4 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-49 Engine oil pressure warning light....2-12 Frontseats...... 1-2 Door locks ...... 3-4,3-5 Engine oil viscosity...... 10-7 Drivebelt...... 8-17 Engine serial number ...... 10-12 11-2 Fuel Instrument panel ...... 0-6,2-2 H Capacities and recommended Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-49 Intelligent Around View Monitor ...... 4-11 fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 6-2 Fuel economy ...... 5-162 Headlight and turn signal switch...... 2-43 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) Fuel-filler door and cap ...... 3-27 Headlightcontrolswitch...... 2-43 (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) . . .5-66 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-27 Headlights...... 8-26 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 Headrestraints...... 1-7 (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) . . . .5-102 Fueloctanerating...... 10-6 Heated seat switches ...... 2-51 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) .....5-157 Fuel recommendation ...... 10-4 Heated steering wheel ...... 2-52 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-34 Heater (I-FCW)...... 5-146 Fuelefficientdrivingtips...... 5-161 Heater and air conditioner Intelligent Key system Fuel-filler door ...... 3-27 controls...... 4-29,4-37 Key operating range ...... 3-9 Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 Heater operation ...... 4-30,4-38 Key operation...... 3-10 Fuses...... 8-22 Hill start assist system...... 5-173 Mechanical key ...... 3-3 Fusiblelinks...... 8-23 HomeLink® Universal Remote keyless entry operation ....3-14 Transceiver . .2-66, 2-67, 2-68, 2-69, 2-69, 2-70 Troubleshooting guide ...... 3-18 Hood ...... 3-24 Warning signals ...... 3-18 G Horn...... 2-50 Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) .....5-39 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) ...... 5-172 Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal Interiorlight...... 2-64 I Transceiver . .2-66, 2-67, 2-68, 2-69, 2-69, 2-70 Interiortrunklidrelease...... 3-26 ISOFIX child restraints...... 1-26 Gascap...... 3-27 Ignition switch Gauge Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-13 Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Immobilizer system ...... 2-40,5-16 J Fuel gauge ...... 2-7 Important vehicle information label . . .10-12 Odometer ...... 2-5 In-cabinmicrofilter...... 8-19 Jumpstarting...... 6-9,8-16 Speedometer...... 2-4,2-5 Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-162 Tachometer ...... 2-6 Indicator Trip odometer ...... 2-4,2-5 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge K General maintenance ...... 9-2 indicator...... 5-16 Glovebox...... 2-57 Indicator lights and audible reminders Key...... 3-2 Gloveboxlock...... 2-57 (See warning/indicator lights and audible Key fob battery replacement ...... 8-24 reminders)...... 2-15 Keyless entry Inside automatic anti-glare mirror.....3-32 With Intelligent Key system Instrument brightness control ...... 2-49 (See Intelligent Key system) ...... 3-14 11-3 Keys Headlightcontrolswitch...... 2-43 Maintenance precautions...... 8-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-2 Headlights...... 8-26 Outsidethevehicle...... 9-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Interiorlight...... 2-64 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-20 keys...... 3-4 Lightbulbs...... 8-26 Under the hood and vehicle ...... 9-4 Low tire pressure warning light .....2-12 Maintenance log ...... 9-21 Low windshield-washer fluid warning Maintenance requirements...... 9-2 L light...... 2-34 Maintenance schedules ...... 9-7,9-7 Personal lights ...... 2-65 Maintenance under severe operation conditions...... 9-15, 9-20 Label Security indicator light ...... 2-17 Malfunctionindicatorlight...... 2-16 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Spotlights(Seemaplight)...... 2-65 Manual front seat adjustment ...... 1-3 Labels Trunklight...... 2-66 Maplights...... 2-65 Air conditioner specification label . . .10-13 Warning/indicator lights and audible Memory Seat ...... 3-33,3-34,3-35 C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 reminders ...... 2-15 Meters and gauges...... 2-4 Emission control information label . .10-13 Lights...... 8-26 Instrument brightness control .....2-49 Engine serial number ...... 10-12 Maplights...... 2-65 Mirror F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 Lock Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . .3-32 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 Outsidemirrors...... 3-32 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-11 Door locks ...... 3-4,3-5 Rearview...... 3-31 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-27 Vanitymirror...... 3-31 plate...... 10-11 Gloveboxlock...... 2-57 Mirrors...... 3-31 Warning labels (for SRS)...... 1-67 Power door locks ...... 3-6 Moonroof...... 2-63,7-5 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ...... 5-34 Trunk lid lock opener lever...... 3-25 Moving Object Detection (MOD) ...... 4-23 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-34 CHildren)System...... 1-26 Lowfuelwarninglight...... 2-14,2-34 License plate Low tire pressure warning light ...... 2-12 N Installing the license plate ...... 10-14 Low windshield-washer fluid warning Light light...... 2-34 NissanConnect® Owner's Manual ...... 4-2 Airbagwarninglight...... 1-67, 2-15 Luggage NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-2 Brakelight(Seestoplight)...... 8-27 (See vehicle loading information) .....10-14 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge Bulb check/instrument panel ...... 2-10 indicator...... 5-16 Bulb replacement ...... 8-27 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . .2-40, Charge warning light ...... 2-11 M 5-16 ExteriorandInteriorlights...... 8-27 Foglights...... 8-27 Maintenance Foglightswitch...... 2-50 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Headlight and turn signal switch....2-43 Insidethevehicle...... 9-3 11-4 Rearpowerwindows...... 2-61 Recorders O Poweroutlet...... 2-55 EventData...... 10-21,10-22 Powersteering...... 5-166 Refrigerant recommendation...... 10-8 Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6 Precautions Odometer ...... 2-5 Registering a vehicle in another Maintenance precautions...... 8-2 Oil country ...... 10-11 Precautions on booster Capacities and recommended Remote Engine Start ...... 3-21,5-18 seats...... 1-23, 1-31, 1-38, 1-43 fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-20 Precautions on child Changing engine oil ...... 8-9 restraints...... 1-23, 1-31, 1-38, 1-43 Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-11 Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-12 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-8 S Precautions on supplemental Engine oil ...... 8-8 restraint system ...... 1-46 Engine oil and oil filter Safety Precautions when starting and recommendation ...... 10-7 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 driving...... 5-4,5-11 Engine oil viscosity...... 10-7 Childseatbelts...... 1-23, 1-31, 1-38, 1-43 ProPILOT Assist ...... 5-90 Outsidemirrors...... 3-32 Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-20 Push starting ...... 6-11 Overhead sunglasses holder ...... 2-58 Seat adjustment Overheat Front manual seat adjustment ...... 1-3 Front power seat adjustment ...... 1-4 Ifyourvehicleoverheats...... 6-11 R Owner's manual order form ...... 10-23 Rear seat adjustment ...... 1-5 Seatback pockets ...... 2-57 Owner's manual/service manual order Radio Seat belt information...... 10-23 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-41 Childsafety...... 1-21 Readiness for inspection maintenance Infants and small children ...... 1-22 (I/M) test ...... 10-21 P InjuredPerson...... 1-15 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) ...... 5-124 Largerchildren...... 1-22 RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA)...... 5-55 Parking Precautionsonseatbeltusage.....1-12 Rear Door Alert ...... 2-36,2-37,2-53 Parking brake operation ...... 5-25 Pregnant women...... 1-15 Rearpowerwindows...... 2-61 Parking/parkingonhills...... 5-166 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-20 Rearseat...... 1-5 Parkingbrake...... 2-12,2-15,5-25 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-20 Rear Sonar System (RSS) ...... 5-173 Personal lights ...... 2-65 Seatbelts...... 1-12, 7-7 Rearviewmirror...... 3-31 Power Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-19 RearViewMonitor...... 4-3 Power door locks ...... 3-6 Three-pointtypewithretractor.....1-15 Rear window and outside mirror Poweroutlet...... 2-55 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-20 defrosterswitch...... 2-43 Powerrearwindows...... 2-61 Seatbeltwarninglight...... 1-14, 2-14 Recommended Fluids ...... 10-2 Power steering system ...... 5-166 Seats Powerwindows...... 2-60 Adjustment ...... 1-2 11-5 Armrests...... 1-7 Starting the engine ...... 5-17 Turn signal switch ...... 2-49 Automatic drive Starting the engine ...... 5-17 positioner ...... 3-33,3-34,3-35 Steering Frontseats...... 1-2 Heated steering wheel ...... 2-52 T Manual front seat adjustment ...... 1-3 Powersteeringsystem...... 5-166 Rearseat...... 1-5 Steering Assist switch Tachometer ...... 2-6 Security indicator light ...... 2-17 (forvehicleswithProPILOTAssist).....2-52 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Steering wheel ...... 3-29 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), System), engine start...... 2-40,5-16 Stoplight...... 8-27 engine start ...... 2-40,5-16 Security systems Storage...... 2-56 Three-waycatalyst...... 5-5 Vehicle security system ...... 2-39 Sunglasses case...... 2-58 Tilt Self-adjustingbrakes...... 8-21 Sunglasses holder ...... 2-58 Telescopicsteering...... 3-30 Service manual order form...... 10-23 Sunroof ...... 7-5 Tire Servicing air conditioner ...... 4-40 Sunroof (see Moonroof) ...... 2-63 Flattire...... 6-3,6-4 Shifting Sunvisors...... 3-30 Spare tire ...... 6-5,8-42 Continuously Variable Transmission Supplemental air bag warning Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 (CVT) ...... 5-21 light...... 1-67, 2-15 Tire chains ...... 8-37 Shiftleverlockrelease...... 5-23 Supplemental front impact air bag Tire pressure ...... 8-30 Shoulder belt height adjustment ...... 1-19 system ...... 1-54 Tirerotation...... 8-39 Sonar Supplemental restraint system Types of tires ...... 8-36 Rear system ...... 5-173 Information and warning labels . . . .1-67 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-18 Spark plug replacement ...... 8-18 Precautions on supplemental restraint Wheels and tires ...... 8-30 Spark plugs ...... 8-18 system ...... 1-46 Wheel/tire size...... 10-10 Specifications...... 10-9 Supplemental restraint system Tire pressure Speedometer...... 2-4,2-5 (Supplemental air bag system) ...... 1-46 Low tire pressure warning light .....2-12 Speedometer and odometer ...... 2-4 Switch Tire Pressure Monitoring System Spotlights(Seemaplight)...... 2-65 Autolightswitch...... 2-44 (TPMS)...... 5-5,6-3 SRS warning label ...... 1-67 Automatic power window switch . . .2-62 Towing Stability control ...... 5-169 Foglightswitch...... 2-50 4-wheel drive models ...... 6-13 Standard maintenance ...... 9-10,9-16 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 6-2 Flattowing...... 10-18 Starting Headlight and turn signal switch....2-43 Trailertowing...... 10-18 Before starting the engine ...... 5-17 Headlightcontrolswitch...... 2-43 Towingatrailer...... 10-18 Jumpstarting...... 6-9,8-16 Instrument brightness control .....2-49 Towingyourvehicle...... 6-12 Precautions when starting and Power door lock switch ...... 3-6 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) ...... 5-31 driving ...... 5-4,5-11 Rear window and outside mirror Push starting ...... 6-11 defrosterswitch...... 2-43 11-6 Transceiver Vehicle identification number (VIN) Warning labels (for SRS)...... 1-67 HomeLink® Universal (Chassis number) ...... 10-11 Warning/indicator lights and audible Transceiver ...... 2-66,2-67,2-68,2-69, Vehicle identification number (VIN) reminders ...... 2-15 2-69, 2-70 plate...... 10-11 Audible reminders ...... 2-15 Transmission Vehicle immobilizer system...... 2-40,5-16 Indicatorlights...... 2-15 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Vehicleinformationdisplay...... 2-19 Warninglights...... 2-15 fluid...... 8-12 Vehicle loading information ...... 10-14 Warninglights...... 2-15 Driving with Continuously Variable Vehiclerecovery...... 6-14 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders ...... 2-9 Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-18 Vehicle security system ...... 2-39 Weights Transmission shift lever lock release . . .5-23 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle (See dimensions and weights) ...... 10-10 Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-40, 5-16 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another Wheels and tires ...... 8-30 Ventilators ...... 4-28 country) ...... 10-11 Wheel/tire size...... 10-10 Visors...... 3-30 Trip odometer ...... 2-4,2-5 When traveling or registering in another Trunk access through the rear country ...... 10-11 seat...... 1-5, 3-26 W Windows...... 2-60 Trunklid...... 3-25 Locking passengers' windows .....2-61 Trunk lid lock opener lever...... 3-25 Warning Powerrearwindows...... 2-61 Trunklight...... 2-66 Powerwindows...... 2-60 Turn signal switch ...... 2-49 Airbagwarninglight...... 1-67, 2-15 Anti-lock brake warning light ...... 2-10 Rearpowerwindows...... 2-61 Battery charge warning light ...... 2-11 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-13 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-20 U Brakewarninglight...... 2-11 Engine oil pressure warning light....2-12 Wiper Wiper blades ...... 8-20 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-18 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 6-2 Wiper and washer switch ...... 2-42 USB/iPod® Charging Ports ...... 4-41 Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-34 Lowfuelwarninglight...... 2-14,2-34 Lowtirepressurewarninglight.....2-12 V Low windshield-washer fluid warning light...... 2-34 Vanitymirror...... 3-31 Seatbeltwarninglight...... 1-14, 2-14 Variable voltage control system ...... 8-17 Supplemental air bag warning Vehicle dimensions and weights .....10-10 light...... 1-67, 2-15 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) TPMS...... 2-4 system ...... 5-169 Vehicle security system ...... 2-39 Vehicle identification ...... 10-11 Warning/indicator lights and audible Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11 reminders ...... 2-15 11-7 MEMO MEMO MEMO GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION: ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more ∙ U.S. government regulations require Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel tified by a small, square, orange and Index) number (Research octane number containing more than 15% ethanol. black label with the common abbre- Using a fuel containing more than 15% viation or the appropriate percentage 91). ethanol in a vehicle not specifically for that region. designed for a fuel containing more CAUTION than 15% ethanol can adversely affect For additional information, refer to “Recom- mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” ∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door the emission control devices and sys- in the “Technical and consumer informa- label can operate on E-85. Fuel system tems of the vehicle. Damage caused tion” section of this manual. or other damage can occur if E-85 is by such fuel is not covered by the used in vehicles that are not designed NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: to run on E-85. ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc- Refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants ∙ Using a fuel other than that specified tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl and capacities” in the “Technical and con- could adversely affect the emission manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using sumer information” section of this manual. control system, and may also affect fuel containing MMT may adversely the warranty coverage. affect vehicle performance and ve- COLD TIRE PRESSURE: hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens- ∙ Under no circumstances should a ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- For additional information, refer to “Tire and leaded gasoline be used, because this tent, so you may have to consult your Loading Information label” in the “Technical will damage the three-way catalyst. gasoline retailer for more details. and consumer information” section of this Note that Federal and California laws manual. prohibit the use of MMT in reformu- The label is typically located on the driver lated gasoline. side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Break-in schedule” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Printing : November 2018 Publication No.: OM19EA 0L34U1 Printed in the U.S.A. L34-D Owner’s Manual Supplement

The information contained within this supplement updates the following information in the 2019 NISSAN Altima Owner’s Manual:

∙ “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.

Read carefully and keep in vehicle.

Printing: August 2018 Publication No. SU19EA 2L34U0 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS Front seat-mounted side-impact Driver and passenger supplemental supplemental air bag system knee air bags This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems: This system can help cushion the impact This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and force to the driver’s and front passenger’s ∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen- front passenger in certain side-impact col- knees in certain collisions. tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad- lisions. The side air bags are designed to The SRS is designed to supplement the vanced Air Bag System) inflate on the side where the vehicle is im- crash protection provided by the driver and pacted. ∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact front passenger and rear outboard seat supplemental air bag Rear outboard seat-mounted belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat ∙ Rear outboard seat-mounted side- side-impact supplemental air bag belts should always be correctly worn and impact supplemental air bag system the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument This system can help cushion the impact ∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and panel and door finishers. For additional in- force to the chest area of the rear outboard rollover supplemental air bag formation, refer to “Seat belts” in this sec- seat passengers in certain side-impact tion. ∙ Driver and passenger supplemental collisions. The side air bags are designed to knee air bag inflate on the side where the vehicle is im- The supplemental air bags operate only ∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front and pacted. when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. rear outboard seats) Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and Supplemental front-impact air bag rollover supplemental air bag system After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact warning light illuminates. The supple- force to the head of occupants in front and The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can mental air bag warning light will turn off rear outboard seating positions in certain help cushion the impact force to the head after about 7 seconds if the system is side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags and chest of the driver and front passenger operational. in certain frontal collisions. are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time. ∙ The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflate- s.Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from WRS0031 the steering wheel or instrument WARNING panel. Always properly use the seat belts. ∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not ∙ The driver and front passenger seat inflate in the event of a side impact, belt buckles are equipped with sen- rear impact, rollover, or lower severity sors that detect if the seat belts are frontal collision. Always wear your fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air seat belts to help reduce the risk or Bag System monitors the severity of a severity of injury in various kinds of collision and seat belt usage, then in- accidents flates the air bags as needed. Failure ∙ The front passenger air bag and pas- to properly wear seat belts can in- senger knee air bag will not inflate if crease the risk or severity of injury in the passenger air bag status light is an accident. lit. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. ∙ The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. ∙ Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside ARS1133 the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates. ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043 WARNING WARNING ∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or ∙ Children may be severely injured or extend their hands or face out of the killed when the front air bags, side air window. Do not attempt to hold them bags or curtain air bags inflate if they in your lap or arms. Some examples of are not properly restrained. Pre-teens dangerous riding positions are shown and children should be properly rein the illustrations. strained in the rear seat, if possible. ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046 WARNING ∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear- facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section. WARNING ∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front and rear seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend WRS0431 LRS3119 their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of WARNING dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. Front and rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags: ∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. WRS0032 SSS0162 SSS0159 WARNING ∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. ∙ Do not use seat covers on the front or rear seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation. NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System 1. Top tether strap anchor 2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators 3. Rear seat belts 4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag 5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag 6. Head restraints/headrests 7. Front seat belts 8. Side-impact pressure sensor (driver’s side shown; front passenger’s side similar) 9. Supplemental front-impact air bags 10. Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bags 11. Seats 12. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) 13. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats shown; rear seats similar) 14. Satellite sensors 15. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system 16. Satellite sensors 17. Rear seat-mounted side-impact LRS3090 supplemental air bags WARNING ∙ If a forward facing child restraint is ∙ Do not position the front passenger installed in the front passenger seat, seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the To ensure proper operation of the pas- do not position the front passenger front seat does contact the rear seat, senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- seat so the child restraint contacts the the air bag system may determine a tem, please observe the following instrument panel. If the child restraint sensor malfunction has occurred and items. does contact the instrument panel, the front passenger air bag status ∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear the system may determine the seat is light may illuminate and the supple- seat to push or pull on the seatback occupied and the passenger air bag mental air bag warning light may pocket. and passenger knee air bag may de- flash. ploy in a collision. Also the front pas- ∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN senger air bag status light may not 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and illuminate. For additional information restraint/headrest or in the seatback front passenger seats. This system is de- about installing and using child re- pocket. signed to meet certification requirements straints, refer to "Child restraints" in under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in ∙ Make sure that there is nothing press- this section. ing against the rear of the seatback, Canada. However, all of the information, such as a child restraint installed in ∙ Confirm the operating condition with cautions and warnings in this manual the rear seat or an object stored on the front passenger air bag status still apply and must be followed. light. the floor. The driver supplemental front-impact air ∙ Make sure that there is no object ∙ If you notice that the front passenger bag is located in the center of the steering placed under the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as wheel. The front passenger supplemental seat. described in this section, get the oc- front-impact air bag is mounted in the cupant classification system checked. dashboard above the glove box. The front ∙ Make sure that there is no object It is recommended that you visit a air bags are designed to inflate in higher placed between the seat cushion and NISSAN dealer for this service. severity frontal collisions, although they center console or between the seat may inflate if the forces in another type of cushion and the door. ∙ Until you have confirmed with a dealer that your passenger seat occu- collision are similar to those of a higher pant classification system is working severity frontal impact. They may not in- properly, position the occupants in flate in certain frontal collisions. the rear seating positions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always If you have any questions about your air Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat an indication of proper front air bag system bag system, it is recommended that you belts should be correctly worn and the operation. visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information driver and front passenger seated upright about the system. If you are considering as far as practical away from the steering The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System modification of your vehicle due to a dis- wheel or instrument panel. The front air monitors information from the crash zone ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con- bags inflate quickly in order to help protect sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat tact information is contained in the front of the front occupants. Because of this, the belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi- this Owner’s Manual. force of the front air bag inflating can in- cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op- crease the risk of injury if the occupant is When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud eration is based on the severity of a colli- too close to, or is against, the front air bag noise may be heard, followed by the re- sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For module during inflation. lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful the front passenger, the occupant classifi- and does not indicate a fire. Care should be The front air bags deflate quickly after a cation sensor is also monitored. Based on taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita- collision. information from the sensor, only one front tion and choking. Those with a history of a The front air bags operate only when the air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on breathing condition should get fresh air ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- the crash severity and whether the front promptly. occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi- tion. Front air bags, along with the use of seat tionally, the front passenger air bag and After placing the ignition switch in the belts, help to cushion the impact force on passenger knee air bag may be automati- ON position, the supplemental air bag the face and chest of the front occupants. cally turned off under some conditions, de- warning light illuminates. The supple- They can help save lives and reduce seri- pending on the weight detected on the mental air bag warning light will turn off ous injuries. However, an inflating front air front passenger seat and how the seat belt after about 7 seconds if the system is bag may cause facial abrasions or other operational. is used. If the front passenger air bag and injuries. Front air bags do not provide re- passenger knee air bag are OFF, the front straint to the lower body. passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system. Front passenger air bag and status light Status light The front passenger seat is equipped with WARNING an occupant classification sensor (weight The front passenger air bag and pas- sensor) that turns the front passenger air senger knee air bag are designed to au- bag and passenger knee air bag on or off tomatically turn OFF under some condi- depending on the weight applied to the tions. Read this section carefully to front passenger seat. The status of the learn how it operates. Proper use of the front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indi- seat, seat belt, and child restraints is cated by the front passenger air bag status necessary for most effective protec- light which is located on the instru- tion. Failure to follow all instructions in ment panel. this manual concerning the use of After the ignition switch is placed in the seats, seat belts, and child restraints "ON" position, the front passenger air bag can increase the risk or severity of in- LRS3091 status light on the instrument panel illumi- jury in an accident. nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:

PASSENGER AIR BAG FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG AND PASSENGER KNEE AIR BAG CONDITION DESCRIPTION STATUS LIGHT ( ) STATUS Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Nobody/Somebody ON (illuminated) INHIBITED Small Adult in front passenger seat Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects For additional information, refer to “Normal placed on the front passenger seat may operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this also cause the light to operate as de- section. scribed above depending on their weight. Front passenger air bag Front passenger seat adult occupants who OFF. For additional information about are properly seated and using the seat belt proper use and installation, refer to “Child The front passenger air bag is designed to as outlined in this manual should not restraints” in this section. automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is cause the front passenger air bag and pas- operated under some conditions as de- senger knee air bag to be automatically If the front passenger seat is not occupied, scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu- turned OFF. For small adults it may be the front passenger air bag and passenger lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, turned OFF, however if the occupant takes knee air bag are designed not to inflate in a it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag his/her weight off the seat cushion (for ex- crash. However, heavy objects placed on and other air bags in your vehicle are not ample, by not sitting upright, by sitting on the seat could result in air bag inflation, part of this system. an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being because of the object’s weight detected by out of position), this could cause the sensor the occupant classification sensor. Other The purpose of the regulation is to help to turn the air bag OFF.Always be sure to be conditions could also result in air bag infla- reduce the risk of injury or death from an seated and wearing the seat belt properly tion, such as if a child is standing on the inflating air bag to certain front passenger for the most effective protection by the seat, or if two children are on the seat, con- seat occupants, such as children, by requir- seat belt and supplemental air bag. trary to the instructions in this manual. Al- ing the air bag to be automatically turned ways be sure that you and all vehicle occu- OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and pants are seated and restrained properly. requirements. children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap- Using the front passenger air bag status The occupant classification sensor in this propriate child restraints and booster light, you can monitor when the front pas- vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If senger air bag and passenger knee air bag detect an occupant and objects on the this is not possible, the occupant classifica- are automatically turned OFF. seat by weight. For example, if a child is in tion sensor is designed to operate as de- If an adult occupant is in the seat but the the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad- scribed above to turn the front passenger front passenger air bag status light is illu- vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn air bag and passenger knee air bag OFF for minated (indicating that the front passen- the front passenger air bag OFF in accor- specified child restraints as required by the ger air bag and passenger knee air bag are dance with the regulations. Also, if a child regulations. Failing to properly secure child OFF), it could be that the person is a small restraint of the type specified in the regula- restraints and to use the ALR mode may adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly tions is on the seat, its weight and the allow the restraint to tip or move in a colli- or not using the seat belt properly. child’s weight can be detected and cause sion or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag and passenger knee If a child restraint must be used in the front the air bag to turn OFF. air bag inflating in a crash instead of being seat, the front passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, de- If a malfunction occurs in the front passen- ∙ Make sure that there is no object placed pending on the size of the child and the ger air bag system, the supplemental air under the front passenger seat. type of child restraint being used. If the air bag warning light , located in the me- Steps bag status light is not illuminated (indicat- ter and gauges area of the instrument ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash), panel, will be illuminated (blinking or 1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats” it could be that the child restraint or seat steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is section of this manual. Sit upright, lean- belt is not being used properly. Make sure recommended that you visit a NISSAN ing against the seatback, and centered that the child restraint is installed properly, dealer for this service. on the seat cushion with your feet com- the seat belt is used properly and the occu- Normal operation fortably extended to the floor. pant is positioned properly. If the air bag In order for the occupant classification status light is still not illuminated, reposi- 2. Make sure there are no objects on your sensor system to classify the front passen- lap. tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear ger based on weight, please follow the pre- seat. cautions and steps outlined below: 3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat belts” section of this manual. If the front passenger air bag status light Precautions will not illuminate even though you believe Front passenger seat belt buckle sta- that the child restraint, the seat belts and ∙ Make sure that there are no objects tus is monitored by the occupant clas- the occupant are properly positioned, it is weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on sification system, and is used as an in- recommended that you take your vehicle the seat or placed in the seatback put to determine occupancy status. So, to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can pocket. it is highly recommended that the front check system status by using a special ∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other passenger fasten their seat belt. tool. However, until you have confirmed object is not pressing against the rear with a dealer that your air bag is working 4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds of the seatback. properly, reposition the occupant or child allowing the system to classify the restraint in a rear seat. ∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not front passenger before the vehicle is pushing or pulling on the back of the put into motion. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger seat. front passenger air bag status light will 5. Ensure proper classification by check- take a few seconds to register a change in ∙ Make sure that the front passenger ing the front passenger air bag status the front passenger seat status. This is nor- seat or seatback is not forced back light. mal system operation and does not indi- against an object on the seat or floor cate a malfunction. behind it. NOTE: However, if the occupant is not a small NOTE: adult, then this may be due to the following This vehicle’s occupant classification A system check will be performed during conditions that may be interfering with the sensor system generally keeps the clas- which the front passenger air bag status weight sensors: sification locked during driving, so it is light will remain lit for about 7 seconds important that you confirm that the ∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning initially. front passenger is properly classified against the seatback, and centered on If the light is still ON after this, the person prior to driving. However, the occupant the seat cushion with his/her feet com- should be advised not to ride in the front classification sensor may recalculate the fortably extended to the floor. weight of the occupant under some con- passenger seat and the vehicle should be ditions (both while driving and when ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing checked as soon as possible. It is recom- stopped), so front passenger seat occu- against the rear of the seatback. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for pants should continue to remain seated this service. as outlined above. ∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat. 2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, Troubleshooting child or child restraint occupying the ∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback front passenger seat. If you think the front passenger air bag against an object on the seat or floor status light is incorrect: behind it. This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the 1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying ∙ An object placed under the front pas- weight sensors: the front passenger seat: senger seat. ∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright, ∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag ∙ An object placed between the seat light is functioning as intended. The leaning against the seatback, and cen- cushion and center console or between front passenger air bag and passenger tered on the seat cushion with his/her the seat cushion and the door. knee air bag is suppressed. feet comfortably extended to the floor. If the vehicle is moving, please come to a ∙ The child restraint is not properly in- stop when it is safe to do so. Check and stalled, as outlined in the “Child re- correct any of the above conditions. Re- straints” section of this manual. start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. ∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket. ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing 3. If the light is OFF with no front passen- ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes against the rear of the seatback. ger and no objects on the front pas- to your vehicle’s electrical system, senger seat, the vehicle should be ∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on suspension system or front end struc- checked. It is recommended that you the back of the front passenger seat. ture. This could affect proper opera- visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos- tion of the front air bag system. ∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback sible. against an object on the seat or floor ∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys- Other supplemental front-impact tem may result in serious personal in- behind it. air bag precautions jury. Tampering includes changes to ∙ An object placed under the front pas- the steering wheel and the instru- senger seat. WARNING ment panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and ∙ Do not place any objects on the steer- ∙ An object placed between the seat above the instrument panel or by in- ing wheel pad or on the instrument cushion and center console. stalling additional trim material panel. Also, do not place any objects around the air bag system. If the vehicle is moving, please come to a between any occupant and the steer- stop when it is safe to do so. Check and ing wheel or instrument panel. Such ∙ Removing or modifying the front pas- correct any of the above conditions. Re- objects may become dangerous pro- senger seat may affect the function of start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. jectiles and cause injury if the front air the air bag system and result in seri- bags inflate. ous personal injury. NOTE: ∙ Immediately after inflation, several A system check will be performed during front air bag system components will which the front passenger air bag status be hot. Do not touch them; you may light will remain lit for about 7 seconds severely burn yourself. initially. ∙ No unauthorized changes should be If the light is still OFF after this, the small made to any components or wiring of adult, child or child restraint should be re- the supplemental air bag system. This positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle is to prevent accidental inflation of should be checked as soon as possible. It is the supplemental air bag or damage recommended that you visit a NISSAN to the supplemental air bag system. dealer for this service. ∙ Modifying or tampering with the front ∙ It is recommended that you visit a passenger seat may result in serious NISSAN dealer for work on and around personal injury. For example, do not the front air bag system. It is also rec- change the front seats by placing ma- ommended that you visit a NISSAN terial on the seat cushion or by install- dealer for installation of electrical ing additional trim material, such as equipment. The Supplemental Re- seat covers, on the seat that are not straint System (SRS) wiring har- specifically designed to assure proper nesses* should not be modified or dis- air bag operation. Additionally, do not connected. Unauthorized electrical stow any objects under the front pas- test equipment and probing devices senger seat or the seat cushion and should not be used on the air bag seatback. Such objects may interfere system. with the proper operation of the occu- ∙ A cracked windshield should be re- pant classification sensor (weight placed immediately by a qualified re- sensor). LRS2599 pair facility. A cracked windshield Driver’s side ∙ No unauthorized changes should be could affect the function of the made to any components or wiring of supplemental air bag system. Driver and passenger the seat belt system. This may affect supplemental knee air bag *The SRS wiring harness connectors are the front air bag system. Tampering yellow and orange for easy identifica- with the seat belt system may result The knee air bag is located in the knee tion. in serious personal injury. bolster, on the driver’s and passenger’s When selling your vehicle, we request that side. All of the information, cautions and you inform the buyer about the front air warnings in this manual apply and must bag system and guide the buyer to the be followed. The knee air bag is designed appropriate sections in this Owner’s to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, Manual. although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain collisions. The knee air bag helps to cushion the im- WARNING pact force on the knees of the driver and passenger. It can help reduce serious inju- ∙ Do not place any objects between the ries. However, an inflating knee air bag may knee bolster and the driver’s or pas- cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee senger’s seat. Such objects may be- air bag provides restraint to the lower body. come dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a knee air bag inflates. The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to ∙ Right after inflation, the knee air bag help protect the occupants. Because of system components will be hot. Do this, the force of the knee air bag inflating not touch them; you may severely can increase the risk of injury if the occu- burn yourself. pant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag ∙ No unauthorized changes should be will deflate quickly after the collision is over made to any components or wiring of LRS3093 OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for the knee air bag system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation Passenger’s side a short time. of the knee air bag system. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always The knee air bag operates only when the ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes an indication of proper knee air bag opera- ignition switch is placed in the ON position. to your vehicle’s electrical system or tion. suspension system. This could affect When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud After placing the ignition switch in the proper operation of the knee air bag noise may be heard, followed by release of system. smoke. This smoke is not harmful and ON position, the supplemental air bag does not indicate a fire. Care should be warning light illuminates. The supple- ∙ Tampering with the knee air bag sys- taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita- mental air bag warning light will turn off tem may result in serious personal in- tion and choking. Those with a history of a after about 7 seconds if the system is jury. For example, do not change the breathing condition should get fresh air operational. driver or passenger knee bolster or promptly. install additional trim material around the knee air bag. The pretensioner system may activate ∙ It is recommended that you visit a ∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a NISSAN dealer for work on and around collision but pretensioner(s) are not with the supplemental air bag system in the knee air bag. It is also recom- activated, be sure to have the preten- certain types of collisions. Working with the mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer sioner system checked and, if neces- seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help for installation of electrical equip- sary, replaced. It is recommended that tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be- ment. The SRS wiring harnesses* you visit a NISSAN dealer for this comes involved in certain types of colli- should not be modified or discon- service. sions, helping to restrain front and rear out- nected. Unauthorized electrical test board seat occupants. ∙ No unauthorized changes should be equipment and probing devices made to any components or wiring of The pretensioner(s) are encased within the should not be used on the knee air the pretensioner system. This is to seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an- bag system. prevent damage to or accidental acti- chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. *The SRS wiring harness or connectors vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper- These seat belts are used the same way as are yellow or orange for easy identifica- ing with the pretensioner system may conventional seat belts. tion. result in serious personal injury. When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This When selling your vehicle, we request that ∙ It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around smoke is not harmful and does not indi- you inform the buyer about the knee air the pretensioner system. It is also rec- cate a fire. Care should be taken not to bag system and guide the buyer to the ommended that you visit a NISSAN inhale it, as it may cause irritation and appropriate sections in this manual. dealer for installation of electrical choking. Those with a history of a breath- Seat belt with pretensioner(s) equipment. Unauthorized electrical ing condition should get fresh air promptly. (front and rear outboard seats) test equipment and probing devices After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load should not be used on the preten- limiters allow the seat belt to release web- sioner system. WARNING bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against ∙ If you need to dispose of the preten- the chest. ∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec- The supplemental air bag warning after activation. They must be re- ommended that you visit a NISSAN placed together with the retractor dealer for this service. Incorrect dis- light is used to indicate malfunctions and buckle as a unit. posal procedures could cause per- in the pretensioner system. For additional sonal injury. information, refer to "Supplemental air bag warning light" in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

LRS2163 LRS0100 1. SRS air bag warning labels SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING (located on the sun visors) LIGHT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, Warning labels about the supplemental monitors the circuits for the air bag sys- front-impact air bag system are placed in tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring. the vehicle as shown in the illustration. When the ignition is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag WARNING warning light illuminates for about 7 sec- Do not use a rear-facing child restraint onds and then turns off. This means the on a seat protected by an air bag in system is operational. front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death. If any of the following conditions occur, the Repair and replacement WARNING front air bag, side air bag and curtain air procedure bag and pretensioner systems need ser- ∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or vicing: The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air curtain air bag has inflated, the air bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to bag module will not function again ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re- and must be replaced. Additionally, remains on after approximately 7 sec- minder, unless it is damaged, the supple- the activated pretensioner(s) must onds. mental air bag warning light remains illu- also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be re- ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light minated after inflation has occurred. These placed. It is recommended that you flashes intermittently. systems should be repaired and/or re- visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. placed as soon as possible. It is recom- ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light However, the air bag module and pre- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for does not come on at all. tensioner(s) cannot be repaired. this service. Under these conditions, the front air bag, ∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain side air bag and curtain air bag or preten- When maintenance work is required on the air bag systems and the pretensioner sioner systems may not operate properly. vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, system should be inspected if there is They must be checked and repaired. It is curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re- any damage to the front end or side recommended that you visit a NISSAN lated parts should be pointed out to the portion of the vehicle. It is recom- dealer for this service. person performing the maintenance. The mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ignition switch should always be placed in for this service. WARNING the LOCK position when working under the ∙ If you need to dispose of the supple- hood or inside the vehicle. If the supplemental air bag warning mental air bag or pretensioner sys- light is on, it could mean that the front tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom- air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag mended that you visit a NISSAN and/or pretensioner systems will not dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures operate in an accident. To help avoid could cause personal injury. injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The OCS should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.